Micom P124: Self & Dual Powered Overcurrent Relays

MiCOM P124
Self & Dual Powered Overcurrent Relays
Technical Guide
P124/EN T/D44
Technical Guide MiCOM P124
P124/EN T/B44 Page 1/2
SELF & DUAL POWERED OVERCURRENT RELAYS MiCOM P124 CONTENT
Safety instructions
Introduction
Chapter 1
Handling, installation and case dimensions
Chapter 2
User Guide P124 Self-powered Relay
Chapter 3-1
Menu Content MiCOM P124 Self-powered
Chapter 3-2
User Guide P124 Dual-powered Relay
Chapter 4-1
Menu Content MiCOM P124 Dual-powered
Chapter 4-2
Technical data & curves characteristics
Chapter 5
Applications Guide
Chapter 6
Commissioning and Maintenance Guide
Chapter 7
Communication Database
Chapter 8
Connection Diagrams
APPENDIX 1
Commissioning test and record sheets
APPENDIX 2
P124/EN T/B44 Page 2/2
P124/EN T00/B44
SAFETY SECTION
P124/EN T00/B44 Safety Section Page 1/6
CONTENTS
1.
1.1 1.2
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Health and safety Explanation of symbols and labels
3
3 3
2. 3.
3.1 3.2 3.3
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS

Current transformer circuits Battery replacement Insulation and dielectric strength testing
4 4
4 4 4
4. 5.
DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
5 5
BLANK PAGE
1.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
This Safety Section should be read before commencing any work on the equipment.
1.1
Health and safety The information in the Safety Section of the product documentation is intended to ensure that products are properly installed and handled in order to maintain them in a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of the Safety Section.
1.2
Explanation of symbols and labels The meaning of symbols and labels which may be used on the equipment or in the product documentation, is given below.
!
Caution: refer to product documentation Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective/safety *earth terminal
Functional *earth terminal. Note: This symbol may also be used for a protective/safety earth terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly eg. power supply.
*NOTE:
The term earth used throughout the product documentation is the direct equivalent of the North American term ground.
2.
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work on this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The product documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning or servicing the equipment. Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated. If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards. Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated, the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used. Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective earth terminal, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. Omitting or disconnecting the equipment earth may cause a safety hazard. The recommended minimum earth wire size is 2.5 mm2, unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the product documentation. Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked: Voltage rating and polarity; CT circuit rating and integrity of connections; Integrity of earth connection (where applicable)
3.
EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS

The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits.
3.1
Current transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Battery replacement Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity, to avoid possible damage to the equipment. Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
!
3.2
!
3.3
4.
DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Decommissioning: The auxiliary supply circuit in the relay may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the relay (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to decommissioning. It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The product should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any products containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of lithium batteries.
!
Disposal:
5.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Insulation class: IEC 601010-1: 1990/A2:
Class I EN 61010-1: Class I 1993/A2: 1995 1995 1995 1995 This equipment requires a protective (safety) earth connection to ensure user safety. Distribution level, fixed installation. Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 s, 500 , 0.5 J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits. Compliance is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards. Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage Directive. 1993/A2: 1992/A11: 1995 1997 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards.
Installation Category (Overvoltage):
IEC 601010-1: 1990/A2: Category III EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: Category III
Environment:
IEC 601010-1: 1990/A2: Pollution degree 2 EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: Pollution degree 2 73/23/EEC
1995 1995
Product safety:
EN 61010-1: EN 60950:
BLANK PAGE
P124/EN T01/B44
CHAPTER 1 Introduction
Technical Guide Introduction MiCOM P124
P124/EN T01/B44 CHAPTER 1 Page 1/6
CONTENT
1. 2. 3. 4.
INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS MAIN FUNCTIONS
3 3 4 5
PAGE BLANCHE
1.
INTRODUCTION
The overcurrent relays of the MiCOM P124 series are AREVAs self- and dualpowered relays. The MiCOM P124 series are designed to control, protect and supervise industrial plants as well as public distribution systems and substations and do not require an external power supply. They may also be used as backup to distance protection relays in electrical transmission networks.
2.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This guide provides a description of the overcurrent relays: MiCOM P124 self-powered relay, MiCOM P124 dual-powered relay.
It allows the user to become familiar with the relays' applications, installation, setting and commissioning. This manual has the following format : Chapter 1. Introduction
Contents of the manual and general introduction to the MiCOM P124 of relays covered by the Guide. Chapter 2. Handling, installation and case dimensions
Precautions to be taken when handling electronic equipment. Chapter 3. User Guide of MiCOM P124 self-powered relays
A detailed description of the features of the MiCOM P124 self-powered relay. Chapter 4. User Guide of MiCOM P124 dual-powered relays
A detailed description of the features of the MiCOM P124 dual-powered relay. Chapter 5. Technical specifications and curves characteristics
Comprehensive details on nominal values, setting ranges, specifications and curves characteristics Chapter 6. Application Guide
Detailed recommendations for choosing the CTs. Chapter 7. Commissioning and Maintenance Guide
Guide to commissioning, problem solving and maintenance of MiCOM P124 relays. APPENDICES : Connection diagrams Commissioning test records Hardware and Software versions historical
3.
INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS

The range of MiCOM protection relays follows on from the success of the MIDOS, K, MODN and OPN ranges by incorporating the last changes in digital technology. The relays from the MiCOM P124 are fully compatible and use the same modular box concept. The MiCOM P124 of relays provides more protection for the most demanding applications. Each relay has a large number of functions for controlling and collecting data. This can form part of a fully integrated system covering protection, control, instrumentation, data acquisition and the recording of faults, events and disturbances. The relays are equipped on the front panel with a liquid crystal display (LCD) with 2 x 16 back-lit alphanumerical characters, a tactile 7 button keypad (to gain access to all the parameters, alarms and measurements) and 8 LEDs simply displaying the state of the MiCOM P124 relays. In addition, the use of the RS485 communication port makes it possible to read, reinitialise and change the settings of the relays, if required, from a local or remote PC computer equipped with appropriate software. An RS232 port is available on the front panel of the MiCOM P124 relays for downloading a software version (for updating, changing language, etc) and connecting the PC equipped with the support software MiCOM S1. Its flexibility of use, reduced maintenance requirements and ease of integration allow the MiCOM P124 to provide an evolving solution for the problems of the protection of electric networks. The MiCOM P124 relays provide earth fault and overcurrent protection for electrical distribution systems, industrial systems and any application requiring overcurrent protection where no auxiliary supply is available or where the auxiliary supply is not reliable. The earth fault element is sensitive enough for use with electrical systems where the earth fault current is low.
4.
MAIN FUNCTIONS
The following table shows the functions available in the various models of the MiCOM P124 of relays.
Type SELF-POWERED (Order code Vaux = S) X DUAL-POWERED (Order code Vaux = A, F, or M) X X X X X X (note 1) X X (note 1) X X (note 1) X (note 1) (86) (79) X (note 1) X X (note 1) X X X 1 led (note 2) No 1 No option 1 X X (note 4) X X 1 led (note 2) 3 + 4 programmable 1 4 programmable 2 X X X X (note 1) X (note 1) X Not applicable X (note 3) X X (note 3)
Protection functions Non-directional three-phase overcurrent (50/51)
Non-directional earth fault overcurrent X (50N/51N) Instantaneous thresholds Thermal overload Negative sequence overcurrent Undercurrent Circuit breaker failure (50 BF) Cold load pickup Broken conductor detection Blocking logic Relay selective scheme logic Output relays latching Fail-safe operation Autorecloser option Ancillary functions Dual power supply (Vaux + CT) Output for striker Trip changeover output relay for CB coil Healthy LED Other LEDs Magnetic flag for trip information 4 magnetic flags option Setting groups Measurements (true RMS values) Fault records Event records Disturbance records Circuit breaker supervision Communication RS485 rear port Communication RS232 front port (46) (37) X (49) X
Current maximum and average values X
P124/EN T01/B44 CHAPTER 1 Page 6/6 NOTES :
Technical Guide Introduction MiCOM P124 (1) Functions not available in case of loss of auxiliary power supply (2) The Healthy LED indicates that the relay is being powered by either the auxiliary voltage or the CTs above the minimum required current. (3) For the self-powered MiCOM P124 relay, and for the dualpowered MiCOM P124 relay during loss of auxiliary voltage, the power necessary to set the relay can be provided via this RS232 port, thanks to the battery box MiCOM E1. (4) Simplified fault record (date and time not available).
P124/EN T02/C44
CHAPTER 2 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions
Technical Guide Handling, installation and case dimensions MiCOM P124
P124/EN T02/C44 CHAPTER 2 Page 1/8
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Receipt of relays Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
3
3 3
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RELAY MOUNTING UNPACKING STORAGE CASE DIMENSIONS
4 5 5 5 6
BLANK PAGE
1.
1.1
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Receipt of relays Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment prior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained during transit a claim should be made to the transport contractor and AREVA T&D should be promptly notified. Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation should be returned to their protective polythene bags.
1.2
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) The relays use components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges. The electronic circuits are well protected by the metal case and the internal module should not be withdrawn unnecessarily. When handling the module outside its case, care should be taken to avoid contact with components and electrical connections. If removed from the case for storage, the module should be placed in an electrically conducting antistatic bag. There are no setting adjustments within the module and it is advised that it is not unnecessarily disassembled. Although the printed circuit boards are plugged together, the connectors are a manufacturing aid and not intended for frequent dismantling; in fact considerable effort may be required to separate them. Touching the printed circuit board should be avoided, since complementary metal oxide semiconductors (CMOS) are used, which can be damaged by static electricity discharged from the body.
2.
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced. The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily. Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured. 1. 2. Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case. Handle the module by its frontplate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or connectors. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.
3. 4. 5.
If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k 10. If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent a build-up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should be earthed to the case whenever possible. More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a special handling area such as described in the above-mentioned BS and IEC documents.
3.
RELAY MOUNTING
Relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly. If an MMLG test block is to be included it should be positioned at the right-hand side of the assembly (viewed from the front). Modules should remain protected by their metal case during assembly into a panel or rack. For individually mounted relays an outline diagram is supplied in section 6 of this chapter showing the panel cut-outs and hole centres.
4.
UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts is damaged or the settings altered. Relays must only be handled by skilled persons. The installation should be clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration. The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays that have been removed from their cases should not be left in situations where they are exposed to dust or damp. This particularly applies to installations which are being carried out at the same time as construction work.
5.
STORAGE
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt they should be stored in a place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the dehumidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag has been exposed to ambient conditions and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour, prior to replacing it in the carton. Dust which collects on a carton may, on subsequent unpacking, find its way into the relay; in damp conditions the carton and packing may become impregnated with moisture and the de-humifier will lose its efficiency. Storage temperature : 25C to +70C.
6.
CASE DIMENSIONS
MiCOM P124 relays are available in a 4U metal case for panel or flush mounting. Weight : about 2.9 Kg External size : Height Width Depth Case Front panel Case Front panel Case Front panel + case
129.6 4 holes 3.4 148.1 103.6
152 mm 177 mm 148,1 mm 155 mm 140,8 mm 166 mm
10.2 23.2
168
158 0.5
Flush mounting
(Top) Front panel
150 0
+ 0.8
4 holes 4.4
(Holes sizes)
155
25.1
139.8
MiCOM
IA = 214A
Trip Alarm Warning Healthy
P124
Trip
177
155.2
Flush mounting
10 (Front) (Right)
Technical Guide Handling, installation and case dimensions MiCOM P124 MiCOM E1 Battery case sizes : Height Width Length Case Case Case
30 mm 68 mm 110 mm
BLANK PAGE
P124/EN T31/B44
CHAPTER 3-1 User Guide P124 Self-powered Relay
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124
P124/EN T31/B44 CHAPTER 3-1 Page 1/24
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2
DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS

General information Trip of the circuit breaker
3
3 3
2.
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2
USER INTERFACE
Front panel display and keypad The display Keypad Front panel LED and magnetic flag The two areas under the top and bottom flaps The battery box Description of the MiCOM P124 self-powered front panel LEDs Magnetic flag
5
5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.4.1 3.5.4.2 3.5.4.3
MENUS
Default display Access to the menu Password Password protection Entering the password Changing the password ALARM display Electrical system ALARMS Relay Hardware or Software ALARMS Menu contents O.P. Parameters menu CONFIGURATION Menu MEASUREMENTS Menu PROTECTION Menu [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu [49] Therm OL sub-menu
8
8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 15 17 19
P124/EN T31/B44 CHAPTER 3-1 Page 2/24 3.5.5 3.5.5.1 3.5.6 3.5.6.1 3.5.6.2 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu Trip Commands sub-menu RECORD Menu Fault Record sub-menu Time Peak Value
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 20 20 21 21 22
4.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4
WIRING
Current inputs (measurement) Output relays Striker output RS 232 Front Communication port
23
23 23 24 24
1.
1.1

General information The MiCOM P124 relays, in their self-powered and dual-powered versions, make best use of numerical techniques to provide protection and control functions. They have 4 analogue inputs (3 phase currents and 1 earth current). The current inputs have to be specified on order (1A or 5A). The front panel allows the user access to the information in the relay, either via the LEDs and/or magnetic flags, or via the LCD and keypad. The various alarms are saved in memory and are available to the user on the backlit LCD. Reading and clearing of these alarms are possible without password. Wiewing the settings and measurements is not password protected but modification or deletion can only be done after entering the saved password. MiCOM P124 dual-powered version: The MiCOM relay dual-powered version can be powered either by an external power supply source or by the line currents from the CTs (the minimum load current must be over 0.2 In on at least one phase). MiCOM P124 self-powered version: This model provides fully comprehensive protection functions without and external power supply. The power is taken from line currents provided by the CTs (the minimum load current must be over 0.2 In on at least one phase). THIS CHAPTER 3 OF THE P124 TECHNICAL GUIDE DESCRIBES THE USER INTERFACE AND THE CONNECTIONS OF THE SELF-POWERED VERSION OF THE MiCOM P124 RELAY.
1.2
Trip of the circuit breaker Whatever the version (dual or self-powered), the MiCOM P124 relays can trip the circuit breaker via a C/O contact or striker output. Trip via a striker output: The relay performs a capacitance discharge output capable of putting out sufficient power (20mJ at 12V) to a striker (K1.3 type or equivalent) releasing the actuating mechanism of the CB.
39 Striker output P124 41
FIGURE 1: STRIKER SUPPLIED FROM P124
This tripping output is completely independent from any auxiliary supply. Trip via a changeover contact: The relay performs a changeover contact relay output with a high breaking capacity to trip the circuit breaker coil. The operation of the changeover contact is completely independent from any auxiliary supply. On the other hand, an auxiliary supply will be necessary for the supply of the CB coil.
Auxiliary supply 44 RL1 P124 42 40
Auxiliary supply
FIGURE 2: TRIP OF THE CB COIL VIA A CHANGEOVER CONTACT
2.
USER INTERFACE
The MiCOM P124 relay front panel serves as an interface between the user and the protection relay. It enables the user to enter relay settings, display the measured values, alarms and display clearly the various actions carried out by MiCOM P124 relay. The front panel of the relay consists of three separate sections: The LCD display and the keypad, The LED's The two zones under the upper and lower flaps.
The battery box (accessory): Associated with the MiCOM P124 relays, the battery box MiCOM E1 can be used to allow the user to access the menu when there is no line current (circuit breaker open). 2.1 2.1.1 Front panel display and keypad The display The front panel of the MiCOM P124 relays caries a liquid crystal display (LCD) on which data such as settings, measured values and alarms can be viewed. The data is accessed through a menu system. The liquid crystal display has two lines each with sixteen characters. A back-light is activated when any key is pressed and will remain lit for five minutes after the last key press. This allows the display to be read in most lighting conditions. NOTA : 2.1.2 Keypad The keypad has seven keys divided into two groups : Two keys situated immediately under the screen (keys ! and "). Five main keys situated at the middle of the front face are for programming. The two keys ! and " are dedicated for reading and acknowledging the alarms. So as to display successive alarms, press on key ". The alarms are presented in reverse order for their detection (the most recent first, the oldest last). So as to acknowledge the alarms, the user can either acknowledge each alarm using ! or go to the end of the ALARM menu and carry out a general acknowledgement. NOTA : NO PASSWORD IS REQUIRED TO ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS. The five keys situated in the middle of the MiCOM front panel are dedicated to setting the relay. The # $ % & keys make it possible to move in the direction indicated to the various levels of the menus. The ' key validates a choice or value (modification of settings). IN ORDER TO SAVE ENERGY, THE LCD IS BACKLIT ONLY WHEN THERE IS AT LEAST ONE PHASE CURRENT ABOVE 0.5 In.
P124/EN T31/B44 CHAPTER 3-1 Page 6/24 2.2 Front panel LED and magnetic flag
One LED and one magnetic flag are available for the self-powered version of the P124 relay. The default corresponding labels on the front panel are in the English language but the user is provided with a set of French stickers. 2.3 The two areas under the top and bottom flaps Under the upper flap, a label identifies the relay according to its model (ordering code) and series number. This information defines the product uniquely and specifically. In making all requests for information from AREVA T&D After Sales Department, please quote these two numbers. Information indicated in the lower portion of this label covers the nominal earth current value and the rated current (1A or 5A). Under the lower flap, an RS232 port is available to download a new version of the protection software, as well as the settings created in a dedicated PC software MiCOM S1. The same software allows to view all the relays internal data (measurements, events). When there is no line current from the CTs (circuit breaker open), the user can view or modify the settings by powering the MiCOM P124 relay with the battery box MiCOM E1 connected to the RS232 port. The withdrawal of the MiCOM active part (chassis) from the case is effected by opening the two flaps, then with a 3mm screwdriver, turn the extractor situated under the upper flap, and pull using the two slots situated behind these flaps. 2.4 The battery box
Battery box
To MiCOM P124 RS 232
Input for external supply 12Vcc 24Vcc
FIGURE 3: BATTERY BOX MiCOM E1
The battery box performs the two following functions: 1. Temporary powering of the relay in order to allow the user to view or modify data. The battery used is a 6LR61 type (9V) which can power the relay up to 3 hours. When the battery is flat it is possible to power the battery box with an external dc supply. The dc voltage value must be comprised between 12Vdc and 24Vdc. RS232 interface between the MiCOM P124 relay and the PC equipped with the setting software MiCOM S1.
2.
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 2.5 Description of the MiCOM P124 self-powered front panel
2 x 16 character backlit display 2 tactile buttons to view and acknowledge alarms and indications
Magnetic flag for trip indication
Healthy LED
Retractable flaps allowing to remove the active part of the relay
5-key keypad for settings and viewing RS 232
Battery box MiCOM E1
FIGURE 4: MiCOM P124 SELF-POWERED FRONT PANEL
2.5.1
LEDs One LED is available on the left hand side of the front panel: LED 4 Colour: GREEN Label: HEALTHY
This LED is lit when the relay correctly powered by a sufficient line current, provided by one or several CTs. The LED is also lit when the relay is powered by the battery box. Note: the front panel of the self-powered relay has holes meant for the dual-powered relay. On the self-powered relay, only LED 4 is used. 2.5.2 Magnetic flag The magnetic flag indicates that a tripping command has been issued to the CB coil or striker by switching to yellow. The flag can be reset (black side) by depressing the ! key either the relay is being powered by the battery box when the circuit breaker is open, or when it is powered by a sufficient line current.
3.
3.1
MENUS
The menu of the MiCOM P124 relays is organised into main and sub menus. Default display By default, the value of the current IA is continuously displayed. As soon as an alarm is generated by the MiCOM relay, that information is considered as priority and replaces the default value.
3.2
Access to the menu Complete menu access is performed by manipulation of the keys # $ % &. The general arrangement of the menus is shown in figure 3. Reading of parameters and measurements is possible without entering the password. Modification of the parameters requires entering the password. Should an error be made in entering a parameter, press ! to cancel. Except for reading and cancelling, the keys ! and " are inactive. NOTA : The letter P is displayed at the botton-right of each first (main menu) and second menu level when the password is entered.
This password remains active for 5 minutes of keypad inactivity. 3.3 3.3.1 Password Password protection Password protection is applicable to the relay settings, especially to the selection of the various thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of inputs and outputs relays. The password consists of four alphabetical capital characters. When leaving the factory, the password is AAAA. The user can define his own combination of characters. Should the password be lost or forgotten, the modification of the stored parameters of the relay is prohibited. It is then necessary to contact the manufacturer or his agent by specifying the serial number of the relay so as to receive a stand-by password specific to the relay concerned. 3.3.2 Entering the password The input of the password is requested as soon as a modification of a parameter is made for any one of the menus or sub-menus. The user enters for each of the 4 characters/letters and validates the entire password with '. After 5 seconds, the display returns to the point of the preceding menu. If no action is taken on the keypad for 5 minutes, the password is deactivated. A new request shall be associated with any subsequent parameter modification. NOTE : WHILE THE PASSWORD IS ACTIVE, IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO DOWNLOAD A SETTING FILE FROM THE PC SETTING SOFTWARE MiCOM S1.
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.3.3 Changing the password
To change the active password, go to the OP. PARAMETERS menu and then to the point of the Password sub menu. Enter the old password and validate. Then press ' and enter the new password character per character and validate the new password using '. The message NEW PASSWORD OK is displayed to indicate that the password has changed. 3.4 ALARM display The management of alarms is directly displayed on the LCD. The display of alarm messages has priority over the default current value. As soon as an alarm is detected by the relay (threshold crossing for example), the message is displayed on the MiCOM LCD display. The alarm messages are classed as follows : 3.4.1 Electrical power network alarm message Hardware or software fault message from the relay.
Electrical system ALARMS Any crossing of a threshold (instantaneous or time delay) generates an "electrical network alarm". For each threshold the involved threshold is indicated. If several alarms are triggered, they are all stored in their order of appearance the most recent alarm first, the oldest alarm last. Each message is numbered and the total of messages is shown. The user read all the alarm messages using " without entering the password. The user acknowledges the alarms using !. The user can acknowledge each message one by one or all by going to the end of the list and acknowledge all the messages using !. The different Electrical system alarms are described below : I0> I0>> I0>>> I> I>> I>>> tI0> tI0>> tI0>>> tI> tI>> tI>>> THERMAL ALARM THERMAL TRIP 1ST stage earth fault pick-up 2nd stage earth fault pick-up 3rd stage earth fault pick-up 1st stage overcurrent pick-up 2nd stage overcurrent pick-up 3rd stage overcurrent pick-up 1st stage earth fault time-out 2nd stage earth fault time-out 3rd stage earth fault time-out 1st stage overcurrent time-out 2nd stage overcurrent time-out 3rd stage overcurrent time-out thermal alarm threshold pick-up thermal trip threshold pick-up
P124/EN T31/B44 CHAPTER 3-1 Page 10/24 3.4.2 Relay Hardware or Software ALARMS
Any software or hardware Fault of the MiCOM relay generates a "hard/software alarm". If several alarms are acquired they are all stored in their order of appearance. Display of the alarms is in reverse order (the most recent first and the oldest last). Each message is numbered and the total of messages is indicated below. The user can read all the alarm messages with the aid of ", without entering the password. The acknowledgement of the relay alarm messages is IMPOSSIBLE. Only the disappearance of the cause reset the alarm. Possible Hardware or Software alarm messages : EEPROM ERROR DATA CT ERROR : : Data in EEPROM memory in fault Analogue channel in fault Calibration zone in fault
EEPROM ERROR CALIBR :

WARNING:
IN ORDER TO SAVE ENERGY, THE WATCHDOG RELAY RL0 IS USED ONLY WHEN THERE IS A 0.4 IN CURRENT ON AT LEAST ONE PHASE. RL0 IS DEENERGISED BELOW THAT CURRENT LEVEL OR IN CASE OF HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE PROBLEM.
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5 Menu contents
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
OP PARAMETERS
CONFIGURATION
MEASUREMENTS
PROTECTION
AUTOMAT.CTRL
RECORDS
FIGURE 3 : ORGANISATION OF MICOM P124 SELF-POWERED MAIN MENU
The menu of the MiCOM P124 Self-powered (without auxiliary power supply) relays is divided into 6 sections : OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS PROTECTION AUTOMAT. CTRL RECORDS To access these menus from the default display use $. To return to the default display from these menus or sub-menus press #. NOTE: A menu content table is given in the chapter 3-2.
P124/EN T31/B44 CHAPTER 3-1 Page 12/24 3.5.1 O.P. Parameters menu
OP Parameters
Heading of the OP PARAMETERS menu To gain access to the menu content, press $. Entry of the password to be able to modify the MiCOM relay settings and parameters. To enter the password, press '. Entry of the password is made letter by letter using # $ to go up or down the alphabet. After each letter, press % to enter the following letter. At the end, press ' to validate the password. If the password is correct, the message PASSWORD OK is displayed on the screen. The password is initailly set in the factory to AAAA
Password = ****
Password =
AAAA
WARNING :
AS SOON AS THE PASSWORD HAS BEEN ENTERED, NO SETTING CHANGE USING THE FRONT PORT COMMUNICATION CAN BE ACCEPTED AND THIS DURING 5 MINUTES.
Description =
P124 S
Displays the MiCOM P124applicable relay model S = Without auxiliary power supply (self-powered) D = Dual-powered (with auxiliary power supply) Displays the name of the equipment associated with the relay. NOTE : The reference is initially set in the factory to ALST. Displays the version of the software
Reference = ALST
Software Version
1.B Nominal value of the network frequency. Select either 50 or 60 Hz. To modify this value, press ' and press # $ to select the desired value. Validate your choice using '.
Frequency =
50 Hz
Relay Status =
1 0
Displays the state of the trip logic output. (RL1) - state 0 : output relay inactive - state 1 : output relay active NOTA : The Watch-dog output (RL0) is not display in the output status menu.
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5.2 CONFIGURATION Menu
The CONFIGURATION menu is used to set the earth and phase CT ratios so that primary values can be displayed. CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the CT RATIO menu, press $, %. Heading of the CT RATIO sub-menu. To gain access to the sub-menu content, press $.
CT Ratio
Line CT primary =
1000
Display of the primary ratio of the phase CT. The value consists of 4 digits: Minimum 1, Maximum 9999. Press ' to modify this value and use # $ % & to display the new primary phase CT ratio. Enable your choice using ' at the end of selection Display of the primary ratio of the earth CT. The consist of 4 digits : Minimum 1, Maximum 9999. Press ' to modify this value and use # $ % & to display the new primary earth CT ratio. Enable your choice using ' at the end of selection.
E/Gnd CT primary = 1000
P124/EN T31/B44 CHAPTER 3-1 Page 14/24 3.5.3 MEASUREMENTS Menu
MEASUREMENTS
Heading of the MEASUREMENTS menu. To gain access to the MEASUREMENTS menu, press $, %, 2 times.
Frequency = 50.01 Hz
Display the network frequency calculated from phase currents
IA=
257.05 A
Display the A phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub-menu). Display the B phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub-menu) Display the C phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub-menu). Display the earth current (True RMS value) taking into account the earth CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub-menu). Display the % thermal state based on true RMS values. To clear the % values, press !.
IB=
258.80 A
IC= 257.50 A
IN=
20.00 A
Thermal 2 = RST = [C]
0%
Max. & Average. I RST = [C]
Allows the user to clear the maximum (peak) and average (rolling) memorised values of the current. To clear these values, press !. Display the peak value for phase A. The value is the true RMS maximum value.
Max. IA Rms =
350 A
Max. IB Rms = 0.00 A
Display the peak value for phase B. The value is the true RMS maximum value.
Max. IC Rms =
0.00 A
Display the peak value for phase C. The value is the true RMS maximum value.
Average. IA Rms =
150 A
Display the rolling value for phase A. The value is the true RMS average value.
Average. IB Rms = 148 A
Display the rolling value for phase B. The value is the true RMS average value.
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 Average. IC Rms =
P124/EN T31/B44 CHAPTER 3-1 Page 15/24 Display the rolling value for phase C. The value is the true RMS average value.
153 A
3.5.4
PROTECTION Menu The PROTECTION menu enables a user to program various protection functions and settings (thresholds, time delay) associated with each of the phase or earth protection functions. The various sub-menus are : [50/51] Phase OC [50N/51N] E/Gnd [49] Therm OL
3.5.4.1
[50/51] Phase OC sub-menu Heading of the PROTECTION menu.
PROTECTION
[50/51] Phase OC
Heading of the [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu To gain access to the sub-menu points, press $.
I> ?
Yes
Selection of the first phase threshold (I>). Select Yes or No. If the user enters I>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I> (No), go to I>> menu. Displays the threshold current value I>. To modify this value, press '.The threshold I> is adjustable from 0.1 to 4 In. Press ' to enable your adjustment.
I> =
0.1 In
Delay Type
DMT
Selection of the I> time delay type threshold. Select (DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve).
3.5.4.1.1
I> DMT threshold menu Display of the I> DMT time delay. DMT Selection of the I> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.
Delay Type
tl >
100 ms

3.5.4.1.2
I> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curve menu Display the I> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves). IDMT Selection of the I> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI using # and enable your choice using the key ' Select the curve TMS value. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using # and enable your choice using '
Delay Type
Idmt =
IEC SI
Tms =
0.025
3.5.4.1.3
I> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu RI Display of the I> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve)
Delay Type
K=
0.1 I>> threshold menu Yes
Selection of the RI curve K value. Select from 0.100 to 10 using # and enable your choice using '.
3.5.4.1.4
I >> ?
Selection of the I>> second phase threshold. Select Yes or No. If the user enters I>>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I>> (No) go to I>>> menu. Selection of the I>> second threshold current value. To modify this value, press '. The threshold I>>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 In. Press ' to enable your adjustment. Selection of the second threshold I>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.
I >>
2.0 In
tI >>
300 ms I>>> threshold menu Yes
3.5.4.1.5
I >>> ?
Selection of the I>>> third phase threshold. Select Yes or No. If the user enters I>>>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I>>> (No), the LCD display returns to the heading of the menu [50/51] Phase OC. Selection of the I>>> third threshold current value. To modify this value, press '. The threshold I>>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 In. Press ' to enable your adjustment. Selection of the third threshold I>>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.
I >>>
10.0 In
tI >>>
110 ms
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5.4.2 [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu Heading of the PROTECTION menu.
PROTECTION
[50N/51N] E Gnd
Heading of the [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu To gain access to the sub-menu content, press $.
le> ?
Yes
Selection of the first earth threshold (Ie>). Select Yes or No. If the user enters Ie>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. User enters > (No), go to Ie>> menu. Displays the current threshold value Ie>. To modify this value, press '. The threshold Ie> is adjustable from : 0.002 to 1 Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range) 0.01 to 1 Ien (0.01 to 8 Ien Range) 0.1 to 25 Ien (0.1 to 40 Ien Range) Press ' to enable your adjustment.
le>
0.01 len
Delay Type
DMT
Selection of the Ie> threshold time delay type. Select (DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve) using # and enable your choice using '.
3.5.4.2.1
Ie> DMT threshold menu Display of the Ie> DMT time delay. DMT Selection of the Ie> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.
Delay Type
t le>
100 ms
3.5.4.2.2
Ie> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu DMT Display of the Ie> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves).
Delay Type
Idmt
IEC SI
Selection of the Ie> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI using # and enable your choice using the key '. Selection of the selected curve Tms value. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using # and enable your choice using '.
Tms
0.025

3.5.4.2.3
Ie> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu RI Display of the Ie> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve)
Delay Type
0.1 Ie>> threshold menu Yes
3.5.4.2.4
le >> ?
Selection of the Ie>> second earth threshold. Select Yes or No. If the user enters Ie>>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters>> (No) go to Ie>>> menu. Selection of the Ie>> second threshold current value. To modify this value, press '. The threshold Ie>> is adjustable from : 0.002 to 1Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range) 0.01 to 8 Ien (0.01 to 8 Ien Range) 0.5 to 40 Ien (0.1 to 40 Ion Range) Press ' to validate your adjustment. Selection of the second threshold Ie>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and validate your choice using '.
Ie >>
0.1 Ien
t Ie >>
300 ms
3.5.4.2.5
Seuil I0>>> temps constant CST Yes Selection of the Ie>>> third earth threshold. Select Yes or No. If the user validates Ie>>>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters Ie>>> (No), the LCD display returns to the heading of the menu [50N/51N] E/Gnd. Selection of the Ie>>> third threshold current value. To modify this value, press 'T he threshold Ie>>> is adjustable from : 0.002 to 1Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range) 0.01 to 8 Ien (0.01 to 8 Ien Range) 0.5 to 40 Ien (0.1 to 40 Ion Range) Press ' to validate your adjustment. Selection of the third threshold Ie>>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and validate your choice using '.
le >>> ?
Ie >>> 1.0 Ien
t Ie >>>
300 ms
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5.4.3 [49] Therm OL sub-menu Heading of the PROTECTION menu.
PROTECTION
[49] Therm OL
[Heading of the [49] Therm OL (Thermal Overload) submenu.
Therm OL
Yes
Selection of the thermal overload function. Select Yes or No. If the user enters Yes, the following menu is displayed. If the user enters No, no menu content is displayed. Displays the thermal current threshold value I>. To modify this value, press '. The threshold I> is adjustable from 0.2 to 3.2 In step of 0.01. Press ' to validate your choice. Displays the Te thermal time constant associated with the thermal overload formula. To modify this value, press '. The time constant Te is adjustable from 1 min to 200 min, step of 1 min. Press ' to validate your adjustment. Displays the k factor associated with the thermal overload function. To modify this value, press '. k factor is adjustable from 1 to 1.5, step of 0.01. Press ' to validate your adjustment.
I> = 0.3 In
Te =
1 mn
k=
1.05
Trip 100%
Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal overload trip threshold. To modify this value, press '. Trip is adjustable from 50 % to 200 % step of 1%. Press ' to validate your adjustment. Selection of the thermal overload alarm function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates Yes, the following menu is displayed. If the user validate No, refer to the THERMAL OVERLOAD sub-menu. Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal overload alarm threshold. To modify this value, press '. Trip is adjustable from 50 % to 200 % step of 1%. Press ' to validate your adjustment.
Alarm ? Yes
Alarm ?
Yes
P124/EN T31/B44 CHAPTER 3-1 Page 20/24 3.5.5 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu
The AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu makes it possible to programme the various automation functions included in the MiCOM P124. 3.5.5.1 Trip Commands Trip Commands sub-menu This sub-menu is used to set the time-delayed thresholds which activate the striker and/or the special tripping relay and send a tripping command to the circuit breaker or contactor. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu.
Trip Commands
Heading of the Trip ORDER sub-menu.
Trip tI > =
Yes
Allocation of the first phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>) to the trip output relay and/or the striker (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, the trip output relay (RL1) shall be activated at the end of the time delay tI>. If the user validates No, the trip output relay (RL1) shall never be activated, even at the end of the time delay tI>. Allocation of the second phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No. Allocation to the third phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No. Allocation of the first earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No. Allocation of the second earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No. Allocation of the third earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No. Allocation of the thermal overload Trip information ( Trip) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Trip tI >>
Yes
Trip tI >>>
Yes
Trip tIe >
Yes
Trip tIe >>
Yes
Trip tIe >>>
Yes
Trip Thermal Yes
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5.6 RECORD Menu
The RECORD menu makes it possible to read the MiCOM P124 records. The various sub-menus are : Fault Record Time Peak Value
3.5.6.1 Fault Record sub-menu The Fault RECORD sub-menu makes possible to read the various parameters and measurement for each of the five fault store in MiCOM P124 memory. RECORD Heading of the RECORD menu.
Fault record
Heading of the Fault Record sub-menu
Record Number
Selection of the Fault record number (by selecting either 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5) to be displayed. To modify this fault record number, press ' then using # enter the required number. Validate your choice using '. Display the faulty phase for the chosen fault record. (NONE, phase A, B, C, EARTH, AB, AC, BC, or ABC).
Faulted Phase
Phase A
Threshold
I>>
Display the origin of the fault that as generated the trip order.
Magnitude
1200 A
Display the magnitude of the faulty current. This value is the 50/60 Hz amplitude.
P124/EN T31/B44 CHAPTER 3-1 Page 22/24 3.5.6.2 Time Peak Value
The DISTURBANCE sub-menu makes possible to set the various parameters and thresholds associated to this recording function. RECORD Heading of the RECORD menu.
Time Peak Value
Heading of the Time Peak Value sub-menu.
Time Window =
5 mn
Display of the time window during which the mean and maximum current values are stored. To change this value, press the ' key. This window can be set with the following values: 5mn, 10mn, 15mn, 30mn or 60mn. Press the ' key to confirm the setting.
4.
WIRING
The external connection diagrams of MiCOM P124 are provided in APPENDIX 1 to this document.
4.1
Current inputs (measurement) The MiCOM P124 relays have 4 analogue inputs (3 phase current inputs and 1 earth current input). The rated current value of these measurement inputs is either 1A or 5A (must be specified on order). The rated current is indicated on the front panel of the relay, behind the top flap.
WARNING: THE CONNECTION OF THE EARTH CURRENT INPUT MAY DIFFER DEPENDING ON WHETHER IT IS CONNECTED TO A CORE BALANCED CT OR TO A SUMMATION OF THE 3 PHASE CTS.
Connection to 3 phase CTs and 1 core balanced CT: Generally, when the relay is used with three phase CTs and one core balanced CT, there is not need to power the relay through the earth channel. In this case, the core balanced CT can be connected to terminals 47 and 48. For some phase to earth faults, when some specific cores are used, it can be possible that the fault does not generate a current high enough* to power the relay from only one phase circuit. It will then be necessary to connect the core TC to terminals 55 and 56 in order to power the relay through the earth circuit as well. *reminder: the MiCOM P124 relay is self-powered from a 0.2 In current on at least one phase. Connection to 3 phase CTs: In this case the earth current is derived from the summation of the 3 phase currents. It is not necessary to power the relay via the earth circuit. The summation of the 3 CTs must be connected to terminals 47 and 48. Connection to 2 phase CTs and 1 core balanced CT: In this case it is necessary to power the relay through the earth circuit. The core balanced CT must be connected to terminals 55 and 56. 4.2 Output relays Two output relays are available on the self-powered model: One trip relay (RL1) with a C/O contact (1 common, 1 normally open, 1 normally closed) One watchdog relay (RL0) with a C/O contact (1 common, 1 normally open, 1 normally closed)
IN ORDER TO SAVE ENERGY, THE WATCHDOG RELAY IS USED ONLY WHEN THERE IS A 0.4 IN CURRENT ON AT LEAST ONE PHASE. IT IS DEENERGISED BELOW THAT CURRENT LEVEL OR WHEN A SOFTWARE OR HARDWARE FAULT IS PRESENT.
WARNING :
P124/EN T31/B44 CHAPTER 3-1 Page 24/24 4.3 Striker output
The P124 relays are fitted with a striker output used to trip the circuit breaker via a striker device in the absence of an external auxiliary supply. The 2 terminals to be connected to the striker are polarised: + terminal 39 terminal 41
according to the external connection diagrams provided in Appendix 1 of the Technical Guide. 4.4 RS 232 Front Communication port MiCOM P124 relays provide the user an RS 232 communication port. This link is dedicated to the Setting software MiCOM S1. The cable between the P124 and the PC is a standard RS 232 shield-cable. RS232 PC port 2 3 5 7 RS 232 Cable MiCOM P124 end 9 pin male connector 2 3 5 7
In cases where the battery box MiCOM E1 is used to power the P124 relay, it is placed between the PC and the P124 relay.
P124/EN T32/B44
CHAPTER 3-2 Menu Content MiCOM P124 Self-powered
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
Technical Guide Menu content MiCOM P124
OP PARAMETERS
CONFIGURATION
MEASUREMENTS RECORD
PROTECTION
AUTOMAT. CTRL [49] Therm OL Therm OL ? Yes I> 0.01 Ien Te DMT t le > 100 ms Trip 1.05 K 1 mn Trip tI >>> Yes Trip tIe > Yes 0.3 In Trip tI >> Yes Trip tI > Yes Fault Record Record Number 4 Faulted Phase PHASE A B Threshold l>> Magnitude 1200 A
Password [50/51] Phase OC I>? 257.05 A I> 258.80 A IC 257.50 A tl > 20.00 A 100 ms Delay Type DMT Delay Type 0.1 In Ie > Yes Yes Ie > ? [50N/51N] E/Gnd
****
IA
CT Ratio
Frequency 50.01 Hz
Trip Commands
Time Peak Value Time Window = 5 mn
Description P124-S IB
Line CT primary 1000
Reference
E/Gnd CT primary
ALST
1000
Software version 1.B IN
Frequency Thermal RST = [C] 0% Idmt IEC SI Tms 0.025 IEC SI Alarm Idmt Alarm ? Max & Average I RST = [C] Max 0.025 Delay Type Delay Type RI K IA Rms 0.02 A IB Rms 0.02 A IC Rms 0.02 A 0.1 Yes 2.0 In 300 ms I>> ? I>> tl>> K= RI Tms Delay Type IDMT Delay Type IDMT
50 Hz
100 %
Trip tIe >> Yes Trip tIe >>> Yes Yes
Relay Status
1 0
100 %
Trip Thermal Yes
Max
Max
0.1 Ie>> ? Yes Ie>> 0.1 Ien t Ie >> 300 ms Ie>>>? Yes Ie>>> 1.0 Ien t Ie>>> 300 ms
MiCOM P124 S Menu content From V1A Software
Average IA Rms 0.00 A Average IB Rms 0.00 A Average IC Rms 0.00 A
I>>> ? Yes I>>> 10.0 In tl>>> 110 ms
BLANK PAGE
P124/EN T41/B44
CHAPTER 4-1 User Guide P124 Dual-Powered Relay
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2

General information Trip of the circuit breaker
5
5 6
2.
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3
USER INTERFACE
The LCD display and the keypad The LCD display Keypad Front panel LED and magnetic flag The two areas under the top and bottom flaps The battery box Description of the MiCOM P124 dual-powered front panel Leds Magnetic flags Battery backup
7
7 7 7 8 8 9 10 10 11 11
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.2.1 3.5.2.2 3.5.2.3 3.5.2.4 3.5.2.5 3.5.2.6
MENUS
Default display Access to the menu Password Password protection Entering the password Changing the password ALARM display Electrical system ALARMS Relay Hardware or Software ALARMS Contenu du menu OP. PARAMETERS Menu CONFIGURATION Menu DISPLAY sub-menu CT RATIO sub-menu RL1 Output Relay sub-menu Led 5 to 8 configuration sub-menus Group Select sub-menu Alarms sub-menu
12
12 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 16 17 19 21 21 22 22 23 26 27
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 2/68 3.5.2.7 3.5.2.8 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.4.1 3.5.4.2 3.5.4.3 3.5.4.4 3.5.5 3.5.5.1 Configuration Inputs sub-menu Date format sub-menu MEASUREMENTS Menu COMMUNICATION Menu MODBUS COMMUNICATION Menu Courier COMMUNICATION Menu IEC 60870-5-103 COMMUNICATION Menu DNP3 COMMUNICATION Menu PROTECTION Menu [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 27 28 29 32 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 35 35 35 36 36 36 36 37 37 37 38 38 38 38 38 38 39 39 39 40 40 40
3.5.5.1.1 I> DMT threshold menu 3.5.5.1.2 I> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curve menu 3.5.5.1.2.1 3.5.5.1.2.2 I> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu I> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu
3.5.5.1.2.2.1 I> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu 3.5.5.1.3 I> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu 3.5.5.1.3.1 I> DMT reset time, Electromechanical RI curves menu
3.5.5.1.4 >> threshold menu 3.5.5.1.5 I>>> threshold menu 3.5.5.2 [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu
3.5.5.2.1 Ie> DMT threshold menu 3.5.5.2.2 Ie> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu 3.5.5.2.2.1 3.5.5.2.2.2 3.5.5.2.2.3 Ie> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu Ie> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu Ie> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu
3.5.5.2.3 Ie> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu 3.5.5.2.3.1 Ie> DMT reset time, RI curves menu
3.5.5.2.4 Ie> threshold, LABORELEC curve 3.5.5.2.5 Ie>> threshold menu 3.5.5.2.6 Ie>>> threshold menu 3.5.5.3 [46] NEGATIVE Phase SEQUENCE I2> sub-menu
3.5.5.3.1 I2> DMT threshold menu 3.5.5.3.2 I2> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu 3.5.5.3.2.1 I2> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5.5.3.2.2 3.5.5.3.2.3 I2> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu I2> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 3/68 40 41 41 41 42 43 43 44 44 44 46 46 48 49 51 52 55 56 57 58 59 60 62 62 63 64 65
3.5.5.3.3 I2> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu 3.5.5.3.3.1 3.5.5.4 3.5.5.5 3.5.5.6 I2> DMT reset time, RI curves
[49] Therm OL sub-menu [37] UNDERCURRENT I< sub-menu [79] AUTORECLOSE sub-menu
3.5.5.6.1 [79] EXTERNAL CB FAILURE 3.5.5.6.2 [79] EXTERNAL BLOCKING 3.5.5.6.3 [79] DEAD and RECLAIM TIMES 3.5.6 3.5.6.1 3.5.6.2 3.5.6.3 3.5.6.4 3.5.6.5 3.5.6.6 3.5.6.7 3.5.6.8 3.5.6.9 3.5.6.10 3.5.6.11 3.5.7 3.5.7.1 3.5.7.2 3.5.7.3 3.5.7.4 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu Trip Commands sub-menu Latch Functions Sub-Menu Blocking Logic sub-menu Logic Select sub-menu Outputs Relays sub-menu Latch of the Output relays RL2 to RL6 Inputs sub-menu BROKEN CONDUCTOR sub-menu COLD LOAD PICK-UP sub-menu CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE sub-menu CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION sub-menu RECORDS Menu CB MONITORING sub-menu Fault Record sub-menu DISTURBANCE RECORD sub-menu Time PEAK VALUE sub-menu
4.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7
WIRING
Current inputs (measurement) Output relays Striker output RS232 front communication port Auxiliary supply Logic inputs RS485 rear communication port
66
66 66 67 67 67 68 68
BLANK PAGE
1.
1.1

General information The MiCOM P124 relays, in their self-powered and dual-powered versions, make best use of numerical techniques to provide protection and control functions. They have 4 analogue inputs (3 phase currents and 1 earth current). The current inputs have to be specified on order (1A or 5A). The front panel allows the user access to the information in the relay, either via the LEDs and/or magnetic flags, or via the LCD and keypad. The various alarms are saved in memory and are available to the user on the backlit LCD. Reading and clearing of these alarms are possible without password. Viewing the settings and measurements is not password protected but modification or deletion can only be done after entering the saved password. MiCOM P124 Self-powered : This model provides fully comprehensive protection functions without and external power supply. The power is taken from line currents provided by the CTs (the minimum load current must be over 0.2 In on at least one phase). MiCOM P124 Dual-powered : The MiCOM relay dual-powered version can be powered either by an external power supply source or by the line currents from the CTs (the minimum load current must be over 0.2 In on at least one phase). The auxiliary power supply of the relay is provided by a dc or ac auxiliary source through a high capacity internal transformer which protects the relays against short interruptions (<50ms). In case of auxiliary power loss, the relay is powered by the line CTs (downgraded mode) and performs the same functions as the self-powered model. MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relays have available via their rear connectors, a standard RS485 port. Communication protocols can be chosen at the time of order, from MODBUS RTU, Courier, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3. Using the communication channel, all stored information (measurements, alarms, parameters) can be read, and settings can be modified. RS485 based communication allows MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relays to be directly linked to a digital control system (MiCOM S10 for example). All the available data is then placed at the disposal of the supervisor and can be processed either locally or remotely. Consultation and modification of this data can be carried out on site with a normal PC and the appropriate AREVA software MiCOM S1. It is possible to assign the output relays to any of the available control or protection functions. The logic inputs can also be assigned to the control functions. CHAPTER 4 OF THE TECHNICAL GUIDE DESCRIBES THE USER INTERFACE AND THE CONNECTIONS OF THE MiCOM P124 RELAY DUAL-POWERED VERSION.
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 6/68 1.2 Trip of the circuit breaker
Both versions of the MiCOM P124 relays can trip the circuit breaker from a C/O output contact and/or a heavy burden output to power a striker Whatever the version (dual or self-powered), the MiCOM P124 relays can trip the circuit breaker via a C/O contact or striker output. Trip via a striker output: The relay performs a capacitance discharge output capable of putting out sufficient power (20mJ at 12V) to a striker (K1.3 type or equivalent) releasing the actuating mechanism of the CB.
39 Striker output P124 41
FIGURE 1: STRIKER SUPPLIED FROM P124
This tripping output is completely independent from any auxiliary supply. Trip via a changeover contact: The relay performs a changeover contact relay output with a high breaking capacity to trip the circuit breaker coil. The operation of the changeover contact is completely independent from any auxiliary supply. On the other hand, an auxiliary supply will be necessary for the supply of the CB coil.
Auxiliary supply 44 RL1 P124 42 40
Auxiliary supply
FIGURE 2: TRIP OF THE CB COIL VIA A CHANGEOVER CONTACT
NOTE:
The change over contact can be used with fail-safe operation. This mode can be programmed in the "Configuration/RL1 output relay/fail-safe relay".
2.
USER INTERFACE
The MiCOM P124 relay front panel serves as an interface between the user and the protection relay. It enables the user to enter relay settings, display the measured values, alarms and display clearly the various actions carried out by MiCOM P124 relay. The front panel of the relay consists of three separate sections: The LCD display and the keypad, The Led's The two zones under the upper and lower flaps.
The battery box (accessory): Associated with the MiCOM P124 relays, the battery box MiCOM E1 can be used to allow the user to access the menu when there is no line current (circuit breaker open). 2.1 2.1.1 The LCD display and the keypad The LCD display The front panel of the MiCOM P124 relays caries a liquid crystal display (LCD) on which data such as settings, measured values and alarms can be viewed. The data is accessed through a menu system. The liquid crystal display has two lines each with sixteen characters. A back-light is activated when any key is pressed and will remain lit for five minutes after the last key press. This allows the display to be read in most lighting conditions. NOTA : IN CASE OF AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY FAILURE AND IN ORDER TO SAVE ENERGY, THE LCD IS BACKLIT ONLY WHEN THERE IS AT LEAST ONE PHASE CURRENT ABOVE 0.5 IN.
2.1.2
Keypad The keypad has seven keys divided into two groups : Two keys situated immediately under the screen (keys ! and "). Five main keys situated at the middle of the front face are for programming. The two keys ! and " are dedicated for reading and acknowledging the alarms. So as to display successive alarms, press on key ". The alarms are presented in reverse order for their detection (the most recent first, the oldest last). So as to acknowledge the alarms, the user can either acknowledge each alarm using ! or go to the end of the ALARM menu and carry out a general acknowledgement. NOTA : NO PASSWORD IS REQUIRED TO ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS.
The five keys situated in the middle of the MiCOM front panel are dedicated to set the relay. The keys # $ % & make it possible to move in the direction indicated to the various levels of the menus. The key ' validates a choice or value (modification of settings). 2.2 Front panel LED and magnetic flag Height LEDS and up to 5 magnetic flags are available for the dual-powered version of the P124 relay. The default corresponding labels on the front panel are in the English language but the user is provided with a set of French stickers. 2.3 The two areas under the top and bottom flaps Under the upper flap, a label identifies the relay according to its model (ordering code) and series number. This information defines the product uniquely and specifically. In making all requests for information from AREVA T&D After Sales Department, please quote these two numbers. Information indicated in the lower portion of this label covers the auxiliary supply voltage, the nominal earth current value and the rated current (1A or 5A). Under the lower flap, a RS232 port is available to download a new version of the protection software, as well as the settings created in a dedicated PC software MiCOM S1. The same software allows to view all the relays internal data (measurements, events). In case of auxiliary power supply failure and when there is no line current from the CTs (circuit breaker open), the user can view or modify the settings by powering the MiCOM P124 relay with the battery box MiCOM E1 connected to the RS232 port. The withdrawability of the MiCOM active part (chassis) from the case is effected by opening the two flaps, then with a 3mm screwdriver, turn the extractor situated under the upper flap, and pull using the two slots situated behind these flaps.
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 2.4 The battery box
Battery box
To MiCOM P124 RS 232
Input for external supply 12Vcc 24Vcc
FIGURE 3: BATTERY BOX MiCOM E1
The battery box performs the two following functions: 1. Temporary powering of the relay in order to allow the user to view or modify data when the auxiliary power supply has failed. The battery used is a 6LR61 type (9V) which can power the relay up to 3 hours. When the battery is flat it is possible to power the battery box with an external dc supply. The dc voltage value must be comprised between 12Vdc and 24Vdc. 2. RS232 interface between the MiCOM P124 relay and the PC equipped with the setting software MiCOM S1.
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 10/68 2.5 Description of the MiCOM P124 dual-powered front panel
2 x 16 character backlit LCD display 2 tactile keys to read and clear alarms and messages
Magnetic flags : - 1 trip - 4 programmable
Trip LED Alarm LED Warning LED Healthy LED 4 programmable LEDs 5-key keypad for settings and viewing Pile
Removable flaps to extract the active part
RS 232
FIGURE 4: MiCOM P124 DUAL-POWERED FRONT PANEL
2.5.1
Leds Eight Leds are located in the left portion of the front face (numbered from 1 to 8 starting from the top): Led 1 Colour : RED Label : Trip Led 1 indicates when a trip order has been issued by the relay to the cut-off element (circuit breaker, contactor). This Led recopies the trip order issued to the Trip logic output relay and/or the striker output. Its normal state is unlit. It is illuminated as soon as a triggering order is issued. It goes out when the associated alarm is acknowledged. NOTE: Led 2 this LED is out of service when the auxiliary power supply has failed, even if sufficient line currents are present in the CTs. Colour : ORANGE Label : Alarm
Led 2 indicates that an alarm has been registered by MiCOM P124 relay. The alarms are either threshold crossings (instantaneous), or tripping orders (time delayed). As soon as an alarm is registered, the Led flashes. When all the stored alarms are read, the Led is illuminated continuously. When all the alarms are acknowledged, the Led goes out. NOTE: - the alarms generated by intantaneous indications are self or hand-resettable. - the programmation self-reset (Yes or No) is possible in the "Configuration/Alarms" menu. - this Led is out of service when the auxiliary supply has failed, even if sufficient line currents are present in the CTs.
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 Led 3 Color : ORANGE
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 11/68 Label : Warning
Led 3 is dedicated to the internal alarms of MiCOM P124 relay. When a minor internal alarm (typically communication Fault) is detected, the Led flashes continuously. When the Fault is classed as major , the Led is illuminated continuously. The extinction of this Led is only possible by the disappearance of the cause that provoked it (repair of the module, disappearance of the Fault). NOTA : this LED is out of service when the auxiliary power supply has failed, even if sufficient line currents are present in the CTs. In that case, equipment failure is indicated by the watchdog contact (RL0). Colour : GREEN Label : Healthy
Led 4
This LED indicates that the MiCOM P124 relay is powered by an auxiliary voltage within the rated operative range (0.8 to 1.2Uaux). In case of auxiliary supply failure, the LED indicates that the relay is correctly powered by a sufficient line current, provided by one or several CTs. The LED is also lit when the relay is powered by the battery box. Led 5 to 8 Colour : RED Label : Aux.1 to 4. These Leds can be programmed by the user on the basis of information on available thresholds (instantaneous and time-delayed) and state of the logic. The user selects the information he wishes to see associates with each Led from the menu element (Logic OR). Each Led illuminates when the associated information is valid. The extinction of each Led is linked to the acknowledgement of the associated alarms. NOTE: 2.5.2 Magnetic flags There are five flags on the right hand side of the front panel. On the base model, only one flag is available. It indicates that a tripping command has been issued to the CB coil or striker by switching to yellow. This flag is functional even during auxiliary power supply failure. Optionally (selectable on order), four extra magnetic flags are functional even during power supply failure. These flags are used as backups of LEDS 5 to 8. 2.5.3 Battery backup The front panel of each dual-powered MiCOM P124 relay is fitted with a battery to save the event, fault and disturbance records as well as thermal state in case of auxiliary power failure The battery used is a 3.6V lithium battery.
WARNING: ONLY RECORDS MADE WHEN AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY IS PRESENT ARE SAVED IN MEMORY.
these LEDs are out of service when the auxiliary power supply has failed, even if sufficient line currents are present in the CTs.
3.
3.1
MENUS
The menu of the MiCOM P124 relays is organised into main and sub menus. Default display By default, the current value (selected phase or earth) is continuously displayed. As soon as an alarm is generated by the MiCOM relay, that information is considered as priority and replaces the default value. The default display choice is made in the CONFIGURATION/Display menu.
3.2
Access to the menu Complete menu access is performed by manipulation of the keys # $ % &. The general arrangement of the menus is shown in figure 3. Reading of parameters and measurements is possible without entering the password. Modification of the parameters requires entering the password. Should an error be made in entering a parameter, press ! to cancel. Except for reading and cancelling, the keys ! and " are inactive. NOTA : The letter P is displayed when the password is entered. If no key is pushed during 5 minutes, the password becomes inactive.
3.3 3.3.1
Password Password protection Password protection is applicable to the relay settings, especially to the selection of the various thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of inputs and outputs relays. The password consists of four alphabetical capital characters. When leaving the factory, the password is AAAA. The user can define his own combination of characters. Should the password be lost or forgotten, the modification of the stored parameters of the relay is prohibited. It is then necessary to contact the manufacturer or his agent by specifying the serial number of the relay so as to receive a stand-by password specific to the relay concerned.
3.3.2
Entering the password The input of the password is requested as soon as a modification of a parameter is made for any one of the menus or sub-menus. The user enters for each of the 4 characters/letters and validates the entire password with '. After 5 seconds, the display returns to the point of the preceding menu. If no action is taken on the keypad for 5 minutes, the password is desactivated. A new request shall be associated with any subsequent parameter modification.
WARNING : WHILE THE PASSWORD IS ACTIVE, IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO DOWNLOAD A SETTING FILE FROM THE PC SETTING SOFTWARE.
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.3.3 Changing the password
To change the active password, go to the OP. PARAMETERS menu and then to the point of the Password sub menu. Enter the old password and validate. Then press ' and enter the new password character per character and validate the new password using '. The message NEW PASSWORD OK is displayed to indicate that the password has changed. 3.4 ALARM display The management of alarms is directly displayed on the LCD. The display of alarm messages has priority over the default current value. As soon as an alarm is detected by the relay (threshold crossing for example), the message is displayed on the MiCOM LCD display and the Alarm Led (2nd Led) lights up. The alarm messages are classed as follows : Electrical power network alarm message Hardware or software fault message from the relay. 3.4.1 Electrical system ALARMS Any crossing of a threshold (instantaneous or time delay) generates an "electrical network alarm". For each threshold the involved threshold is indicated. If several alarms are triggered, they are all stored in their order of appearance the most recent alarm first, the oldest alarm last. Each message is numbered and the total of messages is shown. The user read all the alarm messages using " without entering the password. The user acknowledges the alarms using !. The user can acknowledge each message one by one or all by going to the end of the list and acknowledge all the messages using !. NOTE : note that the self-reset of the alarms generated by instantaneous (crossing of threshold) is possible by configuration in the "Configuration/Alarms/Inst. Self-reset. ?" menu.
The management of the Alarm Led is directly linked to the status of the stored alarms. If one or several messages are NOT READ and NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the alarm Led flashes. If all the messages have been READ but NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the alarm Led remains lights up continuously. If all the messages have been READ and ACKNOWLEDGED, (if the alarm cause has been cleared) the alarm Led goes out.
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 14/68 The different electrical systems alarms are described below : Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> I> I>> I>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tI> tI>> tI>>> THERMAL ALARM THERMAL TRIP I< BRKN COND. 1ST stage earth fault pick-up 2nd stage earth fault pick-up 3rd stage earth fault pick-up 1st stage overcurrent pick-up 2nd stage overcurrent pick-up 3rd stage overcurrent pick-up 1st stage earth fault time-out 2nd stage earth fault time-out 3rd stage earth fault time-out 1st stage overcurrent time-out 2nd stage overcurrent time-out 3rd stage overcurrent time-out thermal alarm threshold pick-up thermal trip threshold pick-up undercurrent element pick-up
broken conductor indication. I2/I1 element pick-up for longer than tBC. TBC is settable in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Broken cond. menu. t AUX1 time-out t AUX2 time-out cirduit breaker failure indication (the CB does not trip on tBF time-out) tBF is settable in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Fail menu. negative sequence current threshold pick-up negative sequence current threshold time-out Faulty circuit breaker indication by assignable logic input (settable in AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu). Operating (or tripping) time of the circuit breaker longer than the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu. Number of circuit breaker operation higher that the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu. Broken current measured higher than the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu. Circuit breaker trip circuit failure for longer than the supervision timer t SUP settable in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu.
t AUX 1 t AUX 2 CB FAILURE
I 2> tI 2> SF6 LOW T operating CB
CB OPEN NB
Sum An TRIP CIRCUIT
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 CB CLOSE FAILURE RECLOSER SUCCESS
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 15/68 Circuit breaker closing time longer than the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu. Successful reclose indication. Indicates that when the fault has been cleared upon circuit breaker reclosure, and has not re-appeared before expiry of the reclaim time. Recloser blocking indication. Generated by: - auxiliary power supply failure during dead time (definitive trip). - external breaker failure indication (ex. SF6 low). Indication provided via a logic input assigned to the CB FAILURE function in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu. - external blocking indication, external blocking can be set by the user in the PROTECTION/ [79] AUTORECLOSE/EXT BLOCK menu. This blocking information is provided via a logic input assigned to the Block [79] function in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu. - definitive trip. - remote trip command during the reclaim time. - pick-up of I2> or thermal trip during dead time. - breaker failure (circuit breaker failure to trip on expiry of tBF). - breaker operating time (or tripping time) longer than the set time.
RECLOSER LOCKED
CONFLICT RECLOS.
Configuration conflict of the recloser function. This indication is generated by: - O/O Interlock not assigned to a logic input or assigned but not wired to the input. - no output relay assigned to the CB CLOSE function (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output Relays menu ). - trip contact latched. - no recloser cycle assigned to the protection functions (PROTECTION/ [79] Autoreclose menu ).
LATCH OUTPUT RELAY
Information displayed when at least an output relay (RL2 to RL6) is latched.
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 16/68 3.4.2 Relay Hardware or Software ALARMS
Any software or hardware Fault of the MiCOM relay generates a "hard/software alarm". If several alarms are acquired they are all stored in their order of appearance. Display of the alarms is in reverse order (the most recent first and the oldest last). Each message is numbered and the total of messages is indicated below. The user can read all the alarm messages with the aid of ", without entering the password. The acknowledgement of the relay alarm messages is IMPOSSIBLE. Only the disappearance of the cause reset the alarm. The management of the WARNING Led is directly linked to the status of the alarms stored in the memory. If the fault is major (the relay cannot perform protection functions), the WARNING Led is lit fixed. If the Fault is minor (no influence on the protection and automation function e.g.communication failure), the WARNING Led is flashing. Possible Hardware or Software alarm messages : Major fault : The protection and automation functions are stopped. The RL0 watchdog relay is deenergised (35-36 contact closed). AUX SUPPLY LOST : Information displayed in case of loose of auxiliary power supply and RL1 configured in fail-safe operation. The MiCOM P124 relay being self-powered by CTs. : Data in EEPROM memory in fault : Analogue channel in fault
EEPROM ERROR DATA CT ERROR
EEPROM ERROR CALIBR : Calibration zone in fault Minor fault : The MiCOM P124 is fully operational. The RL0 watchdog relay is energised (35-36 contact open, 36-37 contact closed). BATTERY FAIL COMM. ERROR RAM ERROR CLOCK ERROR NOTE : : Battery in fault ; battery flat or not correctly in place. : Communications failure : Battery backed memory : Clock error the "Battery fail" and "RAM error" messages can be configured displayed yes or no in the "Configuration/Alarms" menu.
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5 Contenu du menu
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
OP PARAMETERS
CONFIGURATION
MEASUREMENTS
COMMUNICATION
PROTECTION G1
PROTECTION G2
AUTOMAT. CTRL
RECORDS
FIGURE 3 : ORGANISATION OF MiCOM P124 DUAL-POWERED MAIN MENU
The menu of the MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relays is divided into 8 sections : OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS COMMUNICATION PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G2 AUTOMAT. CTRL RECORDS To access these menus from the default display use $ To return to the default display from these menus or sub-menus press #. NOTE : a Menu content table is given in the chapter 4-2.
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5.1 OP. PARAMETERS Menu OP PARAMETERS
Heading of the OP PARAMETERS menu.
Password ****
Entry of the password to be able to modify the MiCOM relay settings and parameters. To enter the password, press ' Entry of the password is made letter by letter using # $ to go up or down the alphabet. After each letter, press % to enter the following letter. At the end, press ' to validate the password. If the password is correct, the message PASSWORD OK is displayed on the screen.
Password AAAA
WARNING :
AS SOON AS THE PASSWORD HAS BEEN ENTERED, NO SETTING CHANGE USING THE COMMUNICATION (RS485 OR RS232) CAN BE ACCEPTED AND THIS DURING 5 MINUTES
Description P124 D
Displays the MiCOM P124 applicable relay model S = Self-powered (Without auxiliary power supply) D = Dual-powered power supply (with auxiliary supply) Displays the name of the equipment associated with the relay. The entry of the reference is made by character by character using # $. After each character (letter, number or sign), press % to enter the following character. At the end of entering, press ' to validate the reference. NOTE : The reference is initially set in the factory to ALST. Displays the version of the software.
Reference = ALST
Software Version 4.A
Frequency = 50 Hz
Nominal value of the network frequency. Select either 50 or 60 Hz. To modify this value, press ' and press # $ to select the desired value. Validate your choice using '. Displays the Active Group 1 = Protection Group G1 2 = Protection Group G2
Active Group =
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 20/68 Input Status 54321 01011
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 Displays the state of the logic Inputs. The Logic Inputs are numbered from 1 to 5 starting from the right. The state of each input is : - state 0 : input inactive - state 1 : input active Displays the state of the logic outputs. The Logic Outputs are numbered from 1 to 6 starting from the right. The state of each output is : - state 0 : output relay inactive - state 1 : output relay active NOTE : The Watch-dog output (RL0) is not display in the output status menu. Displays the date. To modify this date press 'then using % to enter the required value. Enable your choice using '. In this example the date is : 09 November 2001. Displays the hour. To modify this hour press ' then using % to enter the required value. Enable your choice using '. In this example the time is : 13 hours, 15 minutes, 33 secondes
Relay Status
654321 001011
Date 09/11/01
Time 13:15:33
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5.2 CONFIGURATION Menu
The CONFIGURATION menu makes it possible to configure the labels used to display currents, the Earth and Phase CT ratios and also configure Leds 5 to 8. The various sub-menus are : Display CT Ratio Led 5 RL1 Output Relay Led 6 Led 7 Led 8 Group Select Alarms Configuration Inputs Date format To gain access to the CONFIGURATION menu from the default display, press $ then %. 3.5.2.1 DISPLAY sub-menu CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu.
Display
Heading of the DISPLAY sub-menu.
Default Display RMS I A
Display of the default current value (by selecting either Phase A, Phase B , Phase C, or Earth N). To modify this default value, press ' then using % to enter the required value. Enable your choice using '. Edit phase A label by selecting A, L1, or R. This value can be modified after entering the password and is displayed with the corresponding measurement. Edit phase B label by selecting B, L2, or S. This value can be modified after entering the password and is displayed with the corresponding measurement.
Phase A Text A
Phase B Text B
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 22/68 Phase C Text
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 Edit phase C label by selecting C, L3, or T. This value can be modified after entering the password and is displayed with the corresponding measurement. Edit earth label by selecting N, E, or G. This value can be modified after entering the password and is displayed with the corresponding measurement.
E/Gnd Text N
3.5.2.2
CT RATIO sub-menu CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu.
CT Ratio
Heading of the CT RATIO sub-menu.
Line CT primary 1000
Display of the primary ratio of the phase CT. The value consists of 4 digits: Minimum 1, Maximum 9999. Press ' to modify this value and use # $ % & to display the new primary phase CT ratio. Enable your choice using ' at the end of selection.
E/Gnd CT primary 1000
Display of the primary ratio of the earth CT. The consist of 4 digits : Minimum 1, Maximum 9999. Press ' to modify this value and use # $ % & to display the new primary earth CT ratio. Enable your choice using ' at the end of selection.
3.5.2.3
RL1 Output Relay sub-menu This sub-menu enables the user to choose the operation mode of the trip output relay RL1. Fail-safe operation is possible. CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu.
RL1Output Relay
Heading of the RL1 Output Relay sub-menu.
Fail-safe Relay Yes
Choice of the operation mode of the trip output relay RL1. Yes = fail-safe operation
NOTE :
the fail-safe operation programmation is possible only without alarm displayed.
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5.2.4 Led 5 to 8 configuration sub-menus 25 different parameters can be assigned to each led. These parameters are :
TEXT
I> I>> I>>> tI> tI>> tI>>> Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> Therm Trip Brkn Cond. CB Fail tI2> Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Recloser Run Recloser Blocked t Aux 1 t Aux 2 NOTES :
Information
Instantaneous first phase threshold Instantaneous second phase threshold Instantaneous third phase threshold Time delayed first phase threshold Time delayed second phase threshold Time delayed third phase threshold Instantaneous first earth threshold Instantaneous second earth threshold Instantaneous third earth threshold Time delayed first earth threshold Time delayed second earth threshold Time delayed third earth threshold Trip on Thermal overload Broken conductor detection Detection of a Circuit Breaker failure Time delayed negative phase sequence Copy of the state of the Logic Input n1 Copy of the state of the Logic Input n2 Copy of the state of the Logic Input n3 Copy of the state of the Logic Input n4 Copy of the state of the Logic Input n5 Auto-recloser function in progress Auto-recloser function locked Copy of the state of the Logic Input delayed by t Aux 1 Copy of the state of the Logic Input delayed by t Aux 2 - Each parameter can be assigned to one or more Led's. - Each Led can be lit by one or more parameters (OR logic).
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 24/68 Example of Led 5 setting : CONFIGURATION
Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu.
Led 5
Heading Led 5 sub-menu.
Led I>
No
Displays the instantaneous threshold I> associated with Led 5. To modify this choice, press ' and using # scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using '. Displays the time delay threshold tI> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press ' and using # scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using '. Displays the instantaneous threshold I>> associated with LED 5.
Led tI >
No
Led I >>
No
Led tI >>
No
Displays the time delay threshold tI>> associated with LED 5.
Led I >>>
No
Displays the instantaneous threshold I>>> associated with LED 5.
Led tI >>>
No
Displays the time delay threshold tI>>> associated with LED 5.
Led Ie >
No
Displays the instantaneous threshold Ie> associated with LED 5.
Led tIe >
No
Displays the time delay threshold tIe> associated with LED 5.
Led Ie >>
No
Displays the instantaneous threshold Ie>> associated with LED 5.
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 Led tIe >>
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 25/68 Displays the time delay threshold tIe>> associated with LED 5.
No
Led Ie >>>
No
Displays the instantaneous threshold Ie>>> associated with LED 5.
Led tIe >>>
No
Displays the time delay threshold tIe>>> associated with LED 5.
Led Therm. Trip
Yes
Displays the thermal threshold tI trip order associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press ' and using # scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using '. Displays the broken conductor information associated with LED 5.
Led Brkn. Cond No
Led CB Fail Yes
Displays the circuit breaker failure information associated with LED 5.
Led tI2 > Yes
Displays the negative phase sequence threshold tI2> associated with LED 5.
Led Input 1 No
Displays the state of the logic input 1 associated with LED 5.
Led Input 2
No
Led Input 3 No
Led Input 4 No
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 26/68 Led Input 5
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 Displays the state of the logic input 5 associated with LED 5.
No
Led Recloser Run
No
Displays the state of the auto-recloser function (running or not) associated with LED 5.
Led Recloser Blocked
No
Displays the state of the auto-recloser function (locked or free) associated with LED 5.
Led t Aux 1
Displays the state of the logic input delayed by t Aux 1. Yes
Led t Aux 2 Yes 3.5.2.5 Group Select sub-menu CONFIGURATION
Displays the state of the logic input delayed by t Aux 2.
Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the menu, press $, %, $, % 6 times.
Group Select
Heading of the CONFIGURATION SELECTION submenu. This allows the user to select the active setting group (1 or 2) Displays the operation mode of the digital input associated to the change of group of protection : "EDGE" or "LEVEL". To change the operation mode, press ' then using #enter the required value. Enable your choice using '. Display of the active setting group (1 or 2). To change the active setting group, press ' then using #enter the required value (1 or 2).
Change Group Input =
EDGE
Setting Group 1
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5.2.6 Alarms sub-menu CONFIGURATION
Heading of the configuration menu. To gain access to Alarms menu, press $, %, $, % 7 times.
Alarms
Heading of the Alarms sub-menu. To gain access to the sub-menu content, press $.
Inst. Self-reset ? No
Displays the reset mode of the alarms concerning the instantaneous : self-reset Yes or No. If the user chooses No, the reset will be done by push button. To change the reset mode press ' then using # scroll throught the available selections. Enable your choice using '. Displays the possibility Yes or No to display the alarm "RAM ERROR" or "BATTERY FAIL" in case of ram error or battery failure.
Alarm Battery No 3.5.2.7
Configuration Inputs sub-menu It is possible to configure the operation of the digital input, either on falling edge/low level, or on rising edge/high level. Falling edge or low level (idem for rising edge or high level) depends of the application of the digital inputs. Example : a digital input configured "blocking logic" will operate on level, on the other hand a digital input configured "Cold load pick up" will operate on edge. ONLY a digital input configured "change of setting group" can operate either on edge or on level. Function allocated to the Digital Input Unlatch of the output relays Position of the CB, 52a or 52b Blocking logic 1 & 2 Logic Selectivity 1 & 2 Aux 1 & Aux 2 CB Fault Reset of the thermal state Blocking of the Autorecloser Cold load Pick Up Start of disturbance record Trip circuit supervision Change of setting group CB Fail start Operation of the Digital Input On level On level On level On level On level On level On edge On level On edge On edge On level On edge, or on level On edge
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to Configuration Inputs menu, press $, %, $, % 8 times. Heading of the Configuration Inputs sub-menu. To gain access to the sub-menu content, press $.
CONFIGURATION
Configuration Inputs
Inputs
54321 10110
Displays the operation of the digital Inputs either on falling edge/low level, or on rising edge/high level. 0 = falling edge/low level 1 = rising edge/high level To change the operation mode press ' then using # scroll throught the available selections. Enable your choice using '.
3.5.2.8
Date format sub-menu This sub-menu enables the user to choose the format of the date for Modbus communication. CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu.
Date format
Heading of the Date format sub-menu.
Date format = PRIVATE
Displays the format of the date either PRIVATE or IEC protocol.
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5.3 MEASUREMENTS Menu MEASUREMENTS
Heading of the MEASUREMENTS menu. To gain access to the MEASUREMENTS menu, press $, %, 2 times.
Frequency 50.01 Hz
Display the network frequency calculated from phase currents
IA 257.05 A
Display the A phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub-menu). Display the B phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub-menu). Display the C phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub-menu). Display the earth current (True RMS value) taking into account the earth CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub-menu). Display the positive sequence component
IB 258.80 A
IC 257.50 A
IN 20.00 A
I1 103 A
I2 50 A
Display the negative sequence component
RATIO I2/I1 50%
Display the ratio I2/I1
In - fn RST = [C]
0.0 A
Display the earth current (True RMS value) minus the current value at the fundamental frequency (value of the harmonics). Displays the % thermal state based on true RMS values. To clear the % values, press !.
Thermal RST = [C]
0%
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 30/68 Max & Average I RST = [C]
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 Allows the user to clear the maximum (peak) and average (rolling) memorised values of the current. To clear these values, press !. Display the peak value for phase A. The value is the true RMS maximum value.
Max IA Rms 350 A
Max IB Rms 0.00 A
Display the peak value for phase B. The value is the true RMS maximum value.
Max IC Rms 0.00 A
Display the peak value for phase C. The value is the true RMS maximum value.
Average IA Rms 150 A
Display the rolling value for phase A. The value is the true RMS average value.
Average IB Rms 148 A
Display the rolling value for phase B. The value is the true RMS average value.
Average IC Rms
153 A
Display the rolling value for phase C. The value is the true RMS average value.
Reclose Stats RST = [C]
Allows the user to clear the reclosing statistics. To clear these values, press !.
Total Recloses 0
Display the total number of reclosers.
Cycle 1 Recloses 0
Display the total number of cycle 1 reclosers.
Cycle 2 Recloses 0
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 Cycle 3 Recloses
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 31/68 Display the total number of cycle 3 reclosers. 0
Cycle 4 Recloses 0
Total Trip & Lockout
Display the total number of definitive trips issued from the autorecloser.
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 32/68 3.5.4 COMMUNICATION Menu
The COMMUNICATION menu depends on the type of communication : MODBUS, Courier, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3. 3.5.4.1 MODBUS COMMUNICATION Menu COMMUNICATION Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. To gain access to the menu, press $, %, 3 times.
Communication ? Yes
Use MODBUS RTU communication via the RS485 on the rear of the relay. To activate communication, press the key ' and use $ to select Yes. Enable your choice using '. Display of the speed of MODBUS transmission. Select from : 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bauds using # and enable your choice using '. Display the parity in the MODBUS frame. Select Even, Odd or None using # and enable your choice using '. Display of the number of data bits in the MODBUS frame. Select 7 or 8 using # and enable your choice using '. Display of the number of stop bits in the MODBUS frame. Select 0 or 1 using # and enable your choice using '. Display of the network address of the MiCOM relay in the MODBUS network. Select from 1 to 255 using # and enable your choice using '.
Baud Rate 19200 Bd
Parity None
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits
Relay Address 12
WARNING :
A MODBUS NETWORK CAN ONLY COMPRISE 32 RELAY ADDRESSES ON THE SAME MODBUS SUB-LAN.
3.5.4.2
Courier COMMUNICATION Menu COMMUNICATION Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. To gain access to the menu, press $, %, 3 times.
Communication ? Yes
Use Courier communication via the RS485 on the rear of the relay. To activate communication, press the key ' and use # to select Yes. Enable your choice using '. Display the network address of the MiCOM relay in the Courier network. Select from 1 to 255 using # and enable your choice using '.
Relay Address 12
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5.4.3 IEC 60870-5-103 COMMUNICATION Menu COMMUNICATION
Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. To gain access to the menu, press $, %, 3 times.
Communication ? Yes
Use IEC 60870-5-103 communication via the RS485 on the rear of the relay. To activate communication, press the ' key and use # to select Yes. Enable your choice using '. Display of the speed of IEC 60870-5-103 transmission. Select from : 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bauds using # and enable your choice using '. Display of the network address of the MiCOM relay in the IEC 60870-5-103 network. Select from 1 to 255 using # and enable your choice using the key '.
Data Bits 19200 Bd
Relay Address
29
3.5.4.4
DNP3 COMMUNICATION Menu COMMUNICATION Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. To gain access to the menu, press $, %, 3 times. To gain access to the sub-menu content, press $. Communication ? Yes Use DNP3 communication via the RS485 on the rear of the relay. To activate communication, press the key ' and use # to select Yes. Enable your choice using '. Display of the speed of DNP3 transmission. Select from : 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bauds using # and enable your choice using '. Display of the network address of the MiCOM relay in the DNP3 network. Select from 1 to 255 using # and enable your choice using the key '.
Data Bits
9600 bd
Relay Address 29
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 34/68 3.5.5 PROTECTION Menu
The PROTECTION menu (design as PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 menus in MiCOM P124 Dual-powered enables a user to program various protection functions and settings (thresholds, time delay) associated with each of the phase or earth protection functions. The various sub-menus are : [50/51] Phase OC [50N/51N] E/Gnd [46] Neg seq OC [49] Therm OL [37] Under Current [79] Autoreclose To gain access to the PROTECTION G1 menu for press $ then % four times. To gain access to the PROTECTION G2 menu, press $ then % five times. 3.5.5.1 [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION menu.
50/51] Phase OC
Heading of the [50/51] Phase OC sub-menu.
I>?
Yes
Selection of the first phase threshold (I>). Select Yes or No. If the user enters I>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I> (No), go to I>> menu. Displays the threshold current value I>. To modify this value, press '.The threshold I> is adjustable from 0.1 to 4 In. Press ' to enable your adjustment. Selection of the I> time delay type threshold. Select (DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve).
I> 0.1 In
Delay Type
DMT

3.5.5.1.1
I> DMT threshold menu Delay Type DMT Display of the I> DMT time delay.
tI> 100 ms
3.5.5.1.2
Selection of the I> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.
I> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curve menu Delay Type IDMT Display the I> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves).
Idmt
IEC SI
Selection of the I> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI, IEC RC, using # and enable your choice using the key '. Select the curve TMS value. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using # and enable your choice using '.
Tms 0.025
3.5.5.1.2.1
I> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu t Reset 60 ms Selection of the t Reset value from 40 ms to 100 s using # and enable your choice using '.
3.5.5.1.2.2
I> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu Type Tempo Reset DMT Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using # and enable your choice using '.
t Reset
60 ms
Selection of the t Reset value associated with the DMT reset time choice. Select from 40 ms to 100 s using # and enable your choice using '.
3.5.5.1.2.2.1 I>
IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu IDMT Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using # and enable your choice using '.
Type Tempo Reset
Rtms 0.025
Selection of the Rtms value associated with the IDMT reset time choice. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using # and enable your choice using '.

3.5.5.1.3
I> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu Delay Type RI Display of the I> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve)
K 0.1
3.5.5.1.3.1
I> DMT reset time, Electromechanical RI curves menu t Reset 60 ms Selection of the t Reset value from 40 ms to 100 s using # and enable your choice using '.
3.5.5.1.4
>> threshold menu I >> ? Yes Selection of the I>> second phase threshold. Select Yes or No. If the user enters I>>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I>> (No) go to I>>> menu. Selection of the I>> second threshold current value. To modify this value, press '. The threshold I>>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 In. Press ' to enable your adjustment. Selection of the second threshold I>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.
I >> 2.0 In
tI >> 300 ms
3.5.5.1.5
I>>> threshold menu I >>> ? Yes Selection of the I>>> third phase threshold. Select Yes or No. If the user enters I>>>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I>>> (No), the LCD display returns to the heading of the menu [50/51] Phase OC. Selection of the I>>> third threshold current value. To modify this value, press '. The threshold I>>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 In. Press ' to enable your adjustment Selection of the third threshold I>>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.
I >>> 10.0 In
tI >>> 110 ms
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5.5.2 [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION menu.
[50N/51N] E/Gnd
Heading of the [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub-menu
Ie> ? Yes
Selection of the first earth threshold (Ie>). Select Yes or No. If the If the user enters Ie>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user user enters > (No), go to Ie>> menu Displays the current threshold value Ie>. To modify this value, press '. The threshold Ie> is adjustable from : 0.002 to 1 Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range) 0.01 to 1 Ien (0.01 to 8 Ien Range) 0.1 to 25 Ien (0.1 to 40 Ien Range) Press ' to enable your adjustment. Selection of the Ie> threshold time delay type. Select (DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve and LABOR.* for Laborelec curves) using # and enable your choice using '. *Note: available for 0.01 to 8 Ien range only.
le > 0.01 I0n
Delay Type DMT
3.5.5.2.1
Ie> DMT threshold menu Delay Type DMT Display of the Ie> DMT time delay.
tIe > 100 ms

3.5.5.2.2
Selection of the Ie> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and enable your choice using '.
Ie> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu Delay Type DMT Display of the Ie> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves).
Idmt IEC SI
Selection of the Ie> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI, or IEC RC, using # and enable your choice using the key '. Selection of the selected curve Tms value. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using # and enable your choice using '.
Tms 0.025

3.5.5.2.2.1
Ie> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu t Reset 60 ms Selection of the t Reset value from 40 ms to 100 s using # and enable your choice using '.
3.5.5.2.2.2
Ie> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu Type Tempo Reset DMT Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using # and enable your choice using '. Selection of the t Reset value associated with the DMT reset time choice. Select from 40 ms to 100 s using # and enable your choice using '.
t Reset
60 ms
3.5.5.2.2.3
Ie> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu Type Tempo Reset IDMT Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using # and enable your choice using '. Selection of the Rtms value associated with the IDMT reset time choice. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using # and enable your choice using '.
Rtms
0.025
3.5.5.2.3
Ie> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu Delay type RI Display of the Ie> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve).
K 0.1
3.5.5.2.3.1
Ie> DMT reset time, RI curves menu t Reset 60 ms Selection of the t Reset value from 40 ms to 100 s using # and enable your choice using '.
3.5.5.2.4
Ie> threshold, LABORELEC curve Delay Type LABOR. Display of the Ie> inverse time delay type LABORELEC
Idmt 1
Selection of the associated curve. Select curve 1, curve 2 or curve 3.
t Reset 40 ms
Selection of the t Reset value associated to the LABORELEC curve. Select from 40 ms to 100 s using ' and enable your choice using '.

3.5.5.2.5
Ie>> threshold menu Ie>> ? Yes Selection of the Ie>> second earth threshold. Select Yes or No. If the user enters Ie>>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters>> (No) go to Ie>>> menu Selection of the Ie>> second threshold current value. To modify this value, press '. The threshold Ie>> is adjustable from : 0.002 to 1Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range) 0.01 to 8 Ien (0.01 to 8 Ien Range) 0.5 to 40 Ien (0.1 to 40 Ien Range) Press ' to validate your adjustment. Selection of the second threshold Ie>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using # and validate your choice using '.
Ie>> 0.1 I0n
tIe>>
300 ms
3.5.5.2.6
Ie>>> threshold menu Ie>>> ? Yes Selection of the Ie>>> third earth threshold. Select Yes or No. If the user validates Ie>>>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters Ie>>> (No), the LCD display returns to the heading of the menu [50N/51N] E/Gnd. Selection of the Ie>>> third threshold current value.The threshold Ie>> is adjustable from : 0.002 to 1Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range) 0.01 to 8 Ien (0.01 to 8 Ien Range) 0.5 to 40 Ien (0.1 to 40 Ion Range) Press ' to validate your adjustment. Selection of the third threshold Ie>>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s using # and validate your choice using '.
Ie>>>
1.0 I0n
tIe>>>
300 ms
3.5.5.3
[46] NEGATIVE Phase SEQUENCE I2> sub-menu PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION menu.
[46] Neg Seq OC
Heading of the [46] NEGATIVE Phase SEQUENCE I2>sub-menu.
I2 > ? Yes
Selection of the negative phase sequence overcurrent function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), no menu is activated.
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 40/68 I2 >
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 Displays the negative phase sequence threshold value I2>. To modify this value, press '. The threshold I2> is adjustable from 0.01 to 40 In step of 0.01 In. Press ' to validate your adjustment. Selection of the I2> threshold time delay type. Select (DMT for independent time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve) using # and validate your choice using '.
0.1 In
Delay Type DMT
3.5.5.3.1
I2> DMT threshold menu Delay Type Display of the I2> DMT time delay. DMT
t I2 >
100 ms
Selection of the I2> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using # and validate your choice using '.
3.5.5.3.2
I2> IDMT threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves menu Delay Type IDMT Display of the I2> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves).
Curve
IEC SI
Selection of the I2> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI using # and validate your choice using the key '. Selection of the selected curve Tms value. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using # and validate your choice using '.
Tms
0.025
3.5.5.3.2.1
I2> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu t Reset 60 ms Selection of the t Reset value from 40 ms to 100 s using # and validate your choice using '.
3.5.5.3.2.2
I2> DMT reset time, ANSI curves menu Type Tempo Reset DMT Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using # and validate your choice using '. Selection of the t Reset value associated with the DMT reset time choice. Select from 40 ms to 100 s using # and validate your choice using '.
t Reset 60 ms

3.5.5.3.2.3
I2> IDMT reset time, ANSI curves menu Type Tempo Reset IDMT Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using # and validate your choice using '. Selection of the Rtms value associated with the IDMT reset time choice. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using # and validate your choice using '.
Rtms 0.025
3.5.5.3.3
I2> IDMT threshold, Electromechanical RI curve menu Delay Type RI Display of the I2> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve). Selection of the RI curve K value. Select from 0.100 to 10 using # and validate your choice using '.
0.1
3.5.5.3.3.1
I2> DMT reset time, RI curves t Reset 60 ms Selection of the t Reset value from 40 ms to 100 s using # and validate your choice using '.
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 42/68 3.5.5.4 [49] Therm OL sub-menu PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION menu.
[49] Therm OL
Heading of the [49] Therm OL (Thermal Overload) sub-menu
Therm OL ? Yes
Selection of the thermal overload function. Select Yes or No. If the user enters Yes, the following menu is displayed. If the user enters No, no menu content is displayed. Displays the thermal current threshold value I>. To modify this value, press '. The threshold I> is adjustable from 0.2 to 3.2 In step of 0.01. Press ' to validate your choice. Displays the Te thermal time constant associated with the thermal overload formula. To modify this value, press '. The time constant Te is adjustable from 1 min to 200 min, step of 1 min. Press ' to validate your adjustment. Displays the k factor associated with the thermal overload function. To modify this value, press '. k factor is adjustable from 1 to 1.5, step of 0.01. Press ' to validate your adjustment. Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal overload trip threshold. To modify this value, press . Trip is adjustable from 50 % to 200 % step of 1%. Press ' to validate your adjustment. Selection of the thermal overload alarm function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates Yes, the following menu is displayed. If the user validate No, refer to the THERMAL OVERLOAD sub-menu. Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal overload alarm threshold. To modify this value, press '. Trip is adjustable from 50 % to 200 % step of 1%. Press ' to validate your adjustment.
I >
0.3 In
Te 1 mn
k 1.05
Trip
100%
Alarm ?
Yes
Alarm
100%
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5.5.5 [37] UNDERCURRENT I< sub-menu PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION menu.
[37] Under Current
Heading of the [37] Under-Current sub-menu.
I<? Yes
Selection of the undercurrent function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), no menu points is activated. Displays the undercurrent threshold value I<. To modify this value, press '. The threshold I< is adjustable from 2 % to 100 % In, step of 1 %. Press ' to validate your adjustment. Selection of the tI< time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 180 s.
I< 20 %
tI < 100 ms 3.5.5.6
[79] AUTORECLOSE sub-menu PROTECTION G1 Heading of the PROTECTION menu.
[79] Autoreclose
Heading of the [79] AUTORECLOSER sub-menu
Autoreclose ? Yes
Selection of the autoreclose function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), no menu is activated. Selection of the external circuit breaker failure function associated with the autorecloser function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), the Ext Block sub menu is activated.
Ext CB Fail ? Yes

3.5.5.6.1
[79] EXTERNAL CB FAILURE Ext CB Fail Yes Allows the use of a dedicated input (CB FLT) to inform the autorecloser function of the state (failure or operational) of the CB. Selection of the external CB failure time delay tCFE. Select the time delay from 10 ms to 600 s using #. Validate your choice using '.
Ext CB Fail Time 10 ms [79] EXTERNAL BLOCKING Ext Block ? No
3.5.5.6.2
Allows the use of a dedicated input (Block_79) to block the autorecloser function.
3.5.5.6.3
[79] DEAD and RECLAIM TIMES Dead Time tD1 150 ms Selection of the First Cycle Dead Time (tD1) value associated with the autoreclose function. Select from 10 ms to 300 s step of 10 ms using # and validate your choice using '. Selection of the Second Cycle Dead Time (tD2) value associated with the autoreclose function. Select from 10 ms to 300 s step of 10 ms using # and validate your choice using '. Selection of the Third Cycle Dead Time (tD3) value associated with the autoreclose function. Select from 10 ms to 600 s step of 10 ms using # and validate your choice using '. Selection of the Fourth Cycle Dead Time (tD4) value associated with the autoreclose function. Select from 10 ms to 600 step of 10 ms using # and validate your choice using '. Selection of the Reclaim Time (tR) value associated with the autoreclose function. Select from 20 ms to 600 s step of 10 ms using # and validate your choice using '. Selection of the Inhibit Time (tI) value associated with the autoreclose function (following a manual CB closure). Select from 20 ms to 600 s step of 10 ms using # and validate your choice using '. Selection of the number of cycles associated with the phase autoreclose function. Select from 0 to 4 using # and validate your choice using '.
Dead Time tD2
1.5 s
Dead Time tD3
10 s
Dead Time tD4
10 s
Reclaim Time tR
10 s
Inhib Time tI
520 ms
Phase Cycles 3
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 E/Gnd Cycles
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 45/68 Selection of the number of cycles associated with the earth autoreclose function. Select from 0 to 4 using # and validate your choice using '. 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tI> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tI> pick-up 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tI>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tI>> pick-up 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tI>>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tI>>> pick-up 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tIe> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tIe> pick-up 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tIe>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tIe>> pick-up 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tIe>>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tAux1 pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on t Aux1 pick-up 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on t Aux2 pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tAux2 pick-up
CYCLES tI >
4321 1101
CYCLES tI >>
4321 1211
CYCLES tI >>>
4321 1110
CYCLES tIe >
4321 0111
CYCLES tIe >>
4321 1121
CYCLES tIe >>>
4321 1111
CYCLES tAux1
4321 1112
CYCLES tAux2
4321 0111
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 46/68 3.5.6 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu
The AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu makes it possible to programme the various automation functions included in the MiCOM P124. The various sub-menus are : Trip Commands Latch Functions (associated to trip relay RL1) Blocking logic 1 Blocking Logic 2 Logic Select. 1 Logic Select. 2 Outputs Relays (RL2 to RL6) Latch output relay (RL2 to RL6) Inputs Broken Conductor Cold load PU CB Fail CB Supervision To access the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu, press # then the key $ six times. 3.5.6.1 Trip Commands sub-menu This sub-menu makes it possible to assign to the trip output (RL1) part or all the selected thresholds. AUTOMAT.CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu.
Trip Commands
Heading of the Trip ORDER sub-menu.
Trip tI> Yes
Allocation of the first phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>) to the trip output (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, the trip output relay (RL1) shall be activated at the end of the time delay tI>. If the user validates No, the trip output relay (RL1) shall never be activated, even at the end of the time delay tI>. Allocation of the second phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Trip tI>>
Yes
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 Trip tI>>>
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 47/68 Allocation to the third phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No. Allocation of the first earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No. Allocation of the second earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No. Allocation of the third earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No. Allocation of the under-current threshold to the trip output Select Yes or No. Allocation of the delayed negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (tI2>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No. Allocation of the thermal overload Trip information ( Trip) to the trip output. Select Yes or No. Allocation of the broken conductor detection to the trip output. Select Yes or No. Allocation of the delayed auxiliary input Aux 1 to the trip output. Select Yes or No. Allocation of the delayed auxiliary input Aux 2 to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Yes
Trip tIe>
Yes
Trip tIe>>
Yes
Trip tIe>>>
Yes
Trip tI <
No
Trip tI2 >
Yes
Trip Thermal
Yes
Trip Brkn.Cond
No
Trip t Aux 1
Yes
Trip t Aux 2
Yes
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 48/68 3.5.6.2 Latch Functions Sub-Menu
This sub-menu makes it possible to latch the trip output relay (RL1) associated with one or several thresholds after the cause has disappeared. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
Latch Functions
Heading of the Latch functions associated to the trip output relay RL1 sub-menu.
Latch tI>
Yes
Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the first phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tI> disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tI>. Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the second phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tI>> disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tI>>. Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the third phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tI>>> disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tI>>>. Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the first earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tIe> disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tIe>. Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the second earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tIe>> disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tIe>>. Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the third earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tIe>>> disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tIe>>>. Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the time delay undercurrent threshold (tI<) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tI< disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tI<.
Latch tI>> Yes
Latch tI>>> Yes
Latch tIe>
Yes
Latch tIe>> Yes
Latch tIe>>> Yes
Latch tI <
Yes
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 Latch tI2 >
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 49/68 Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the time delay negative phase overcurrent threshold (tI2>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tI2> disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tI2>. Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the thermal overload trip information ( trip) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after trip disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after trip. Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the broken conductor function (Latch Brkn. Cond) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after Latch Brkn. Cond. Information disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after Latch Brkn. Cond. Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the delayed auxiliary input (Aux 1) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tAux 1 disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tAux 1. Latch of the trip output relay (RL1) associated with the delayed auxiliary input (Aux 2) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 shall be latched after tAux 2 disappeared. If the user validates No, RL1 shall drop out after tAux 2.
Yes
Latch Thermal
Yes
Latch Brkn.Cond No
Latch t Aux 1 Yes
Latch t Aux 2 Yes
3.5.6.3
Blocking Logic sub-menu The Blocking Logic sub-menu is labelled as Blocking Logic 1 t and Blocking Logic 2 t for the dual powered MiCOM P124 relays. The Blocking Logic (1) t allows blocking of each time delayed stage by the input assigned to the Blocking Logic function (1) BLOCK LG 1 (refer to inputs menu). The same Blocking Logic (2) t submenu allows blocking of each time delayed stage by the input assigned to the Blocking Logic function (2) BLOCK LG 2 (refer to inputs menu). AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
Blocking Logic
Heading of the Blocking Logic sub-menu.
Block 1 tI> Yes
Blocking logic of the first phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, the first threshold shall be locked on the transition (logic state 1) of the Logic "Blk log" logic input. If the user validates No, the transition of the "Blk log" logic input shall not alter the first phase threshold tI>.
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 50/68 Block 1 tI>>
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 Blocking logic of the second phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>). Select Yes or No. Blocking logic of the third phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) Select Yes or No. Blocking logic of the first earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>). Select Yes or No. Blocking logic of the second earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>). Select Yes or No. Blocking logic of the third earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>). Select Yes or No. Blocking logic of the time delay negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (tI2>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No. Blocking logic of the thermal state calculation. Select Yes or No.
Yes
Block 1 tI>>>
Yes
Block 1 tIe>
Yes
Block 1 tIe>>
Yes
Block 1 tIe>>>
Yes
Block 1 tI2 >
Yes
Block 1 Thermal
Yes
Block 1 Brkn.Cond
No
Blocking logic of the broken conductor function Select Yes or No.
Block 1 t Aux 1
No
Blocking logic of the time delay of the auxiliary input Aux 1. Select Yes or No. Blocking logic of the time delay of the auxiliary input Aux 2. Select Yes or No.
Block 1 t Aux 2
No
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5.6.4 Logic Select sub-menu
The Logic Select. 1 sub-menu allows the user to delay the 2nd and 3rd time delayed stages through the logic input assigned to the Log Sel 1 function (INPUTS sub-menu). The Logic Select. 2 sub-menu allows the user to delay the 2nd and 3rd time delayed stages through the logic input assigned to the Log Sel 2 function (INPUTS sub-menu). AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
Logic Select. 1
Heading of the Logic Select. 1 sub-menu.
Sel1 tI>>
Yes
Logic selectivity of the second phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, operation of the second threshold shall be delayed for tSel1 on the transition (logic state 1) of the "Log Sel 1" logic input. If the user validates No, the transition of the "Log Sel 1" logic input shall not alter the second phase threshold tI>>. Logic selectivity of the third phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) Select Yes or No. Logic selectivity of the second earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>). Select Yes or No. Logic selectivity of the third earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>). Select Yes or No. Displays the selective scheme logic time delay t Sel1. To modify this value, press '. The t Sel1 is adjustable from 0 ms to 150 s by step of 10 ms. Press ' to validate your adjustment.
Sel1 tI>>> Yes
Sel1 tIe>> Yes
Sel1 tIe>>> Yes
t Sel1 150 ms
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 52/68 3.5.6.5 Outputs Relays sub-menu
This sub-menu makes it possible to allocate to each logic output (excepted Watchdog RL0 and Tripping RL1 refer to Trip Commands submenu) the various thresholds (instantaneous and/or time delay). MiCOM P124 dual-powered : allows 5 outputs, RL2 to RL6 Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL menu.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Output Relays
Heading of the Output Relays sub-menu.
Trip
65432 00101
Allocation of trip orders to the output relays RL2 to RL6 (copies the trip contact onto one or several selected relays). To allocate this information to the output relay(s), press ', then allocate to the desired output relay the value 1using #. Repeat the operation on the other output relays if desired, then validate using '. Allocation of the first phase instantaneous overcurrent threshold (I>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the first phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the second phase instantaneous overcurrent threshold (I>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Allocation of the second phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the third phase instantaneous overcurrent threshold (I>>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the third phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays .
I>
65432 00101
tI >
65432 00101
I >>
65432 00101
tI >>
65432 00101
I >>>
65432 01101
tI >>>
65432 00101
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 Ie > 65432 00101
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 53/68 Allocation of the first earth instantaneous overcurrent threshold (Ie>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays . Allocation of the first earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the second earth instantaneous overcurrent threshold (Ie>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Allocation of the second earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the third earth instantaneous overcurrent threshold (Ie>>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the third earth time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the minimum current time delay threshold (tI<) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the negative phase sequence overcurrent time delay threshold (tI2>) to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Allocation of the thermal alarm threshold to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the thermal trip threshold to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the Circuit Breaker Alarm function to the output relays (CB OPEN Nb, SUM An, Tripping and closing Time) RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.
tIe >
65432 00101
Ie >>
65432 00101
tIe >>
65432 00101
Ie >>>
65432 00101
tIe >>>
65432 00101
tI <
65432 00101
tI2 >
65432 00101
Therm. Alarm
65432 00101
Therm. Trip
65432 00101
CB Alarm
65432 00101
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 54/68 52 Fail 65432 00101
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 Allocation of the Circuit Breaker Trip Supervision Failure function to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the broken conductor function to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the circuit breaker failure function to the output relays RL2 to RL6. CB Fail = CB not open at the end of tBF timer Allocation of the circuit breaker closing order to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the delayed auxiliary input Aux 1 to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the delayed auxiliary input Aux 2 to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the "autorecloser in progress" information to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the autorecloser final trip function to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays. Allocation of the Active Group indication to the output relays RL2 to RL6. Select output relays.
Brkn. Cond
65432 01101
CB Fail
65432 01101
CB Close
65432 00101
t Aux 1
65432 00101
t Aux 2
65432 00101
79 Run
65432 00101
79 Trip
65432 00101
Active Group
65432 10000
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5.6.6 Latch of the Output relays RL2 to RL6
This sub-menu makes it possible to latch the auxiliary output relays, relay by relay. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL menu. To gain access to the menu, press $, % 6 times.
Latch Output Relays
Heading of the Latch Output Relays sub-menu. To gain access to the sub-menu points, press $.
Output 2 No
Latch of the auxiliary output relay RL2. Select Yes or No.
Output 3 Yes
Output 4 Yes
Output 5 Yes
Output 6 No
Output 7 Yes
Output 8 No
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 56/68 3.5.6.7 Inputs sub-menu
This sub-menu makes it possible to allocate to each logic input either a label or an automation function, following the table : Label abstract None Unlatch 52 a 52 b CB FLT Aux 1 Aux 2 Blk Log (1) Blk Log 2 Strt Dist Cold L PU Log Sel 1 Log Sel 2 Change set Reset Block-79 Trip Circ Start tBf No allocation Delocking the latching of the outputs Position of the circuit breaker (open) Position of the circuit breaker (close) External failure information from the CB Allocation to the input the external information Aux 1 Allocation to the input the external information Aux 2 Blocking logic 1 Blocking logic 2 Starting of the disturbance recording function Cold load pick up alloction Logic selectivity 1 Logic selectivity 2 Change of setting group (default setting group 1) Reset of the thermal state Blocking of the autorecloser function [79] Trip circuit supervision input Starting of the breaker failure timer Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL menu. Label signification
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Inputs
Heading of the Inputs sub-menu.
Input 1
O/O
Allocation of logic input 1. To allocate labels to logic input 1, press ' then with # $ select the desired label from the available list, then validate your choice using '. Allocation of logic input 2. To allocate labels to logic input 2, press ' then with # $ select the desired label from the available list, then validate your choice using '.
Input 2
BLC LG
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 Input 3
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 57/68 Allocation of logic input 3. To allocate labels to logic input 3, press ' then with # $ select the desired label from the available list, then validate your choice using '. Allocation of logic input 4. To allocate labels to logic input 4, press ' then with # $ select the desired label from the available list, then validate your choice using '. Allocation of logic input 5. To allocate labels to logic input 5, press ' then with # $ select the desired label from the available list, then validate your choice using '. Displays the time delay t Aux 1 associated with the logic input Aux1. To modify this value, press '. The t Aux 1 is adjustable from 0 ms to 200 s by step of 10 ms, then validate your choice using '. Displays the time delay t Aux 2 associated with the logic input Aux 2. To modify this value, press '. The t Aux 2 is adjustable from 0 ms to 200 s by step of 10 ms, then validate your choice using '.
AUX1
Input 4
C.L.S
Input 5
RAZ TH
Aux1 Time t Aux1
300 ms
Aux2 Time t Aux2
8s
3.5.6.8
BROKEN CONDUCTOR sub-menu AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
Broken Cond.
Heading of the BROKEN CONDUCTOR sub-menu.
Brkn. Cond. ? Yes
Selection of the broken conductor function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user validates (No), the broken conductor function is inactive. Display the broken conductor time delay tBC. To modify this value, press '. The tBC is adjustable from 1 to 14400 s with step of 1 s. Press ' to validate your adjustment Display the broken conductor threshold. This threshold is a ratio between the negative phase sequence and the positive phase sequence current. To modify this value, press '. The I2/I1 ratio is adjustable from 20 to 100% by step of 1%. Press ' to validate your adjustment
Brkn.Cond Time tBC
32 s
Ratio I2/I1 20%
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 58/68 3.5.6.9 COLD LOAD PICK-UP sub-menu AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL menu.
Cold Load PU
Heading of the Cold Load PU sub-menu.
Cold Load PU ? Yes
Selection of the cold load pick-up function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), the cold load pick-up function is inactive. Associate the I> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To modify this choice, press ' and using # allocate the desired threshold to the cold load pick-up function. Validate your choice using '. Associate the I>> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To modify this choice, press ' and using # allocate the desired threshold to the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using '. Associated the I>>> time delay threshold to the cold load pick up function. To modify this choice, press ' and using # allocate the desired threshold to the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using '. Associated the Ie> time delay threshold to the cold load pick up function. To modify this choice, press ' and using # allocate the desired threshold to the cold load pick-up function. Validate your choice using '. Associated the Ie>> time delay threshold to the cold load pick up function. To modify this choice, press ' and using # allocate the desired threshold to the cold load pick-up function. Validate your choice using '. Associated the Ie>>> time delay threshold to the cold load pick up function. To modify this choice, press ' and using # allocate the desired threshold to the cold load pick-up function. Validate your choice using '.
Cold Load PU tI> ?
Yes
Cold Load PU tI>> ?
Yes
Cold Load PU tI >>> ?
Yes
Cold Load PU tIe > ?
Yes
Cold Load PU tIe >> ?
Yes
Cold Load PU tIe >>> ?
Yes
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 COLD LOAD P/UP tI2> ?
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 59/68 Associated the I2> time delay threshold the cold load pick up function. To modify this choice, press ' and using # allocate desired threshold to the cold load start pick up function. Validate your choice using '. Associated the Thermal overload time delay threshold to the cold load pick up function. To modify this choice, press ' and using # allocate the desired threshold to the cold load pick-up function. Validate your choice using '. Selection of the cold load pick up percentage scaling value associated with the selected thresholds. Select from 20% to 500% with steps of 1 % using # and validate your choice using '. Selection of the cold load pick up time delay. Select from 100 ms to 3600 s with steps of 10 ms using # and validate your choice using '.
Yes
Cold Load PU t Therm. ?
Yes
Cold Load PU level
120%
Cold Load PU tCL = 3.5.6.10
2s
CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE sub-menu AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL menu.
CB Fail
Heading of the CB Fail sub-menu.
CB Fail ? Yes
Selection of the circuit breaker failure function. If the user validates (Yes), the next menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), the breaker failure function is inactive. Display of the I< threshold value which defines the current monitoring band zone. To modify that value, press '. The threshold is settable between 2% and 100%. To confirm the setting, press '. Selection of the circuit breaker failure time delay. Select from 30 ms to 10 s with steps of 10 ms using # and validate your choice using '. Selection of the blocking function for 1st overcurrent stage assigned to the output relay upon breaker failure. Choose YES or NO. Selection of the blocking function for 1st earth fault stage assigned to the output relay upon breaker failure. Choose YES or NO.
I< 20% In
CB Fail Time tBF
200 ms
Bloc I > ? No
Bloc Ie > ? No
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 60/68 3.5.6.11 CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION sub-menu AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL menu.
CB Supervision
Heading of the CB Supervision sub-menu.
TC Supervision Yes
Selection of the trip circuit supervision function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the function is active. If the user does not validate (No), go to CB Open Time menu. The trip circuit supervision function is inactive. Selection of the Trip circuit supervision timer. Select from 100 ms to 10 s with steps of 10 ms using # Validate your choice using '. Selection of the CB open operating time supervision function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes) the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), go to CB Close menu. The CB open operating time supervision function is inactive. Selection of the CB open operating time (tCBO). Select from 50 ms to 1.0 s with steps of 10 ms using #. Validate your choice using '. Selection of the CB close operating time supervision function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), go to CB.Open Alarm menu. The CB close operating time supervision function is inactive. Selection of the CB close operating time (tCBC). Select from 50 ms to 1.0 s with steps of 10 ms using #. Validate your choice using '. Selection of the maximum CB operations function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), refer to Amps(n) menu. The CB open maximum number function is inactive.
t Trip Circuit t SUP
3s
CB Open S'vision Yes
CB OpenTime 150 ms
CB Close S'vision Yes
CB Close Time 150 ms
CB Open Alarm ?
Yes
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 CB Open NB
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 61/68 Selection of the CB open numbers alarm threshold. Select from 0 to 50000 by step of 1 using #. Validate your choice using '. Selection of the Summation Amps (or square Amps) interrupted by the CB function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user does not validate (No), refer to t open pulse menu. The Summation Amps function is inactive. Selection of the summation Amps (or square Amps) alarm threshold. Select from 0 to 4000 E6 A (or A2) with steps of 1 E6 using #. Validate your choice using '. Selection of the type of summation (Amps or square Amps). Select 1 or 2 using #. Validate your choice using '. Selection of the tripping pulse time. Select from 100 ms to 5 s with steps of 100 ms using #. Validate your choice using '. Selection of the closing time. Select from 100 ms to 5 s with steps of 100 ms using #. Validate your choice using '.
1500
Amps(n) ?
Yes
Amps(n)
3 E6
n 2
t Open Pulse 300 ms
t Close Pulse 500 ms
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 62/68 3.5.7 RECORDS Menu The RECORDING menu makes it possible to read the records. The various sub-menus are : CB Monitoring Fault record Disturb record Time peak value 3.5.7.1 CB MONITORING sub-menu
The CB Monitoring sub-menu makes possible to read and clear the parameters and measurements associated to this function. RECORD Heading the RECORD menu.
CB Monitoring
Heading the CB Monitoring sub-menu.
CB Opening Time 83 ms
Display the circuit breaker opening time in ms.
CB Closing Time 100 ms
Display the circuit breaker closing time in ms.
CB Operations RST=[C]
1312
Display the number of opening commands sent by the relay. To clear these values, press !.
Amps (n) RST=[C]
Allows the user to clear the memorised summations of interrupted currents. All 3 phases currents are clear together. To clear these values, press !. Display the summation of the Amps (or square Amps) interrupted by the circuit breaker phase A.
Amps (n) IA 5 E6
Amps (n) IB 5 E6
Display the summation of the Amps (or square Amps) interrupted by the circuit breaker phase B.
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 Amps (n) IC
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 63/68 Display the summation of the Amps (or square Amps) interrupted by the circuit breaker phase C.
5 E6
3.5.7.2
Fault Record sub-menu The Fault RECORD sub-menu makes possible to read the various parameters and measurement for each of the five fault store in MiCOM P124 memory. RECORD Heading of the RECORD menu.
Fault Record
Heading of the Fault Record sub-menu.
Record Number 4
Selection of the Fault record number (by selecting either 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5) to be displayed. To modify this fault record number, press ' then using # enter the required number. Validate your choice using '. Display the time of the fault record. The format of the time is HH:MM:ss:msms In this example the fault appeared at 12H am, 05 minutes, 23 seconds and 420 ms. Display the Date of the fault record. The format of the Date is DD/MM/YY. In this example, the fault appeared on 12 October 1999. Display the active setting group (1 or 2).
Fault Time
12:05:23:42
Fault Date
12/10/99
Active Set Group
Faulted Phase
Phase A
Display the faulty phase for the chosen fault record (NONE, phase A, B, C, EARTH, AB, AC, BC, or ABC).
Threshold
I>>
Display the origin of the fault that as generated the trip order.
Magnitude
1200 A
Display the magnitude of the faulty current. This value is the 50/60 Hz amplitude.
IA Magnitude
1200 A
Display the magnitude of the phase A current at the time of the Fault. This value is the 50/60 Hz amplitude.
IB Magnitude
500 A
Display the magnitude of the phase B current at the time of the Fault. This value is the 50/60 Hz amplitude.
IC Magnitude
480 A
Display the magnitude of the phase C current at the time of the Fault. This value is the 50/60 Hz amplitude.
In Magnitude
103 A
Display the magnitude of the earth current at the time of the Fault. This value is the 50/60 Hz amplitude.
3.5.7.3
DISTURBANCE RECORD sub-menu The DISTURBANCE sub-menu makes possible to set the various parameters and thresholds associated to this recording function. RECORD Heading of the RECORD menu.
Disturb Record
Heading of the Disturb Record sub-menu.
Pre-Time 1.3 s
Selection of the disturbance record pre-time. Select from 100 ms to 3s by step of 100 ms using #. Validate your choice using '. Selection of the disturbance record post-time. Select from 100 ms to 3s by step of 100 ms using # and validate your choice using '.
Post-Time 0.2 s
WARNING :
THE TOTAL DISTURBANCE RECORDING TIME IS 3 SECONDS (PRE TIME + POST TIME).
Disturb Rec Trig ON INST.
Selection of start criteria for the disturbance recording function. Select between ON INST. (start on instantaneous thresholds) or ON Trip (start on trip conditions) using # and validate your choice using '.
Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P124 3.5.7.4 Time PEAK VALUE sub-menu
The Time PEAK VALUE sub-menu makes possible to set parameters associated to this function. (Peak and Average values displayed in the Measurements menu). RECORD Heading of the RECORD menu.
Time Peak Value
Heading of the Time Peak Value sub-menu.
Time Window
5 mn
Selection of the time of the window during the peak and average values are stored. Select either 5mn, 10mn, 15mn, 30mn, or 60mn using '. Validate your choice using '.
4.
WIRING
The external connection diagrams of the MiCOM P124 relays are provided in Appendix 1 of the Technical Guide.
4.1
Current inputs (measurement) The MiCOM P124 relays have 4 analogue inputs (3 phase current inputs and 1 earth current input). The rated current value of these measurement inputs is either 1A or 5A (must be specified on order). The rated current is indicated on the front panel of the relay, behind the top flap.
WARNING: THE CONNECTION OF THE EARTH CURRENT INPUT MAY DIFFER DEPENDING ON WHETHER IT IS CONNECTED TO A CORE BALANCED CT OR TO A SUMMATION OF THE 3 PHASE CTs.
Connection to 3 phase CTs and 1 core balanced CT: Generally, when the relay is used with three phase CTs and one core balanced CT, there is not need to power the relay through the earth channel. In this case, the core balanced CT can be connected to terminals 47 and 48. For some phase to earth faults, when some specific cores are used, it can be possible that the fault does not generate a current high enough* to power the relay from only one phase circuit. It will then be necessary to connect the core TC to terminals 55 and 56 in order to power the relay through the earth circuit as well. *reminder: the MiCOM P124 relay is self-powered from a 0.2 In current on at least one phase. Connection to 3 phase CTs: In this case the earth current is derived from the summation of the 3 phase currents. It is not necessary to power the relay via the earth circuit. The summation of the 3 CTs must be connected to terminals 47 and 48. Connection to 2 phase CTs and 1 core balanced CT: In this case it is necessary to power the relay through the earth circuit. The core balanced CT must be connected to terminals 55 and 56. 4.2 Output relays 7 output relays are available on the DUAL-POWERED model. 6 relays are freely programmable (RL1 RL6), the first relay RL0 being allocated to signalling an equipment Fault (WATCH DOG) : All the output relays are of change-over relays (1 common, 1 normally open contact, 1 normaly closed contact). The protection and control functions to which these relays respond can be selected by means of the AUTOMAT. CTRL. Menu. NOTE : RL1 is the default trip contact. This relay can be programmed for fail-safe operation (Configuration/RL1 output relay menu).
One watchdog relay with a C/O contact (1 common, 1 normally open, 1 normally closed)

WARNING :

DURING AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY FAILURE, AND IN ORDER TO SAVE ENERGY, THE WATCHDOG RELAY IS USED ONLY WHEN THERE IS A 0.4 IN CURRENT ON AT LEAST ONE PHASE. IT IS DE-ENERGISED BELOW THAT CURRENT LEVEL OR WHEN A SOFTWARE OR HARDWARE FAULT IS PRESENT.
Only the relays RL0 and RL1 are functional during an auxiliary power supply failure: RL0: from a 0.4 In current on at least one phase, RL1: when the relay is not programmed in fail-safe operation. If RL1 is programmed in fail-safe operation, in that case the command of RL1 is blocked as well as the protection function.
4.3
Striker output The P124 relays are fitted with a striker output used to trip the circuit breaker via a striker device in the absence of an external auxiliary supply. The 2 terminals to be connected to the striker are polarised: + terminal 39 terminal 41
according to the external connection diagrams provided in Appendix 1 of the Technical Guide. 4.4 RS232 front communication port MiCOM P124 relays provide the user an RS 232 communication port. This link is dedicated to the MiCOM Setting software MiCOM S1. Le cble entre le PC et le relais MiCOM doit tre quip de 2 connecteurs Sub D 9 points relis en point point. RS 232 PC port RS 232 Cable 2 3 5 7 MiCOM P124 end 9 pin male connector 2 3 5 7
In case where the battery box MiCOM E1 is used to power the P124 relay, it is placed between the PC and the P124 relay. 4.5 Auxiliary supply The auxiliary supply of the MiCOM P124 dual powered relays can be either : Dc (range 24-60 Vdc or 48-150 Vdc or 130-250 Vdc) Ac (100-250 Vac/ 50-60 Hz).
The voltage range is indicated on the front panel, under the top flag. The power supply must be connected to terminals 33-34 only.
P124/EN T41/B44 CHAPTER 4-1 Page 68/68 4.6 Logic inputs
MiCOM P124 Dual-powered model relays have 5 opto-isolated logic inputs. Each input has its own independent polarity. The voltage range of the inputs is identical to the dc auxiliary supply range of the MiCOM relay (e.g. Uaux = 48-150 Vdc, logic input voltage range = 48-150 Vdc). On the same MiCOM P124 relay, the user can mixed different voltage level for the logic inputs (e.g. Uaux = 48-150 Vdc, Input 1= 48 Vdc, Input 2-5= 125 Vdc) The automation operations and signalling functions to which these logic inputs respond can be selected by means of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu.
WARNING : THESE LOGIC INPUTS CAN ONLY BE USED WHEN THE MICOM RELAY IS POWERED BY AN EXTERNAL AUXILIARY SUPPLY.
4.7
RS485 rear communication port All MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relays have an RS485 rear communication port. The connection of communication is allocated to terminals 29-30-31-32, following the schemes given in the Appendix 1 of the Technical Guide.
WARNING : THE REARPORT COMMUNICATION CAN ONLY BE USED WHEN THE MICOM RELAY IS POWERED BY AN EXTERNAL AUXILIARY SUPPLY.
P124/EN T42/B44
CHAPTER 4-2 Menu Content MiCOM P124 Dual-powered
DEFAULT DISPLAY IA = 1245 A
OP PARAMETERS
CONFIGURATION
Password CT RATIO RL1 Output Relay LED 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 Group Select
****
Line CT primary 1000 Fail-safe Relay No Change Group input = EDGE
Display
Alarms
Description P124-D
Default Display RMS I L1
Reference
ALST
Phase A Text
Setting Group
L1
Alarm Battery = No
Phase B Text
L2
Frequency
50 Hz
Phase C Text
L3
Active Group = 1
E/Gnd Text
Input St
54321 01011
Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N
MiCOM P124 D
Relay St
654321 001011
with autoreclose Menu content
I> tl> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> Led Therm Trip Led Brkn. Cond Led CB Fail Led tI2> Led Input 1 Led Input 2 Led Input 3 Led Input 4 Led Input 5 Led Recloser Run Led Recloser Blocked Led tAux 1 Led tAux 2
Date
06/08/01
Time
From V4.A software
13:15:33
CONFIGURATION COMMUNICATION
MEASUREMENTS
PROTECTION G1/G2 [50/51] Phase OC I>? Ie > ? Yes Ie > 0.1 In [50N/51N] E/Gnd
Configuration Inputs Max 1L2 Rms 0.00 A Communication ? Yes I L1 = 257.05 A I> Parity None Delay Type Max Baud Rate 19200 Bd 1L3 Rms 0.00 A
Date format
Frequency 50.01 Hz
Inputs : I L2 = 258.80 A Average IL1 Rms 0.00 A
54321 10101
Yes
0.01 Ien Delay Type IDMT
I L3 = 257.50 A Data bits IN= 20.00 A Stop bits 1 tReset 12 I>> ? Average IL3 Rms 0.00 A Reclose Stats RST = [C] Total recloses 0 Relay Address 8 Idmt Average IL2 Rms 0.00 A
IDMT
Idmt IEC SI Tms Tms 0.025 tReset 60 ms Ie >> ? Yes I>> Ie >> 2.0 In t I>> t Ie >> 300 ms I>>> ?
IEC SI
MiCOM P124 D
103 A I2 = 50 A Cycle1 Recloses 0 RATIO I2 / I1 = 50 %
I1 =
0.025
with autoreclose
IN - fn = RST = [C] 0.00A Cycle2 Recloses 0 Thermal RST = [C] 0% Max & Average I RST = [C] Max 1L1 Rms 350 A Cycle3 Recloses 0 Cycle4 Recloses 0 Total Trip & Lockout
60 ms
Menu content
Yes
0.1 Ien
From V4.A software
300 ms Ie >>> ? Yes I>>> 0 t I>>> Ie >>> 10.01 In t Ie >>> 110 ms
Yes
1.01 Ien
300 ms
DEFAULT DISPLAY IA = 1245 A AUTOMAT. CTRL
PROTECTION G1/G2 [37] Under Current [79] Autoreclose Trip tI > Yes Latch tI >> Yes Latch tI > Trip Commands Latch Functions I<? Yes Trip tI >> Yes
[46] Neg Seq OC
[49] Therm OL
Blocking Logic 1/2 Block1 tI >
I2 > ? Yes I< 0.3 In tI < 1 mn Ext Block ? 1.05 Dead Time tD1/tD2/tD3/tD4 Trip tIe >> Reclaim Time tR 10 ms Inhib Time tI 520 ms Phase Cycles No Yes Trip tIe > 1 ms Yes Ext CB Fail Time 10 ms Trip tI >>> 20 % In
Yes
Therm OL ?
Autoreclose ? Yes
Yes Block1 tI >>
I2 >
0.1 In
I> [Ext CB Fail ? Yes
Yes
Yes
Delay Type
IDMT
Te
Latch tI >>>
Yes Latch tIe >
Block1 tI >>> Yes Block1 tIe > Yes Latch tIe >>
Curve
IEC SI
Yes Block1 tIe >>
Tms 100 %
0.025
Trip
Yes
Yes Latch tIe >>> Yes
Yes Block1 tIe >>> Yes
tReset Yes
Alarm ?
40 ms
Trip tIe >>> Yes Trip tI <
Delay Type 100 % 0
Alarm
RI
Yes Trip tI2 >
Latch tI <
Block1 tI2 > Yes Latch tI2 > Yes
Yes
K E/Gnd Cycles
0.1
Yes 2 4321 1110
Block1 Thermal Yes Block1 Brkn. Cond No Latch Thermal Yes Trip Brkn. Cond No Trip tAux 1 Block1 tAux 1 Latch Brkn. Cond Yes Latch tAux 1 Yes Trip tAux 2 Yes
tReset
40 ms
MiCOM P124 D
Cycles
Trip Thermal Yes
with autoreclose
No Block1 tAux 2 Yes Latch tAux 2
Menu content
No
From V4.A software
tI > tI>> tI>>> tIe > tIe >> tIe >>> t Aux1 t Aux2
Yes
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Logic Select. 1/2 Latch Output Relays Output 2 No
Output Relays
Inputs 1/2/3/4/5
Broken Conductor
Cold Load PU CB Fail ?
CB Fail
Sel1 tI >>
Yes Output 3 Yes Ratio I2/I1 20 %
Trip
65432 00101 Brkn. Cond Time tBC 32 s
Brkn. Cond ? Yes
Cold Load PU ? Yes Cold Load PU tl> ? Yes Cold Load PU tl>> ? Yes Cold Load PU tl>>>? Yes Cold Load PU tle > ? Yes Cold Load PU tle>> ? Yes Cold Load PU tle >>> ? Yes Cold Load PU tl2> ? Yes Cold Load PU tTherm ? Yes Cold Load PU Level 120 % Cold Load PU tCL 2s
Yes I< = 20 % In CB Fail Time tBF 200 ms Bloc I > ? No Bloc Ie> ? No
Sel1 tI >>>
Yes Output 4 No
Sel1 tle >>
Yes Output 5 Yes
Sel1 tle >>> Yes Output 6 No
t Sel1
150 ms
None Unlatch 52 a 52 b CB FLT Aux 1 Aux 2 Blk Log 1 Blk Log 2 Strt Dist Cold L PU Log Sel 1 Log Sel 2 Change set Block_79
Reset
Trip Circ Start_tBF
I> tl > I >> tl >> I >>> tl >>> Ie > tle > Ie >> tle >> Ie >>> tle >>> tl < tl2 > Therm Alarm Therm Trip CB Alarm 52 Fail Brkn Cond CB Fail CB Close tAux 1 tAux 2 79 Run 79 Trip Active Group
MiCOM P124 D with autoreclose Menu content From V4.A software
AUTOMAT. CTRL
RECORDS
CB Supervision
CB Monitoring CB Opening Time 83 ms Disturb Record
Fault Record Pre-Time 1.3 s Post-Time 0.2 s Disturb Rec Trig ON INST.
Time Window 5 mn
Time Peak Value
TC Supervision ? Yes Record Number 4 Fault Time 12:05:23:42 0

Active Set Group 2 Fault Date 06/08/01 CB Closing Time 100 ms CB Operations
t trip circuit t SUP 3s RST = [C] Amps (n) RST = [C] Amps (n) IA 5 E6 Threshold 5 E6 Magnitude 1200 A I>> Faulted Phase Phase A
CB Open Svision Yes
CB Open Time 150 ms
CB Close Svision Yes Amps (n) IB
CB Close Time 150 ms Amps (n) IC 5 E6 IA Magnitude 1200 A IB Magnitude 500 A IC Magnitude 480 A IN Magnitude 103 A
CB Open Alarm ?
Yes
MiCOM P124 D With autoreclose Menu content From V4.A software
CB Open NB
1500
Amps (n) ?
Yes
Amps (n)
3 E6
tOpen Pulse
300ms
tClose Pulse 500 ms
BLANK PAGE
OP PARAMETERS
CONFIGURATION
Password CT RATIO RL1 Output Relay LED 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 Group Select
****
Line CT primary 1000 Fail-safe Relay No Change Group input = EDGE
Display
Alarms
Description P124-D
Default Display RMS I L1
Reference
ALST
Phase A Text
Setting Group
L1
Alarm Battery = No
Phase B Text
L2
Frequency
50 Hz
Phase C Text
L3
Active Group = 1
E/Gnd Text
Input St
54321 01011
MiCOM P124 D
I> tl> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> Led Therm Trip Led Brkn. Cond Led CB Fail Led tI2> Led Input 1 Led Input 2 Led Input 3 Led Input 4 Led Input 5 Led tAux 1 Led tAux 2
Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N
Relay St
654321 001011
without autoreclose Menu content
Date
06/08/01
Time
From V4.A software
13:15:33
CONFIGURATION COMMUNICATION
MEASUREMENTS
PROTECTION G1/G2 [50/51] Phase OC I>? Ie > ? Yes Ie > 0.1 In [50N/51N] E/Gnd
Configuration Inputs Max 1L2 Rms 0.00 A Communication ? Yes I L1 257.05 A I> Parity None Delay Type Max Baud Rate 19200 Bd 1L3 Rms 0.00 A
Date format
Frequency 50.01 Hz
Inputs : I L2 258.80 A Average IL1 Rms 0.00 A
54321 10101
Yes
0.01 Ien Delay Type IDMT
I L3 257.50 A Data bits IN 20.00 A Stop bits 103 A Relay Address 1 tReset 12 I>> ? Average IL3 Rms 0.00 A 8 Idmt Average IL2 Rms 0.00 A
IDMT
Idmt IEC SI Tms Tms 0.025 tReset 60 ms Ie >> ? Yes I>> Ie >> 2.0 In t I>> t Ie >> 300 ms I>>> ?
IEC SI
MiCOM P124 D
I2 = 50 A RATIO I2 / I1 = 50 %
I1 =
0.025
60 ms
without autoreclose
IN - fn = RST = [C] 0.00A Thermal RST = [C] 0% Max & Average I RST = [C] Max 1L1 Rms 350 A
Yes
Menu content
0.1 Ien
300 ms Ie >>> ? Yes I>>> Ie >>> 10.01 In t I>>> t Ie >>> 110 ms
From V4.A software
Yes
1.01 Ien
300 ms
DEFAULT DISPLAY IA = 1245 A AUTOMAT. CTRL
PROTECTION G1/G2 [49] Therm OL Latch Functions Latch tI > Yes Trip tI >> 20 % In tI < 1 mn K 1.05 Trip tIe >> 100 % Yes Trip tIe > 1 ms Yes Latch tIe > Trip tI >>> Yes Latch tI >>> Yes Latch tI >> Yes Yes Block1 tI >> Therm OL ? Yes I > I< 0.3 In Te Yes I<? Trip tI > [37] Under Current Trip Commands
[46] Neg Seq OC
Blocking Logic 1/2 Block1 tI > Yes
I2 > ?
Yes
I2 >
0.1 In
Yes
Delay Type
IDMT
Block1 tI >>> Yes Block1 tIe > Yes Latch tIe >>
Curve
IEC SI
Yes Block1 tIe >>
Tms
0.025
Trip Alarm ?
Yes
Yes
Yes Latch tIe >>>
Yes
tReset
40 ms
Trip tIe >>> Yes Trip tI <
Yes Latch tI < Yes Trip tI2 > Yes Latch tI2 > Yes Yes
Block1 tIe >>> Yes Block1 tI2 > Yes
Delay Type 100 %
Alarm
RI
0.1
Block1 Thermal Yes Block1 Brkn. Cond No Latch Thermal Yes Trip Brkn. Cond No Trip tAux 1 Block1 tAux 1 Latch Brkn. Cond Yes Latch tAux 1 Yes Trip tAux 2 Yes
tReset
40 ms
MiCOM P124 D without autoreclose Menu content From V4.A software
Trip Thermal Yes
No Block1 tAux 2 Yes Latch tAux 2
No
Yes
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Logic Select. 1/2 Latch Output Relays Output 2 No
Output Relays
Inputs 1/2/3/4/5
Broken Conductor
Cold Load PU CB Fail ?
CB Fail
Sel1 tI >>
Yes Output 3 Yes Ratio I2/I1 20 %
Trip
65432 00101 Brkn. Cond Time tBC 32 s
Brkn. Cond ? Yes
Cold Load PU ? Yes Cold Load PU tl> ? Yes Cold Load PU tl>> ? Yes Cold Load PU tl>>>? Yes Cold Load PU tle > ? Yes Cold Load PU tle>> ? Yes Cold Load PU tle >>> ? Yes Cold Load PU tl2> ? Yes Cold Load PU tTherm ? Yes Cold Load PU Level 120 % Cold Load PU tCL 2s
Yes I< = 20 % In CB Fail Time tBF 200 ms Bloc I > ? No Bloc Ie> ? No
Sel1 tI >>>
Yes Output 4 No
Sel1 tle >>
Yes Output 5 Yes
Sel1 tle >>> Yes Output 6 No
t Sel1
150 ms
None Unlatch 52 a 52 b CB FLT Aux 1 Aux 2 Blk Log 1 Blk Log 2 Strt Dist Cold L PU Log Sel 1 Log Sel 2 Change set Reserved
I> tl > I >> tl >> I >>> tl >>> Ie > tle > Ie >> tle >> Ie >>> tle >>> tl < tl2 > Therm Alarm Therm Trip CB Alarm 52 Fail Brkn Cond CB Fail CB Close tAux 1 tAux 2 Active Group
Reset
Trip Circ Start_tBF
MiCOM P124 D without autoreclose Menu content From V4.A software
AUTOMAT. CTRL
RECORDS
CB Supervision
CB Monitoring CB Opening Time 83 ms Disturb Record
Fault Record Pre-Time 1.3 s Post-Time 0.2 s Disturb Rec Trig ON INST.
Time Window 5 mn
Time Peak Value
TC Supervision ? Yes Record Number 4 Fault Time 12:05:23:42 0

Active Set Group 2 Fault Date 06/08/01 CB Closing Time 100 ms CB Operations
t trip circuit t SUP 3s RST = [C] Amps (n) RST = [C] Amps (n) IA 5 E6 Threshold 5 E6 Magnitude 1200 A I>> Faulted Phase Phase A
CB Open Svision Yes
CB Open Time 150 ms
CB Close Svision Yes Amps (n) IB
CB Close Time 150 ms Amps (n) IC 5 E6 IA Magnitude 1200 A IB Magnitude 500 A IC Magnitude 480 A IN Magnitude 103 A
CB Open Alarm ?
Yes
MiCOM P124 D Without autoreclose Menu content From V4.A software
CB Open NB
1500
Amps (n) ?
Yes
Amps (n)
3 E6
tOpen Pulse
300ms
tClose Pulse 500 ms
BLANK PAGE
P124/EN T05/C44
CHAPTER 5 Technical Data & Curves Characteristics
Technical Guide Technical data and curves characteristics MiCOM P124
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Minimum Level of current Phase overcurrent protection Neutral/Ground/Earth Overcurrent Protection Thermal overload protection Undercurrent protection (P124 dual-powered only) Negative sequence overcurrent protection (P124 dual-powered only)
3
3 3 4 6 6 6
2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8
AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS (DUAL-POWERED ONLY)

Cold load pickup Auxiliary timers Multishot autorecloser Broken conductor detection Circuit breaker failure Trip circuit supervision Circuit breaker control and monitoring Logic selectivity
7
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
3. 4.
4.1 4.2 4.3
RECORDING FUNCTIONS : SELF-POWERED RELAY RECORDING FUNCTIONS : DUAL-POWERED RELAY

Fault recorder Event recorder Disturbance recorder
8 8
8 8 8
5.
5.1 5.2
COMMUNICATION
Front communication Rear communication (dual-powered only)
9
9 9
6.
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.4 6.5
INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

AC Inputs Striker output Logic Output Special trip output : Relay RL1 Other logic outputs (dual-powered version only) RL2 to RL6 Logic Input (dual-powered version only) Power supply (dual-powered version only)
9
9 9 9 9 10 10 10
Technical Guide Technical data & curves characteristics MiCOM P124
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

12.1 12.1.1 12.1.1.1 12.1.1.2 12.1.2 12.1.3 12.1.4 12.1.5 12.1.6 12.2 12.2.1 12.2.2
ACCURACY CT DATA HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT ENVIRONMENT CURVES

IDMT Curves Mathematical formula IDMT thresholds Reset timer IEC CURVES. RI curves. IEEE/ANSI Curves. Rectifier protection curve LABORELEC CURVE Thermal overload curves Mathematical formula Tripping curve
11 11 11 11 11 12
12 12 12 13 16 22 23 29 30 31 31 32
1.
1.1
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Minimum Level of current Starting current sensitivity to self-power the MiCOM P124 relay on at least one phase: 0.2 In
1.2
Phase overcurrent protection Current Phase Current Range Thresholds I> I>> I>>> NOTE : Hysteresis Instantaneous time From zero current From a 0.2 In current Drop out time Phase time delays DMT IDMT curves IEC: < 60 ms < 30 ms 30 ms (tI>, tI>>, tI>>>) 0 ms to 180 s, step of 10 ms Short time inverse (AREVA), Standard Inverse (IEC), Very inverse (IEC), Extremely inverse (IEC), Long time inverse (AREVA). RI : IEEE/ANSI : (Electromechanical type). Short time inverse (CO2), Moderately inverse (ANSI), Inverse (CO8), Very inverse (ANSI), Extremely inverse (ANSI). RC : Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) Rectifier curve 0.025 to 1.5, step of 0.025 Fundamental only 0.1 to 40 x rated current, step of 0.01 In 3 independent (I>, I>>, I>>>) 0.1 to 4 In (see note) 0.5 to 40 In 0.5 to 40 In
When I> is associated to an IDMT curve the maximum setting recommanded should be 2 In. 95 %
P124/EN T05/C44 CHAPTER 5 Page 4/32 Reset time MiCOM P124 self-powered For DMT phase time delay: For IDMT Phase time delay : MiCOM P124 dual-powered For DMT phase time delay : For IEEE/ANSI phase time delay : Fixed : 0 ms Fixed: 0 ms Fixed: 50 ms
Short time inverse (CO2), Moderately Inverse (ANSI), Inverse (CO8), Very inverse (ANSI), Extremely Inverse (ANSI).
Reset Time Multiplier Setting (RTMS) or DMT For IEC and RI characteristics: 1.3
0.025 to 3.2, step of 0.025 0.04 to 100s, step of 0.01 s 0.04 to 100s, step of 0.01 s
Neutral/Ground/Earth Overcurrent Protection Current Earth current Ranges Fundamental only 0.002 to 1 x rated current, step of 0.005 Ien 0.01 to 8 x rated current, step of 0.005 Ien 0.1 to 40 x rated current, step of 0.005 Ien Thresholds 3 independent (Ie>, Ie>>, Ie>>>) Range 0.002 to 1 x Ien Ie> 0.002 to 1 Ien (see note) Ie>> 0.002 to 1 Ien Ie>>> 0.002 to 1 Ien Range 0.01 to 8 x Ien Ie> 0.01 to 1 Ien (see note) Ie>> 0.01 to 8 Ien Ie>>> 0.01 to 8 Ien Range 0.1 to 40 x Ien Ie> 0.1 to 25 Ien (see note) Ie>> 0.5 to 40 Ien Ie>>> 0.5 to 40 Ien NOTE : When Ie> is associated to an IDMT curve the maximum setting recommanded should be : For the range 0.002 to 1 Ien : 0.05 Ien For the range 0.01 to 8 Ien : 0.4 Ien For the range 0.1 to 40 Ien : 2 Ien 95 %
Hysteresis
Technical Guide Technical data and curves characteristics MiCOM P124 Instantaneous time From zero current From a 0,2 In current Drop out time Earth time delays DMT IDMT Curves IEC : < 60 ms < 30 ms 30 ms
(tIe>, tIe>>, tIe>>>) 0 ms to 180 s, step of 10 ms Short time inverse (AREVA), Standard Inverse (CEI), Very Inverse (CEI), Extremely Inverse (CEI), Long time inverse (AREVA). RI : IEEE/ANSI : (Electromechanical type). Short time inverse (CO2), Moderately Inverse (ANSI), Inverse (CO8), Very Inverse (ANSI), Extremely Inverse (ANSI). RC : Rectifier curve. 0.025 to 1.5, step of 0.025. 3 types : 1, 2 or 3 used with 0.01 to 8 Ien range only.
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) LABORELEC curve Reset time MiCOM P124 self-powered For DMT phase time delay: For IDMT Phase time delay : MiCOM P124 dual-powered For DMT phase time delay: For IEEE/ANSI Earth time delay
Fixed: 0 ms Fixed: 50 ms Fixed: 0 ms Short time inverse (CO2), Moderately Inverse (ANSI), Inverse (CO8), Very inverse (ANSI), Extremely Inverse (ANSI).
Reset Time Multiplier Setting (RTMS) or DMT: For IEC and RI characteristics:
0.025 to 3.2, step of 0.025 0.04 to 100s, step of 0.01s 0.04 to 100s, step of 0.01 s
P124/EN T05/C44 CHAPTER 5 Page 6/32 1.4 Thermal overload protection Current Current threshold I > Thermal state (alarm and trip) Constant Time Te k factor 1.5 Current Phase Current Range I< Time delay Hysteresis 1.6 RMS
0.2 to 3.2 x rated current, step of 0.01 50 to 200 % x 2 , step of 1 % 1 to 200 min, step of 1 min 1 to 1.5, step of 0.01 Fundamental only 2 to 100% x rated current, step of 1% t<I 0 to 180 s, step of 0.01 s 105 %
Undercurrent protection (P124 dual-powered only)
Negative sequence overcurrent protection (P124 dual-powered only) Current Phase Current Range I2> NOTE : Hysteresis I2> Time delay DMT IDMT curves IEC : 0 ms to 150 s, step of 10 ms Short time inverse (AREVA), Standard Inverse (CEI), Very Inverse (CEI), Extremely Inverse (CEI), Long time inverse (AREVA). RI : IEEE/ANSI : (Electromechanical type). Short time inverse (CO2), Moderately Inverse (ANSI), Inverse (CO8), Very Inverse (ANSI), Extremely Inverse (ANSI). Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) Hysteresis Reset time For TD phase time delay: For IEEE/ANSI I2> Time delay : Fixed: 0 ms Short time inverse (CO2), Moderately Inverse (ANSI), Inverse (CO8), Very Inverse (ANSI), Extremely Inverse (ANSI). Reset Time Multiplier Setting (RTMS) or DMT For IEC and RI characteristics: 0.025 to 3.2, step of 0.025 0.04 to 100s, step of 0.01s 0.04 to 100s, step of 0.01 s 0.025 to 1.5, step of 0.025 95 % Fundamental only 0.1 to 40 x rated current when I2> is associated to an IDMT curve the maximum setting recommended should be 2 In. 95 %
2.
2.1
AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS (DUAL-POWERED ONLY)

Cold load pickup Range Time delay tCL 20 to 500 % x nominal settings, step of 1% 0,1s to 3600s, step of 100 ms
2.2
Auxiliary timers 2 independent associated to the logic inputs Aux1 and Aux2 tAux1 & tAux2 Range 0 ms to 200 s, step of 10 ms
2.3
Multishot autorecloser Main shots Dead times Reclaim time Inhibition time 4 independent shots phase and/or earth Cycles 1 & 2 0.01 to 300s ; step of 10ms Cycles 3 & 4 0.01 to 600s ; step of 10ms 20ms to 600s; step of 10ms 20ms to 600s; step of 10ms
2.4
Broken conductor detection Principle used Broken conductor threshold Time delay tBC I2/I1 20 to 100 % ; step of 1% 1 to 14400s ; step of 1s
2.5
Circuit breaker failure CB failure time Phase current range I< Accuracy Hysteresis tBF 30ms to 10s ; step of 10ms 2 % to 100 % x rated current, step of 1 % from 0.02 In to 0.1 In : 0.006 In from 0.1 In to 1 In : 2 % x nominal setting maximum 0.008 In or 0.95 x nominal setting
2.6
Trip circuit supervision Trip circuit supervision time t SUP 100ms to 10s, step of 50ms
2.7
Circuit breaker control and monitoring
Circuit breaker opening time Circuit breaker closing time
(t Open Pulse) (t Close Pulse)
50ms to 1s ; step of 10ms 50ms to 1s ; step of 10ms 0 to 50000 operations 0 to 4.10 9 ; step of 10 6 100ms to 5s ; step of 100ms 100ms to 5s ; step of 100ms
Circuit breaker opening alarm threshold Amps or square amps alarm threshold Circuit breaker tripping time alarm threshold Circuit breaker closing time alarm threshold
2.8
Logic selectivity 2 Independant timers : tAux 1 & tAux 2 Range 0ms to 150s ; step of 10ms
3.
RECORDING FUNCTIONS : SELF-POWERED RELAY

Fault recorder Capacity Triggers Data 5 faults Any selected protection alarm and threshold Protection thresholds AC inputs measurements (RMS) Fault magnitudes
4.
4.1
RECORDING FUNCTIONS : DUAL-POWERED RELAY

Fault recorder Capacity Time-tag Triggers Data 5 faults to 1 millisecond Any selected protection alarm and threshold Fault date Protection thresholds Setting Group AC inputs measurements (RMS) Fault magnitudes
4.2
Event recorder Capacity Time-tag Triggers 75 events to 1 millisecond Any selected protection alarm and threshold Logic input change of state Setting changes
4.3
Disturbance recorder Capacity Sampling rate Settings Triggers Pre-time Post-time 5 records of 3 s each 32 samples per frequency cycle 100 ms to 3 s, step of 100 ms 100 ms to 3 s, step of 100 ms Any selected protection alarm and threshold Logic input Remote command 4 AC input channels Digital input and output states Frequency value.
Data
5.
5.1
COMMUNICATION
Front communication RS 232 port Protocols Connectors front port, screened twisted wire pair MODBUSTM RTU Sub-D 9 pin female connector
5.2
Rear communication (dual-powered only) RS 485 port Connectors Protocols rear port, screened twisted wire pair screws or snap-on MODBUSTM RTU Courier IEC 60870-5-103 DNP3 300 to 38 400 bauds (programmable)
Data rate
6.
6.1
INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

AC Inputs Phase and earth current inputs Frequency Range Nominal Current inputs burden In=1A or In=5A Phase : Earth : Thermal withstand 1 and 5 Amps (choice on ordering code) 45 to 65 Hz 50/60 Hz < 2.5 VA < 2.5 VA 1s @ 100 x rated current 2s @ 40 x rated current continuous @ 3 x rated current
6.2
Striker output For an initial minimum voltage of 12V, the minimum energy delivered is 20mJ. For a 100 resistive load, the residual voltage after 15ms is higher than 6V.
6.3 6.3.1
Logic Output Special trip output : Relay RL1 Logic output type Current Make Carry Break dry contact Ag Cdo 30 Amps and carry for 3 s 8 Amps continuous dc: 100 W resistive, 50 W inductive (L/R 40 ms) with a maximum of 5A or 300V. ac: 1250 VA with a maximum of 5A or 300V (power factor = 0.5) < 7 ms > 100 000 operations
Logic output operation time Logic output mechanical durability
P124/EN T05/C44 CHAPTER 5 Page 10/32 6.3.2 Other logic outputs (dual-powered version only) RL2 to RL6 Logic output type Current Make Carry Break dry contact Ag Cdo
30 Amps and carry for 3 s 5 Amps continuous 135 Vdc, 0.3 A (L/R = 30 ms) 250 Vdc : 50W resistive ou 25W inductive (L/R = 40 ms) 220 Vac, 5 Amps (cos = 0.6)
Logic output operation time Logic output mechanical durability 6.4 Logic input type Logic input burden Logic input recognition time Supply :
< 7 ms > 100 000 operations independent optical isolated 10 mAmps per input < 2 ms
Logic Input (dual-powered version only)
Logic input operation Cortec Code A F M H V W Relay auxiliary voltage range 24 60 Vdc 48 150 Vdc 130 250 Vdc 100 250 Vac 125 - 250 Vdc 100 250 Vac 48 150 Vdc 110 250 Vac 125 250 Vdc 110 250 Vac Auxiliary voltage range for the logic inputs 24 60 Vdc (*) 48 150 Vdc (*) 130 250 Vdc (*) 48 250 Vac (*) 105 145 Vdc 110 Vdc (-30%/+20%) 220 Vdc (-30%/+20%) Minimum Minimum polarisation current level voltage level (Volt) 15 Vdc 25 Vdc 38 Vdc 38 Vdc 96 Vdc 77 Vdc 154 Vdc 3.35 mA 3.35 mA 2.20 mA 1.90 mA 1.80 mA 7.4 mA at 110 Vdc 3.8 mA at 220 Vdc
(*) The tolerance on the auxiliary voltage variations for the logic inputs is +20% in dc voltage and 20%, +10% in ac voltage. 6.5 Power supply (dual-powered version only) Auxiliary voltage Vaux, 3 ranges 24-60 Vdc 48-150 Vdc 130-250 Vdc / 100-250 Vac, 50/60 Hz dc 20 % ac 20 %, + 10 % 12 %. 50 ms 3 W standby + 0.25 W per energised relay 6 VA standby + 0.4 VA per energised relay dc ac
Power supply variations Ripple Power off withstand Burden
P124/EN T05/C44 CHAPTER 5 Page 11/32 2 % 2 % with a minimum of 10 ms typical 0.2 % at In 500 Hz
7.
ACCURACY
Protection thresholds Time delay Measurements Measurements pass band
8.
CT DATA
MiCOM P124 relay settings Phase CT primary Earth CT primary Recommendations : 5 VA 5P10 or 5 VA 10P10 Connections: refer to external connection diagrams in Appendix 1 1 to 9999, step of 1 1 to 9999, step of 1
9.
HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND

Dielectric withstand Impulse voltage Insulation resistance IEC 60 255-5 IEC 60 255-5 IEC 60 255-5 2 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode 5 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode > 1000 M.
10.
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
High frequency disturbance Fast transient Electrostatic discharge Radio frequency impulse IEC 1000-4-1 IEC 1000-4-4 ANSI C37.90.1 IEC 1000-4-2 ANSI C37.90.2 IEC 1000-4-3 2.5 kV common mode, class 3 1 kV differential mode, class 3 4 kV auxiliary voltage, class 4 2 kV others, class 4 8 kV, class 4 35 V/m 10 V/m
11.
ENVIRONMENT
Temperature Humidity Protection de l'enveloppe Vibrations Shocks and bumps Seismic IEC 60255-6 IEC 60068-2-3 IEC 60529 IEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60255-21-11 IEC 60255-21-3 Storage Operation 25C to +70C 25C to + 55C
56 days at 93% RH and 40C IP52, IK07 Response and endurance, class 2 Response and withstand, class 1 Class 1.
12.
12.1
CURVES
IDMT Curves
12.1.1 Mathematical formula 12.1.1.1 IDMT thresholds The first phases (earth) overcurrent threshold can be selected with a dependent time characteristic. The time delay is calculated with a mathematical formula. In all, there are 13 inverse time characteristics available (11 for self-powered relay). The mathematical formula applicable to the first 11 (first 10 for self-powered relay) curves is :
K + L t = T (i / Is ) 1
Where: t K I IS L T = Tripping time = Coefficient (see table) = Value of measured current = Value of the programmed threshold (Pick-up value) = Coefficient (see table) = ANSI/IEEE coefficient (zero for IEC curves) = Time multiplier between 0.025 and 1.5 Standard AREVA IEC IEC IEC AREVA C02 ANSI/IEEE C08 ANSI/IEEE ANSI/IEEE K factor 0.05 0.14 13.5 80 120 0.002394 0.0515 5.95 19.61 28.2 45900 factor 0.04 0.02 1 2 1 0.02 0.02 2 2 2 5.6 0 0 0 0 0 0.01694 0.114 0.18 0.491 0.1215. 0 L factor
Type of curve Short Time Inverse Standard inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse Long time inverse Short Time Inverse Moderately Inverse Long Time Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Rectifier curve* * P124 Dual-powered only
Technical Guide P124/EN T05/C44 Technical data and CHAPTER 5 curves characteristics MiCOM P124 Page 13/32 The RI curve (electromechanical) is given by the following formula:
1 t = K 0.339 0.236 / (I / Is )
With K adjustable from 0.10 to 10 in steps of 0.05 This equation is valid for 1.1<= (I/IS)<= 20 Although the curves tend towards infinite when the current approaches Is, the minimum guaranteed value of the operating current for all the curves with the inverse time characteristic is 1.1Is (with a tolerance of 0,05Is), except rectifier Protection curve for which the minimum value is 1.6 Is 0.05 Is. LABORELEC CURVES (P124 Dual-powered only): The first and second earth threshold can be selected with dedicated Laborelec curves. There are 3 curves available with the following formula :
t = aI + b
where :
t = tripping time a and b = coefficient (see table) I = Primary residual current (between 1 and 40A) Type of curve LABORELEC 1 LABORELEC 2 LABORELEC 3 a 0.0897 0.0897 0.0897 b 4.0897 4.5897 5.0897
In order to be compliant with the Laborelec specifications the relay must be used with : An earth current range 0.01 Ion to 8 Ion A rated current wiring 1A A core balanced CT with a ratio 20/1. For a complete operating of the curve, the relay MiCOM P124 must be set to 0.05Ion (secondary residual current). 12.1.1.2 Reset timer The first phase overcurrent threshold [I>/tI>] ([Ie>/tIe>] for the earth) has a reset time. The fixed period for this determines the minimum time during the current need to remain lower than 95% of the phase (earth) threshold before the time delay associated with the phase (earth) overcurrent threshold resets. NOTE : There is an exception to this rule when the protection triggers. In fact, in this situation, the time delays tI>/tIe> are immediately reinitialised.
P124/EN T05/C44 CHAPTER 5
Technical Guide Technical data & curves characteristics Page 14/32 MiCOM P124 The value of the Reset Timer depends on the type of the timer associated to the pickup first phase (Earth) threshold. Type of timer associated to the first & second phase (earth) threshold DMT LABORELEC *, Rectifier, IDMT IEC or RI IDMT IEEE or CO * earth threshold only Reset timer settable: The first phase and earth overcurrent stages in the P124 relays are provided with a timer hold facility "t Reset", which may be set to a definite time value or to an inverse time characteristic (IEEE/ANSI curves only). This may be useful in certain applications, for example when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time delays. Another possible situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance times is where intermittent faults occur. An example of this may occur in a plastic insulated cable . In this application it is possible that the fault energy melts and reseals the cable insulation, thereby extinguishing the fault. This process repeats to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent. When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is minimum the relay will be repeatedly reset and not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the Timer Hold facility the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time. The reset timer "t Reset" facility for the MiCOM P124 can be found in the following menu : If the first phase (earth) threshold is selected with an IDMT IEC, Rectifier, Laborelec or RI curve, the reset timer "t Reset" with DMT characteristic is settable in the menu : Protection /[50/51] Phase OC/t Reset for the phase Protection /[50N/51N] E/Gnd/t Reset for the earth. If the first phase (earth) threshold is selected with an IDMT IEEE or CO curve, the reset timer "t Reset" with a DMTor IDMT characteristic is settable in the menu : Protection /[50/51] Phase OC/Type Tempo Reset for the phase Protection /[50N/51N] E/Gnd/Type Tempo Reset for the earth. Reset Time "t Reset" with an IDMT characteristic : The mathematical formula applicable to the five curves is :
K t =T 1 (I I ) s
Reset Timer 0 ms Settable from 40 ms to 100s Settable from 40 ms to 100s or Inverse Time (Choice of 5 IEEE curves)
Technical Guide Technical data and curves characteristics MiCOM P124 Where : t K I IS T = Reset time = Coefficient (see table) = Value of the measured current = Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value) = Coefficient (see table) = Reset Time Multiplier (Rtms) between 0.025 and 3.2 Type of curves Short time inverse Moderately Inverse Long time Inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse Standard C02 ANSI/IEEE C08 ANSI/IEEE ANSI/IEEE K factor 0.323 4.85 5.95 21.6 29.1
factor 2 2 2 2 2
P124/EN T05/C44 CHAPTER 5 Page 16/32 12.1.2 IEC CURVES.
IEC & ALSTOM Curves (TMS=0,025)
TIME IN SECONDS
MULTIPLES OF PICK UP SETTING

Short time inverse (ASLTOM) Very Inverse Long Time Inverse (ASLTOM) Standard Inverse Extremely Inverse

Short Time Inverse (ASLTOM)
TIME IN SECONDS

STANDARD INVERSE (IEC)
TIME IN SECONDS

VERY INVERSE (IEC)
TIME IN SECONDS

EXTREMEMELY INVERSE (IEC)
TIME IN SECONDS

LONG TIME INVERSE (ALSTOM)
TIME IN SECONDS
P124/EN T05/C44 CHAPTER 5 Page 22/32 12.1.3 RI curves.

RI CURVES
TIME IN SECONDS
Technical Guide Technical data and curves characteristics MiCOM P124 12.1.4 IEEE/ANSI Curves.
ANSI/IEEE & CO curves (TMS/RTMS = 0.025)
TIME IN SECONDS
Short Time Inverse (CO2) Long Time Inverse (CO8) Extremely Inverse
Moderately Inverse Very Inverse

SHORT TIME INVERSE (CO2)
TIME IN SECONDS

MODERATELY INVERSE (ANSI/IEEE)
TIME IN SECONDS

LONG TIME INVERSE (CO8)
TIME IN SECONDS

VERY INVERSE (ANSI/IEEE)
time in seconds

EXTREMELY INVERSE (ANSI/IEEE)
TIME IN SECONDS
Technical Guide Technical data and curves characteristics MiCOM P124 12.1.5 Rectifier protection curve
TRIPPING CURVE FUNCTION OF THE PREFAULT LOAD (k=1.1 & T e=10mn)
TIME IN SECONDS
MULTIPLES OF THERMAL THRESHOLD SETTING I q >
A : no prefault load, thermal state = 0% B : Thermal state = 30% C : Thermal state = 50% D : Thermal state = 70% E : Thermal state = 90%
P124/EN T05/C44 CHAPTER 5 Page 30/32 12.1.6 LABORELEC CURVE
1.5
1.0
0.5
40 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 1 5 10 Primary zero sequence current (A) 20 30
50
Time (sec)
Technical Guide Technical data and curves characteristics MiCOM P124 12.2 Thermal overload curves 12.2.1 Mathematical formula The thermal time characteristic is given by: exp(-t/) Where: t = I IFLC k IP = = = = = = (I2 - (k.IFLC)2 ) / (I2 - IP2)
Time to trip, following application of the overload current, I; Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant; Largest phase current (RMS value); Full load current rating (relay setting 'Thermal Trip'); 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 IFLC. Steady state pre-loading before application of the overload.
The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from "hot" or "cold". Mathematical formula applicable to the MiCOM Relays : The calculation of the Time to Trip is given by :
K Ttrip = Te In K trip
With : Ttrip Te K Ieq I> k 2 trip2 = = = = = = = = Time to trip (in seconds) Thermal time constant of the protected element (in seconds) Thermal overload equal to Ieq/k I> Equivalent current corresponding to the RMS value of the largest phase current. Full load current rating given by the national standard or by the supplier. Factor associated to the thermal state formula. Initial thermal state. If the initial thermal state = 30% then 2 = 0.3 Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then trip2 = 1
The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula : +1 =(Ieq/ k I>)2 [1- exp(-t/Te)] + exp(-t/Te) being calculated every 100ms. Typical alarm setting : 70 % of t he thermal capacity of the protected element.
P124/EN T05/C44 CHAPTER 5 Page 32/32 12.2.2 Tripping curve
P124/EN T06/B44
CHAPTER 6 Applications Guide
Technical Guide Applications Guide MiCOM P124
CONTENT
1. 2.
2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3
INTRODUCTION RECAP OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMER CHARACTERISTICS

Characterisation of a current transformer Equivalent diagram of a current transformer
3 4
4 5
How to calculate the rated output burden in VA of a CT from its characteristic magnitudes (Vk , Rct ) 6 Definition equivalence for common CT How to calculate the knee-point voltage Vk of a CT defined in class P 6 6
3.
3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.3
REQUIREMENTS FOR CTS TO OPERATE WITH A MiCOM P124

Consumption of MiCOM P124 relays MiCOM P124, rated current 1A MiCOM P124, rated current 5A Is the MiCOM P124 adapted to a given current transformer? P124 connected to a type AEG IED 24 with a ratio of 1/197 P124 CT connected to a type AEG IED 24 with a ratio of 1/150 Recommendations for selecting the CT
7
7 8 9 10 10 11 11
4.
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.2 4.3
POSSIBLE CONNECTIONS OF THE CTS AT THE P124 INPUT

Connection to 3 phase CTs + core balanced CT
12
12
Core balanced CT connected to the self-powered earth current input (terminals 5556) 12 Core balanced CT connected to the measurement earth current input (terminals 4748) 12 The earth current input is connected to the summation of the 3 phase CTs Connection to 2 phases CTs + core balanced CT 12 12
5.
5.1 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.3.1 5.2.3.2
DESCRIPTION AND SETTING GUIDE FUNCTION (P124 DUAL-POWERED)

Introduction Description of the function Autorecloser activation Autoreclose menu Logic Functions Logic Inputs External CB fail
OF
THE
AUTORECLOSE 13
13 15 15 15 16 16 16
P124/EN T06/B44 CHAPTER 6 Page 2/22 5.2.3.3 External starting orders 5.2.3.4 External blocking order 5.2.3.5 Autoreclose Logic Outputs 5.2.3.6 Autoreclose in progress 5.2.3.7 Final trip 5.2.4 Autoreclose logic operating sequence 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 Autoreclose Inhibit Following Manual Close Recloser lockout Setting group change lockout Setting Guidelines Number Of Shots Dead Timer Setting
Technical Guide Applications Guide MiCOM P124 16 16 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 18 19 19 19 20 20 20
5.3.2.1 Load 5.3.2.2 Circuit Breaker 5.3.2.3 Fault De-ionising Time 5.3.2.4 Protection Reset 5.3.3 Reclaim Timer Setting
1.
INTRODUCTION
The P124 Self and Dual-Powered overcurrent relays in the MICOM range have been designed to test, protect and monitor both industrial installations and public power distribution networks and substations, without having to resort to an external auxiliary power supply. They can also be used as backup for HV protections of power transmission networks. These two non-directional overcurrent protection models offer functions of protection and automation that are common with the MiCOM P122 and P123 models. For instance, for applications of MiCOM relays concerning these functions, the user should refer to document P124/EN T05/A44. The protection relays self-powered by the fault current offer the specific feature of non-conventional current inputs. Accordingly, special attention will be given to the choice of the current transformers supplying these relays. The following chapters describe our recommendations for choosing the current transformers associated to the MiCOM P124 relays. The MiCOM P124 protection relays combined with the wiring represent a load for the current transformers. Consequently, the dimensions of the current transformers must be correctly calculated in order to comply with: the electrical installation diagram, the electrical data such as the nominal current, short-circuit current, ,
2.
2.1
RECAP OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMER CHARACTERISTICS

Characterisation of a current transformer A CT for protection relays is characterised on the basis of: Its rated output burden expressed in VA, its relevant accuracy class (5P or 10P) and the accuracy limit current (5In, 10In, 15In, 20In). The accuracy limit factor (K) being the ratio between the precision limit current and the nominal current rating. Naturally, the transformation ratio of the CT is to be added to this. This ratio is the ratio of the primary current to the secondary current I1/I2. The secondary current rating is generally 1 A or 5 A. Other characteristics such as the insulating voltage or the thermal behaviour are also taken into account.
Standard BS 3938 proposes a specification identical to that of IEC 185 for the class P transformers. The CT is characterised in accordance with a second class known as the X class (Cx) which, in addition to the calculation ratio, requires a knee-point voltage Vk and an internal resistance Rct . The following magnitudes are associated to the magnetization curve of a CT: The knee-point voltage Vk, which is determined by the point of the curve V=f (Im ) beyond which an increase of 10% in the voltage V results in an increase of 50% in the magnetizing current. The voltage related to the precision limit of the CT. For a 5PK CT (accuracy class 5P, accuracy limit factor K): At the saturation voltage Vs1 we will have an accuracy of 5% on the current K * In. For a 10PK TC (accuracy class 10P, accuracy limit factor K): At the saturation voltage Vs2 we will have an accuracy of 10% on the current K*In
Knee point voltage
FIGURE 1: DEFINITION OF KNEE-POINT OF MAGNETIZATION CURVE.
With the materials generally used to manufacture current transformers, we have: Vk corresponds to 1.4 tesla Vs1 corresponds to 1.6 tesla Vs2 correspond 1.9 tesla 2.2 Equivalent diagram of a current transformer The equivalent diagram of a CT is indicated below: CT ratio: n2/n1 Lm : magnetization self-induction coil of CT Im : magnetizing current I1 : primary current I2 : secondary current = I1 * n2 /n1

Is : secondary current passing through the load Rp. : Is= I2 Im Rct : secondary winding resistance of CT (ohms)
FIGURE 2: EQUIVALENT DIAGRAM OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER
The magnetizing current I m of the transformer depends on the voltage generated at the secondary windings of the transformer. It is this current that introduces an error signal into the measurement. If the CT was perfect, the magnetizing current would be zero.
P124/EN T06/B44 CHAPTER 6 Page 6/22 2.2.1
How to calculate the rated output burden in VA of a CT from its characteristic magnitudes (Vk , Rct ) The saturation voltage is derived by the following formula: Vs = (Rct + Rp ) Is The nominal load rating of the CT being Rp = Pn /I n2 We have Vs = (Rct + Pn /In2 ) Is whence Pn = (Vs /Is - Rct )In2 For transformer with in a 5P accuracy class: Vs1 / Vk = 1.6/1.4
Thus: Vs1 = 1.6/1.4 * Vk, at Is1 equals K * In whence Pn = [(1.6/1.4 * Vk )/K* In - Rct ] *In2 For transformer with a 10P accuracy class: Vs2 / Vk = 1.9/1.4
thus Vs2 = 1.9/1.4 * Vk, at Is2 equals K * In whence Pn = [(1.9/1.4 * Vk )/K* In - Rct ] *In2 2.2.2 Definition equivalence for common CT Knowing that the only constants of a CT are its magnetization curve, its resistance Rct and its transformation ratio , it is possible change from a transformer with a power Pn1 in VA of the 5PK1 type to a transformer with a power of Pn2 in VA of the 5PK2 type. Given known values of Vs1 and Rct: Vs1 = (Rct +Pn1 /In2 )*K1 * In = (Rct + Pn2 /In2 )*K2 *In Pi = Rct * In2 (ohmic loss of CT) (Pi +Pn1) * K1 = (Pi + Pn2 ) * K2 whence K2 = [(Rct * In2 + Pn1 )/ (Rct * In2 + Pn2 )] * K1 2.2.3 How to calculate the knee-point voltage Vk of a CT defined in class P For a transformer with accuracy class of 5P : Vs1 / Vk = 1.6/1.4
Pn = [(1.6/1.4 * Vk )/K* In - Rct ] *In2 whence Vk = 1.4/1.6 (Pn / In 2 + Rct) K * In For a transformer with a precision class 10P : V s2 / V k = 1.9/1.4
Pn = [(1.9/1.4 * Vk )/K* In - Rct ] *In2 whence Vk = 1.4/1.9 (Pn / In 2 + Rct) K * In.
3.
REQUIREMENTS FOR CTS TO OPERATE WITH A MiCOM P124

For the conventional case of a resistive load, the voltage at the secondary winding of the transformer is proportional to the primary current, so the error remains constant. In the case of a MiCOM P124 type self-powered protection relay, this no longer applies, since the voltage at the input of the protection circuit is in a non-proportional ratio to the input current. The best solution to check whether the MiCOM P124 relay is adapted to a given CT is to have available the magnetization curve and the internal resistance of the CT in question. To guarantee good precision at low currents, the magnetizing current of the CT must be low. In other words, the input voltage of the relay must be sufficiently low compared with the knee-point voltage Vk of the CT. The following paragraphs show the ac burden of the P124 MiCOM relay and, knowing the magnetisation curve of a CT, one can then determine the precision of the system as a whole, for the entire current range: PROTECTION P124 + associated CT.
3.1
Consumption of MiCOM P124 relays The MiCOM P124 self and dual-powered models (with identical ac burden at their current inputs) have a minimum self-supply starting current of 0.2 In. This minimum level of current is needed on at least one phase to enable the MiCOM relay to be correctly self-powered to ensure the full capability of its protection functions:
CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING ARE THE THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS
3 In continuous rating 40 In during 100 s 100 In during 1 s
P124/EN T06/B44 CHAPTER 6 Page 8/22 3.1.1 MiCOM P124, rated current 1A
The figure below indicates the voltage (average value of signal for 10 ms) on each phase or on earth current input (across terminals 55 and 56), depending on the current injected.
40.00
50.00
60.00
P124 version In=1A
10.00 15
FIGURE 3: CURRENT INPUT BURDEN, RATED CURRENT 1A
20.00
Average voltage (V)
10
0 0.00
In
Current In (A)
30.00
Technical Guide Applications Guide MiCOM P124 3.1.2 MiCOM P124, rated current 5A
The figure below indicates the voltage (average value of signal for 10 ms) on each phase or on earth current input (across terminals 55 and 56), depending on the current injected.
40.00
50.00
60.00
P124 version In=5A
FIGURE 4: CURRENT INPUT BURDEN, RATED CURRENT 5A
0 0.00
Average voltage (V)
In
10.00
20.00
Current In (A)
30.00
P124/EN T06/B44 CHAPTER 6 Page 10/22 3.2 Is the MiCOM P124 adapted to a given current transformer?
The purpose of this chapter is to show the adequacy of the MiCOM P124 relay to a given CT. We propose to take as an example the AEG IED 24 reference multi-secondary windings CT. 3.2.1 P124 connected to a type AEG IED 24 with a ratio of 1/197 The characteristics indicated by the maker of the CT are as follows: Rated current In = 1A, Class X (Cx), Vk>38.0 V, Rct <0.443 ohms Given the burden of a phase input for a given current (see paragraphs 3.1.1 and 3.1.2). The charts of the maker of the CT indicate the magnetizing current in terms of the voltage and we can then calculate the error caused by the magnetizing current for the following three currents: MiCOM P124, rated current In = 1A Current Voltage Magnetizing current Error 0.2 In (starting current) 4.3 V 0,006 A 3% In 2.66 V 0.006 A 0.6 % 40 In 11.8 V 0.01 A 0.025 %
The errors calculated reveal a maximum error of 3 % at minimum current, with this error inversely proportional to the current. Referring to chapter 2.2.1, we can derive the corresponding rated output burden in the P class of this transformer expressed in terms of Vk and R ct. as follows: The corresponding rated output burden of this CT in class 5 is: Pn = [(1.6/1.4 * Vk )/10* In - Rct ] *In2 with In = 1 A and an accuracy limit factor of 10 Pn = 3.89 VA 5P10
The corresponding rated output burden of this CT in class 10 is:
Pn = [(1.9/1.4 * Vk )/10* In - Rct ] *In2 with In = 1 A and an accuracy limit factor of 10. Pn = 4.71 VA 10P10
Test were conducted on the MiCOM P124 with this CT and confirmed the satisfactory operation of the combination CT + P124. NOTE: in this example, the relay was connected along side the CT; in this way, the influence of the wiring was negligible.
Technical Guide Applications Guide MiCOM P124 3.2.2 P124 CT connected to a type AEG IED 24 with a ratio of 1/150 The characteristics indicated by the maker of the CT are: Rated current In = 1A, Class X (Cx), Vk>28.6 V, Rct <0.393 ohms
Given the burden of a phase input for a given current (see paragraphs 3.1.1 and 3.1.2). Since the charts of the maker of the CT indicate a magnetizing current against voltage, we can calculate the error caused by the magnetizing current for the following three currents : MiCOM P124, rated current In = 1A Current Voltage Magnetising current Error 0.2 In (starting current) 4.3 V 0.01 A 5% 2.66 V 0.01 A 1% In 40 In 11.8 V 0.017 A 0.042 %
The errors calculated reveal a maximum error of 5 % at minimum current, with this error inversely proportional to the current. Referring to chapter 2.2.1, we can derive a corresponding rated output burden in class P of this transformer expressed in terms of Vk and R ct as folles : The corresponding rated output burden of this CT in class 5 is: Pn = [(1.6/1.4 * Vk )/10* In - Rct ] *In2 with In = 1 A and an accuracy limit factor of 10 Pn = 2.87 VA 5P10
The corresponding rated output burden of this CT in class 10 is:
Pn = [(1.9/1.4 * Vk )/10* In - Rct ] *In2 with In = 1 A and an accuracy limit factor of 10. Pn = 3.48 VA 10P10
Tests were conducted on the MiCOM P124 with this CT and confirmed the satisfactory operation of the combination CT + P124. NOTE: 3.3 in this example, the relay was connected alongside the CT, so the influence of the wiring was negligible.
Recommendations for selecting the CT Assuming that the CT does not supply any circuits other than the MiCOM P124, in practice, we can recommend CTs of the following types: 5VA 5P10 or 5VA 10P10 secondary 1A or 5A.
4.
4.1 4.1.1
POSSIBLE CONNECTIONS OF THE CTS AT THE P124 INPUT

For the diagrams, consult those indicated in appendix 1 of the technical guide. Connection to 3 phase CTs + core balanced CT Core balanced CT connected to the self-powered earth current input (terminals 5556) Advantage: This connection is advantageous when the transformation ratio of the core CT is less than that of the phase CTs (greater sensitivity demand on the earth range). This enables the fault at the earth current input of the protection to be perceived even if this fault is not of sufficient level (0.2 In) to supply the protection via the phase currents, in which case the fault could self-power the protection through the earth current input. Disadvantage: The core CT must be appropriately dimensioned, that is it must have few turns, to ensure good sensitivity whilst nonetheless being capable of providing the burden in VA needed for the protection.
4.1.2
Core balanced CT connected to the measurement earth current input (terminals 4748) Advantage: In this case, there is no need for the core CT to supply the MiCOM P124 through the earth current input, so the core has no need to be overdimensioned in terms of power. Disadvantage: No self-supply of the MiCOM P124 by the earth current input and hence the need for a minimum current at the phases (0.2 In).
4.2
The earth current input is connected to the summation of the 3 phase CTs Advantage: In this case, the earth current is detected by summing the 3 phase CTs, so there is no need to use a core CT. The summing operation is conducted at terminals 47-48 of the earth current input, so there is no need for the CTs to supply the relay via the earth current input. Disadvantage: Less accuracy than core CT connection.
4.3
Connection to 2 phases CTs + core balanced CT Advantage: Only 2 CTs are used, resulting in saving one phase CT. The third phase is reformed by the wiring. Disadvantage: The phase and earth CTs must be suitably overdimensioned. The core CT must be connected to the supply input of the earth current input (terminals 55-56). We assume that the system is balanced.
5.
5.1
DESCRIPTION AND SETTING GUIDE OF FUNCTION (P124 DUAL-POWERED ONLY)

Introduction
THE
AUTORECLOSE
An analysis of faults on any overhead line network has shown that 80-90% are transient in nature. A transient fault, such as an insulator flash-over, is a self clearing non-damage fault. This type of fault can be cleared by the immediate tripping of one or more circuit breakers to isolate the fault, and does not recur when the line is re-energised. Lightning is the most common cause of transient faults, other possible causes being clashing conductors and wind blown debris. The remaining 10 - 20% of faults are either non-permanent (arcing fault) or permanent. A non-permanent fault could be caused by a small tree branch falling on the line. Here the cause of the fault would not be removed by the immediate tripping of the circuit, but could be burnt away during a time delayed trip. Permanent faults could be broken conductors, transformer faults, cable faults or machine faults which must be located and repaired before the supply can be restored. In the majority of fault incidents, if the faulty line is immediately tripped out, and time is allowed for the fault arc to de-ionise, reclosure of the circuit breakers will result in the line being successfully re-energised. Autoreclose schemes are employed to automatically reclose a switching device a set time after it has been opened due to operation of protection where transient and non-permanent faults are prevalent. On HV/MV distribution networks, auto-reclosing is applied mainly to radial feeders where system stability problems do not generally arise. The main advantages to be derived from using autoreclose can be summarised as follows: Minimises interruptions in supply to the consumer. Reduces operating costs - less man hours in repairing fault damage and the possibility of running substations unattended. With autoreclose instantaneous protection can be used which means shorter fault durations which gives rise to less fault damage and fewer permanent faults.
As 80% of overhead line faults are transient, elimination of loss of supply from such faults, by the introduction of autoreclosing gives obvious benefits. Furthermore, autoreclosing may allow a particular substation to operate unattended. In the case of unattended substations, the number of visits by personnel to reclose a circuit breaker manually after a fault can be substantially reduced, an important consideration for substations in remote areas. Autoreclosing gives an important benefit on circuits using time graded protection, in that it allows the use of instantaneous protection to give a high speed first trip. With fast tripping, the duration of the power arc resulting from an overhead line fault is reduced to a minimum, thus lessening the chance of damage to the line, which might otherwise cause a transient fault to develop into a permanent fault. Using short time delay protection also prevents blowing of fuses and reduces circuit breaker maintenance by eliminating pre-arc heating when clearing transient faults.
Figure 5 shows an example of 4 autoreclose cycles to the final trip : td1, td2, td3, td4 = dead time 1, 2, 3 and 4 timers tr = Reclaim type O = CB open C = CB closed.
FIGURE 5: TYPICAL AUTORECLOSE CYCLES
It should be noted that when short time delay protection is used with autoreclosing, the scheme is normally arranged to block the instantaneous protection after the first trip. Therefore, if the fault persists after reclosure, the time graded protection will give discriminative tripping with fuses or other protection devices, resulting in the isolation of the faulted section. However, for certain applications, where the majority of the faults are likely to be transient, it is not uncommon to allow more than one instantaneous trip before the instantaneous protection is blocked. Some schemes allow a number of reclosures and time graded trips after the first instantaneous trip, which may result in the burning out and clearance of nonpermanent faults. Such a scheme may also be used to allow fuses to operate in teed feeders where the fault current is low. When considering feeders which are partly overhead line and partly underground cable, any decision to install autoreclosing would be influenced by any data known on the frequency of transient faults. When a significant proportion of the faults are permanent, the advantages of autoreclosing are small, particularly since reclosing on to a faulty cable is likely to aggravate the damage.
Technical Guide Applications Guide MiCOM P124 5.2 5.2.1 Description of the function Autorecloser activation
The autoreclose function of the MiCOM P124 Dual-powered is available only if the following conditions are verified : The auxiliary contact of the CB status 52a must be connected to the relay See AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu The trip output relay RL1 must not be latched to the earth and/or phase protection function See AUTOMAT. CTRL/Latch functions menu
IF THE AUXILIARY SUPPLY IS LOST DURING AN AUTORECLOSE CYCLE, THE AUTORECLOSE FUNCTION IS TOTALLY DISABLED.
CAUTION :
5.2.2
Autoreclose menu The following table shows the relay settings for the autoreclose function, including the available setting ranges. The same settings are available in the PROTECTION 2 Menu. MENU TEXT PROTECTION G1 Autoreclose ? Ext CB Fail ? Ext CB Fail Time Ext Block ? Dead Time tD1 Dead Time tD2 Dead Time tD3 Dead Time tD4 Reclaim Time tR Inhib Time tI Phase Cycles E/Gnd Cycles CYCLES tI> CYCLES tI>> CYCLES tI>>> CYCLES tIe> CYCLES tIe>> CYCLES tIe>>> CYCLES tAux1 CYCLES tAux2 SETTING RANGE MIN MAX NO YES NO YES 10 ms 600 s NO YES 10 ms 300 000 ms 10 ms 300 000 ms 10 ms 600 000 ms 10 ms 600 000 ms 20 ms 600 000 ms 20 ms 600 000 ms 0 4 0 4 4321 1201 4321 1211 4321 1110 4321 0111 4321 1121 4321 1111 4321 1112 4321 0101 STEP SIZE
10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 1 1
P124/EN T06/B44 CHAPTER 6 Page 16/22 Example of setting : CYCLES tI> 4321 1201
4321 are the cycles 1 to 4 associated to the trip on tI> pick up 1201 are the actions following the tI> time out : 0 = no action on autorecloser : definitive trip 1 = trip on tI> pick up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tI> pick up : and this whatever the setting in AUTOMAT. CRTL/Trip commands/Trip tI> menu. In addition to these settings, function links in the PROTECTION G1/Phase OC or PROTECTION/E/Gnd menus are also required to fully integrate the autoreclose logic in the MiCOM P124 relay. Refer to the User Guide of the Technical Guide. 5.2.3 5.2.3.1 Logic Functions Logic Inputs The autoreclose function has four inputs affecting the logic, which are configured to any of the opto-isolated inputs on the relay via the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu. External inputs may be used to influence the autorecloser scheme. The function of these inputs are described below. 5.2.3.2 External CB fail The majority of circuit breakers are only capable of providing one trip-close-trip cycle. Following this, it is necessary to establish if there is sufficient energy to reclose the CB. The input assigned to CB FLT function is used to ensure that there is sufficient energy available to close and trip the CB before initiating a CB close command. If on completion of the dead time, sufficient energy is not available by checking the CB FLT input for a time given by the tCFE, a lockout occur and the CB remains open. This function is disabled by not allocating the function in the PROTECTION G1/Autoreclose menu (function Ext CB Fail to NO). 5.2.3.3 External starting orders Two separate and programmable inputs (AUTOMAT.CTRL/INPUTS/Aux1(2) menu) may be used to initiate the autorecloser function from an external device (such as an existing overcurrent relay). These logic inputs may be used independently and also in parallel with the MiCOM P124 Overcurrent settings. These external orders can be disabled independently by not allocating the functions in the PROTECTION G1/Autoreclose/CYCLES tAux1 menu and PROTECTION G1/Autoreclose/CYCLES tAux2 menu. 5.2.3.4 External blocking order The input assigned to the Block-79 function (programmable in the AUTOMAT.CTRL/INPUTS menu) may block the autoreclose function and cause a lock-out if the autorecloser function is in progress. This input can be used when protection operation without autorecloser function is required. A typical example is on a transformer feeder, where autoreclosing may be initiated from the feeder protection but need to be blocked from the transformer protection side.
These external order can be disabled by not allocating the function in the PROTECTION/Autoreclose/Ext Block menu. 5.2.3.5 Autoreclose Logic Outputs The following output signals can be assigned to relay contact or to LEDs to provide information about the status of the auto Reclose cycle. These are described below, identified by their namings. 5.2.3.6 Autoreclose in progress The "Autoreclose in progress" signal is present during the complete reclose cycles from protection initiation to the end of the reclaim time or lockout. The "Autoreclose in progress" information is allocated to a LED in the CONFIGURATION/Led/Recloser Run menu. The "Autoreclose in progress" information is allocated to the output relays in the AUTOMAT.CTRL/Output Relays/79 Run menu. 5.2.3.7 Final trip The "Final trip" signal indicates that an autoreclose cycle has been completed. A autoreclose signal is given after the CB has tripped from the protection and reclosed whereupon the fault has not been cleared. The "Final trip" signal is reset at the next CB manual closing order after the inhibit time (tI). The inhibit time (tI) is settable in the PROTECTION G1/Autoreclose/Inhib Time menu. The "Final trip" signal is allocated to AUTOMAT.Ctrl/Output Relays/79 Trip menu. the output relays in the
The "Final trip" signal is allocated to a LED in the CONFIGURATION/Led/Recloser Blocked menu. 5.2.4 Autoreclose logic operating sequence The autoreclose function provides multi-shot three phase autoreclose control. It can be adjusted to perform a single shot, two shot, three shot or four shot cycle, selectable via Phase Cycles numbers and E/Gnd Cycles numbers. Dead times for all shots (reclose attempts) are independently adjustable. The number of shots is directly related to the type of faults likely to occur on the system and the voltage level of the system. Generally, on medium voltage networks where the percentage of transient and non-permanent faults is likely to be high, a multi-shot autoreclose device will increase the possibility of the distribution line being successfully re-energised following reclosure of the circuit breaker. An autoreclose cycle can be internally initiated by operation of a protection element (phase or earth), provided the circuit breaker is closed until the instant of protection operation. The dead time (Dead Time tD1, Dead Time tD2, Dead Time tD3, Dead Time tD4) starts when the CB has tripped (when the 52a input disappears). At the end of the relevant dead time, a CB close signal is given, provided system conditions are suitable. The system conditions to be met for closing are that the circuit breaker closing spring, or other energy source, is fully charged indicated from the CB FLT input. The CB close signal is cut-off when the circuit breaker closes. When the CB has closed the reclaim time (Reclaim Time tR) starts. If the circuit breaker does not trip again, the autoreclose function resets at the end of the reclaim time.
If the protection operates during the reclaim time the relay either advances to the next shot in the programmed autoreclose cycle, or, if all programmed reclose attempts have been made, goes to lockout. The total number of reclosures and for each cycle is shown in the MEASUREMENT menu. This value can be reset to zero with command "C" (Clear) in the MEASUREMENTS/Reclose Stats menu. 5.2.5 Autoreclose Inhibit Following Manual Close The Inhib Time tI setting can be used to prevent autoreclose being initiated when the CB is manually closed onto a fault. Autoreclose is disabled for the Inhib Time tI following manual CB Closure. 5.2.6 Recloser lockout If protection operates during the reclaim time, following the final reclose attempt, the relay will lockout and the autoreclose function is disabled until the lockout condition resets. The lockout condition is reset by a manual closing after the "Inhib Time tI". Autoreclose lockout can also be caused by a CB FLT input. This CB FLT information can be issued from the CB springs are not charged/Low gas pressure. Note, lockout can also be caused by : 5.2.7 CB no open after tBf delay (CB Fail) CB Operating Time over the threshold set.
Setting group change lockout Change of setting groups is only assumed by the MiCOM P124 relays if no protection functions (except thermal overload function) or automation functions is running. During the whole autorecloser cycles, if any setting group change order is received, this order is stored in memory, and will be executed after the last timer of the autorecloser cycle.
5.3 5.3.1
Setting Guidelines Number Of Shots There are no clear-cut rules for defining the number of shots for a particular application. Generally medium voltage systems utilise only two or three shot autoreclose schemes. However, in certain countries, for specific applications, four shots is not uncommon. Four shots have the advantage that the final dead time can be set sufficiently long to allow any thunderstorms to pass before reclosing for the final time, this arrangement will prevent unnecessary lockout for consecutive transient faults. Typically, the first trip, and sometimes the second, will result from short time protection since 80% of faults are transient, the subsequent trips will be time delayed, all with increasing dead times to clear non-permanent faults. In order to determine the required number of shots the following factors must be taken into account.
An important consideration is the ability of the circuit breaker to perform several tripclose operations in quick succession and the effect of these operations on the maintenance period. If statistical information on a particular system shows a moderate percentage of nonpermanent faults which could be burned out, two or more shots are justified. In addition to this, if fused tees are used and the fault level is low, the fusing time may not discriminate with the main IDMT relay and it would then be useful to have several shots. This would warm up the fuse to such an extent that it would eventually blow before the main protection operated. 5.3.2 Dead Timer Setting The factors which influence the choice of dead timer setting are as follows. 5.3.2.1 Load Due to the great diversity of load which may exist on a system it may prove very difficult to arrive at an optimum dead time. However, it is possible to address each type of load individually and thereby arrive at a typical dead time. The most common types of load are addressed below. Synchronous motors are only capable of tolerating extremely short interruptions of supply without loss of synchronism. In practice it is desirable to disconnect the motor from the supply in the event of a fault; the dead time should be sufficient to allow the motor no-volt device to operate. Typically, a minimum dead time of 0.2-0.3 seconds has been suggested to allow this device to operate. Induction motors, on the other hand, can withstand supply interruptions, up to a maximum of 0.5 seconds and reaccelerate successfully. In general dead times of 3-10 seconds are normally satisfactory, but there may be special cases for which additional time is required to permit the resetting of manual controls and safety devices. Loss of supply to lighting circuits, such as street lighting may be important for safety reasons as intervals of 10 seconds or more may be dangerous for traffic. The main considerations for domestic customers are those of inconvenience. An important measurement criteria for many power utilities is the number of minutes lost per year to customers which will be reduced on feeders using autoreclose and will also be affected by the dead time settings used. 5.3.2.2 Circuit Breaker For high speed autoreclose the minimum dead time of the power system will depend on the minimum time delays imposed by the circuit breaker during a tripping and reclosing operation. Since a circuit breaker is a mechanical device, it will have an inherent contact separation time. This operating time for a modern circuit breaker is usually within the range of 50-100ms, but could be longer with older designs. After tripping, time must be allowed for the mechanism to reset before applying a closing pulse. This resetting time will vary depending on the circuit breaker, but is typically 0.1 seconds. Once the circuit breaker has reset, the breaker can begin to close. The time interval between the energisation of the closing mechanism and the making of the contacts is termed the closing time. Owing to the time constant of a solenoid closing mechanism and the inertia of the plunger, a solenoid closing mechanism may take 0.3s. A spring operated breaker, on the other hand, can close in less than 0.2 seconds.
Where high speed reclosing is required, for the majority of medium voltage applications, the circuit breaker mechanism itself dictates the minimum dead time. However, the fault de-ionising time may also have to be considered. High speed autoreclose may be required to maintain stability on a network with two or more power sources. For high speed autoreclose the system disturbance time should be minimised by using fast protection, <50 ms, such as distance or feeder differential protection and fast circuit breakers < 100 ms. Fast fault clearance can reduce the required fault arc de-ionising time. For stability between two sources a dead time of <300 ms may typically be required. The minimum system dead time only considering the CB is the mechanism reset time plus the CB closing time. Thus, a solenoid mechanism will not be suitable for high speed autoreclose as the closing time is generally too long. 5.3.2.3 Fault De-ionising Time For high speed autoreclose the fault de-ionising time may be the most important factor when considering the dead time. This is the time required for ionised air to disperse around the fault position so that the insulation level of the air is restored. This can be approximated from: De-ionising time = (10.5 + ((system voltage in kV)/34.5)) / frequency For 66 kV = 0.25 s (50Hz) For 132 kV = 0.29 s (50 Hz) 5.3.2.4 Protection Reset It is essential that the protection fully resets during the dead time, so that correct time discrimination will be maintained after reclosure on to a fault. For high speed autoreclose instantaneous reset of protection is required. Typical 11/33kV dead time settings in the UK are as follows; 1st dead time = 5 - 10 seconds 2nd dead time = 30 seconds 3rd dead time = 60 - 100 seconds 4th dead time (uncommon in the UK, however used in South Africa) = 60 - 100 seconds 5.3.3 Reclaim Timer Setting A number of factors influence the choice of the reclaim timer, such as; Supply continuity - Large reclaim times can result in unnecessary lockout for transient faults. Fault incidence/Past experience - Small reclaim times may be required where there is a high incidence of lightning strikes to prevent unnecessary lockout for transient faults. Spring charging time - For high speed autoreclose the reclaim time may be set longer than the spring charging time to ensure there is sufficient energy in the circuit breaker to perform a trip-close-trip cycle. For delayed autoreclose there is no need as the dead time can be extended by an extra CB healthy check window time if there is insufficient energy in the CB. If there is insufficient energy after the check window time the relay will lockout.
Switchgear Maintenance - Excessive operation resulting from short reclaim times can mean shorter maintenance periods. A minimum reclaim time of >5s may be needed to allow the CB time to recover after a trip and close before it can perform another trip-close-trip cycle. This time will depend on the duty (rating) of the CB.
The reclaim time must be long enough to allow any time delayed protection initiating autoreclose to operate. Failure to do so would result in premature resetting of the autoreclose scheme and re-enabling of instantaneous protection. If this condition arose, a permanent fault would effectively look like a number of transient faults, resulting in continuous autoreclosing unless additional measures were taken to overcome this such as excessive fault frequency lockout protection. It is possible to have short reclaim times by blocking the reclaim time from the protection start signals. If short reclaim times are to be used then the switchgear rating may dictate the minimum reclaim time. The advantage of a short reclaim time is that there are less lockouts of the CB, however, there will be more CB operations and so maintenance periods would be reduced. Sensitive earth fault protection is applied to detect high resistance earth faults and usually has a long time delay, typically 10-15s. This longer time may have to be taken into consideration, if autoreclosing from SEF protection, when deciding on a reclaim time, if the reclaim time is not blocked by an SEF protection start signal. Sensitive earth faults, for example, a broken overhead conductor in contact with dry ground or a wood fence, is rarely transient and may be a danger to the public. It is therefore common practice to block autoreclose by operation of sensitive earth fault protection and lockout the circuit breaker. Where motor-wound spring closed circuit breakers are used, the reclaim time must be at least as long as the spring winding time for high speed autoreclose to ensure that the breaker can perform a trip-close-trip cycle. A typical 11/33kV reclaim time is 3-10 seconds, this prevents unnecessary lockout during thunderstorms. However, times up to 60-180 seconds may be used.
BLANK PAGE
Technical guide MiCOM P124
P124/EN T07/B44
CHAPTER 7 Commissioning and Maintenance Guide
Technical Guide Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P124
CONTENT
1. 2.
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.2
REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING COMMISSIONING TEST ENVIRONMENT

Important notes Injection test sets Additional commissioning test equipment Communication Commissioning test sheets
3 4
4 4 4 4 5
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.1.1 3.5.1.2 3.5.1.3 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10
PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS

Allocation of terminals Electrostatic discharge (ESD) Visual inspection Earthing Current transformers (CT's) Use of a Core CT for earth faults. Cable shields and core CT Induced current flow through electric cables Core CT polarity Auxiliary supply (Dual-powered model only) Logic inputs (Dual-powered model only) Logic outputs (Dual-powered model only) Logic outputs (Self-powered version ) RS 485 rear communication (Dual-powered model only)
6
6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10
4.
4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.4
COMMISSIONING
Settings Measurements MiCOM P124 Self-powered MiCOM P124 Dual-powered Phase overcurrent (I> and I>>) Test wiring diagram MiCOM settings I> threshold with DMT tI> I> threshold with IDMT tI> I>> threshold Final checks
11
11 11 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 16 17
5.
5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.2.1 5.3.2.2 5.3.2.3
MAINTENANCE
Equipment failure Minor fault (Version Dual-powered only) Major fault Method of repair Replacing the active part Replacing the complete relay Changing the battery (MiCOM P124 Dual-powered only) Problem solving Password lost or not accepted Communication (version Dual-powered only) Values measured locally and remotely MiCOM relay no longer responds A remote command is not taken in account
18
18 18 19 20 20 20 21 21 21 21 21 22 22
1.
REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING

The MiCOM P124 relays are fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The MiCOM relays employ a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test do not need to be as extensive as with nonnumerical relays (static or electromechanical). To commission MiCOM relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning correctly and the application-specific software setting have been applied to the MiCOM relay. It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if the settings have been verified by one of the following method : Extracting the settings applied to the relay using the setting software MiCOM S1 (preferred method) Via the front panel user interface.
Reminder : It is not possible to download a new setting software as long as the programming mode is active. NOTA :
WARNING :
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the APPENDIX 2 of the Technical Guide for completion as required.
BEFORE COMMISSIONING THE RELAY, THE SAFETY SECTION OF THE MANUAL MUST BE READ.
2.
2.1
COMMISSIONING TEST ENVIRONMENT

Important notes All the commissioning tests of the MiCOM P124 relay are carried out by injecting currents to the secondary of the earth and/or phases CTs using appropriate injection test sets provided for this purpose.
2.1.1
Injection test sets For reasons of convenience (weight, spatial requirement, transportation), a singlephased injection test set is more suitable for commissioning and is able to perform all commissioning tests regarding MiCOM P124 relay. Thus, the following descriptions indicate how to conduct the commissioning tests with a single-phase injection test set. Single-phase injection test set 1 current (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms). The output power necessary to power the relay is: 2.5 VA
2.1.2
Additional commissioning test equipment 1 multimeter (precision 1%), 1 connecting terminal to measure the currents exceeding 10 A (precision 2%), Test plugs and wires to carry out injections to the CT's secondary (dimension according to the currents injected). Battery box MiCOM E1 for the self-powered model (see note) if the injected current is lower than the minimum current specified to power the relay. Type K1.3 or equivalent striker. NOTE : the battery box can also be used for the dual-powered model, when it is not powered by an external auxiliary voltage.
2.1.3
Communication For all commissioning tests, the records can be made by using the RS 485 communication on the rear connector of the MiCOM P124 (dual-powered only) relays or using the RS232 front port (both self and dual-powered models). According to each RS 485 communication protocol (MODBUS, Courier, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3), use the dedicated AREVA software MiCOM S1.
Technical Guide Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P124 2.2 Commissioning test sheets
Commissioning test sheets are available in the APPENDIX 2 of the Technical Guide. The presentation of the Commissioning test sheets follows the description of the tests of this chapter. The contents of these Commissioning test sheets enable you to log : The name of the relay, station and circuit The characteristics of the MiCOM P124 relay The various settings The results of the protection and automation checks The result of the test records after commissioning.
3.
3.1
PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS

Allocation of terminals It is necessary to consult the appropriate wiring diagram provided in the APPENDIX 1 of the Technical Guide whilst observing the various polarities and ground/earth connection.
3.2
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) Before any handling of the module (active part of the relay), please refer to the recommendations in User guide of this Technical Guide.
3.3
Visual inspection Carefully examine the relay to see if there has been any possible deterioration following installation. Check if the external wiring corresponds to the appropriate relay diagram or the assembly diagram. The reference number of the relay diagram is indicated on a label situated under the upper flap of the front panel. When the relay is withdraw from its case, use a continuity tester to check if the current short-circuits (phases and earth CT's) between the terminals indicated on the wiring diagram are closed.
3.4
Earthing Check if the earth connection of the case situated above the rear terminal block is used to connect the relay to a local earth bar. With several relays present, make sure that the copper earth bar is properly installed for solidly connecting the earthing terminals of each case.
3.5
Current transformers (CT's)
!
3.5.1 1. 2. 3.
NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.
Use of a Core CT for earth faults. If a core CT is used to detect earth faults, prior to any test, the user must check the following points : MV or HV cable screens and core CT, No current flow through the MV or HV cables, Orientation of the core CT (P1-S1, P2-S2).
Technical Guide Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P124 3.5.1.1 Cable shields and core CT
When mounting a core CT around electric cables, check the connection to the earth of the cable shields. It is vital that the earth cable of the shield moves in the opposite direction through the core CT. This cancel the currents carried by the cable shields through the core CT.
Electrical cables directed to the busbar
Screen shields
P1 P2
S1 S2
Other ends of electrical cables

FIGURE 1: SCREEN SHIELDS AND CT CORE
3.5.1.2 Induced current flow through electric cables When an electric line is earthed at its two ends for logging purposes, induced current may circulate if a second line is in parallel. This current can be read on the MiCOM P124 and produce false readings.
Busbar 1 Busbar 2
Circuit Breaker 1
Electrical line
Circuit breaker 2
P124
with CT core
Earthing 1
Earthing 2
FIGURE 2: LOGGING OF AN ELECTRICAL LINE.
P124/EN T07/B44 CHAPTER 7 Page 8/22 3.5.1.3 Core CT polarity
It is necessary to check the polarity of the core CT by following the figure below : Momentarily connect the battery + to P1 and to P2. The centre zero ammeter connected with + to S1 and to S2 will deflect in the positive direction if the wiring is correct. CT phase may be tested using the same method.
P1
S1
+ _
P2 S2
_ + mA
FIGURE 3: CORE CT ORIENTATION TEST
NOTA :
De-magnetise the CT after polarity test. Inject an ac current starting from zero and increase to slowly exceed the CT nominal value and then decrease slowly to zero.
3.6
Auxiliary supply (Dual-powered model only) Check the value of the auxiliary supply voltage (terminals 33 and 34). The value measured shall be between 0.8 and 1.2 time the nominal auxiliary supply voltage indicated on the MiCOM P124. Uaux range (Volts) 24 60 Vdc 48 150 Vdc 130 250 Vdc/ 100-250Vca Uaux nominal zone (Volts) 19 72 Vcc 38 180 Vcc 104 300 Vdc/ 80-300 Vca 80 201 336. Maximum peak value (Volts)
Technical Guide Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P124 3.7 Logic inputs (Dual-powered model only)
This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs are functioning correctly. The MiCOM P124 dual-powered relays have 5 opto-isolated inputs. Energise the opto inputs one by one, and check in the OP. PARAMETERS menu and Input status sub-menu the status of each input. 1 indicates that the input is energised, 0 indicates that the input is not energised. Input Opto input 1 9-11 Terminals Opto input 2 13-15 Terminals Opto input 3 17-19 Terminals Opto input 4 21-23 Terminals Opto input 5 25-27 Terminals 3.8 OP. PARAMETERS/Inputs Status. cell value 54321 00001 00010 00100 01000 10000
Logic outputs (Dual-powered model only) This test checks that all outputs operate correctly. The MiCOM P124 dual-powered relays have 7 outputs : One watchdog relay (RL0) which output is a change-over contact (35-36 normally closed, 36-37 normally open). The other relays, RL1 to RL6, are programmable, change-over, types. Each contact is a dry contact and can therefore be powered by an independent source. Energise the output relays in turn and check in the OP PARAMETERS menu and Relay status sub-menu the status of the output relays. 1 indicates that the relay is energised, 0 indicates that the relay is not energised. Output RL 1 RL 2 RL 3 RL 4 RL 5 RL 6
WARNING:
OP. PARAMETERS/Relay Status. cell value : 654321 000001 000010 000100 001000 010000 100000
THE TRIP OUTPUT RELAY CAN BE PROGRAMMED FOR FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
P124/EN T07/B44 CHAPTER 7 Page 10/22 3.9 Logic outputs (Self-powered version ) This test checks that all outputs operate correctly.
The MiCOM P124 self-powered relays have 2 outputs : One watchdog relay (RL0) which output is a change-over contact (35-36 normally closed, 36-37 normally open). Another relay (RL1) is used to trip the circuit breaker coil. Its output contact is a change-over type. Each contact is a dry contact and can therefore be powered by an independent source. Energise the RL1 trip relay and check its status in the OP. PARAMETERS menu and Relay status sub-menu. 1 indicates that the relay is energised, 0 indicates that the relay is not energised. Output RL 1 3.10 OP. PARAMETERS/Relay status. cell value : 1 0
RS 485 rear communication (Dual-powered model only) This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location and will vary depending on the communication protocol being adopted (refer to label under the upper flap). It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the remote location, just the relay's rear communication port and any protocol converter necessary. Connect a laptop PC to the RS485 rear port (via a KITZ for Courier communication) and check the communication with the appropriate command. If you encounter any problems, please refer to the Maintenance chapter.
4.
COMMISSIONING
The various operations for commissioning the MiCOM relays described in this chapter are not extensive : it is only necessary to verify that the application-specific software settings applied to the relay are correct. Using a PC support software MiCOM S1 connected to the RS 485 rear port (dualpowered model only) or to the RS 232 front port is not compulsory. The various indications associated to each commissioning module are described for the operator interface on the P124 front panels. The commissioning is following the points below : 1. 2. 3. Logging of the settings Validation of the measurements Validation of the thresholds and associated timers.
4.1
Settings Carry forward the settings on the commissioning test sheets.
4.2
Measurements The MiCOM P124 relays measure phase and earth currents as a True RMS value up to the 10th harmonics. The value(s) indicated take account of the phase and/or earth CT ratio.
WARNING : THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS HAVE 1 OR 5 AMP CURRENT INPUTS.CHECK THAT THE INJECTED CURRENT IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE SELECTED RANGE.
To measure the earth channel, the current will be injected via a phase channel in order to power the relay through that phase channel. This way, by injecting the earth current through terminals 48 and 47, the earth self-power transformer of the relay is avoided and the burden on the test equipment lowered. 4.2.1 MiCOM P124 Self-powered Note the select phase and earth CTs ratio. Inject on each current input (according to the external connection diagram given in Appendix 1) a current higher than the minimum specified current level (0,2 In) and check on the LCD display the corresponding current value. Carry forward the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Applied values and relay values displayed). 4.2.2 MiCOM P124 Dual-powered Note the select phase and earth CTs ratio. Energise the MiCOM P124 relay. Inject on each current input (according to the external connection diagram given in Appendix 1) a current higher than the minimum specified current level (0,2 In) and check on the LCD display the corresponding current value. Carry forward the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Applied values and relay values displayed).
P124/EN T07/B44 CHAPTER 7 Page 12/22 4.3 Phase overcurrent (I> and I>>)
Assign the various thresholds to the trip contact and therefore to the striker output (see User Guide, AUTOMAT.CTRL/Trip command menu) 4.3.1 Test wiring diagram This test wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct tests relating to the I> and I>> thresholds. The diagram describes current injection onto the phase current inputs (terminals 4950, 51-52, 53-54).
INJECTION TEST SET AUXILIARY +Uaux -Uaux SUPPLY
33 34
Dual-powered Model only
30 31 32
RS 485 communication port
MiCOM P124
A
49 1 ou 5 A 1 ou 5 A 52 53 50 51
CURRENT
N
1 ou 5 A 54 37 35 36
Watchdog 29 RL1 Trip output
Case earth
TIMER
Stop
6 4 2 + 39 _41
Striker output
Striker
FIGURE 4: I> AND I>> TESTS WIRING
Technical Guide Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P124 4.3.2 MiCOM settings Protection Menu Ie> Ie> tIe> tIe> (if DMT) Type of curve (if IDMT) TMS value (if IDMT) K value (if RI) Ie>> Ie>> tIe>> AUTOMAT.CTRL/Trip command Menu TRIP tIe> TRIP tIe>> 4.3.3 I> threshold with DMT tI> Values to be recorded : 1. 2. I> threshold for each phase Time delay tI> for each phase. YES YES YES 1 In DMT or IDMT or RI 20 s IEC VI or IEEE VI 1 1 YES 12 In 10 s
I> threshold check : 1. 2. 3. If the time delay tI> is short, gradually increase the injection current up to the value of the I> threshold. If the time delay tI> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no tripping. Then inject 1,1 x I threshold and check the trip. Gradually decreases the injected current and record the value of the drop outI > threshold.
P124/EN T07/B44 CHAPTER 7 Page 14/22 Checks : 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Alarm message on the LCD display.
Alarm LED flashes (Dual-powered model only) Trip LED on (Dual-powered model only) The magnetic "Trip" flag's state changes. I> threshold LED on (if programmed and for the version dual-powered only). The state of the magnetic flag assigned to that I> threshold changes (if it has been set and only for the dual-powered). I> threshold output closes (if programmed and for the version dual-powered only). The trip contact (RL1) operates on expiry of the time delay. The striker output operates on expiry of the time delay.
tI> time delay check : 1. 2. 4.3.4 Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI> by presetting the current above the I> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold). Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI> by presetting the current above the I> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
I> threshold with IDMT tI> Values to be recorded : 1. 2. I> threshold for each phase I>time delay for each phase.
I> threshold check : Inject a current equal to 2 x I threshold onto one of the phase current inputs. Repeat the operation for various current values (n x I threshold with n ranging from 4 to 10, for example). Check that the values measured correspond to those indicated in the table below (for TMS = 1). IEC curves Type of curve IEC STI SI VI EI LTI Nominal 1,78 10,1 13,5 26,7 120 Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1 2 x I threshold Min - Max 1,62 1,98 9,1 11,1 12,2 14,9 24 29,5 108 132 10 x I threshold Nominal 0,5 3 1,5 0,8 13,3 Min - Max 0,45 0,55 2,7 3,3 1,35 1,65 0,72 0,88 12 14,6.
Technical Guide Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P124 IEEE/ANSI curves Type of curve IEEE/ANSI STI MI I VI EI Nominal 0,25 3,8 2,2 7,2 9,5
Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1 2 x I threshold Min - Max 0,22 0,28 3,4 4,2 1,9 2,4 6,5 8 8,5 10,5 10 x I threshold Nominal 0,08 1,2 0,3 0,7 0,4 Min - Max 0,07 0,09 1,08 1,32 0,27 0,33 0,63 0,77 0,36 0,44
RI electromechanical curve Type of curve Electromechanical RI Rectifier curve Type of curve Rectifier RC Laborelec curve Type of curve Tripping time (in seconds) Primary zero sequence 1A Nominal Laborelec 1 Laborelec 2 Laborelec 3 4 4.5 5 Min - Max 3.80 - 4.20 4.22 - 4.73 4.75 - 5.25 Primary zero sequence 40A Nominal 0.5 1 1.5 Min - Max 0.48 - 0.52 0.96 - 1.04 1.44 - 1.56 Nominal 966 Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1 2 x I threshold Min - Max 917 - 1014 10 x I threshold Nominal 0.402 Min - Max 0.382 - 0.422 Nominal 4,5 Tripping time (in seconds) for K =1 2 x I threshold Min - Max 45 10 x I threshold Nominal 3,2 Min - Max 2,8 3,6
For other injected current values, compare the values found with the theoretical values calculated according to the formulae of the curves. Equations of IEC, IEEE/ANSI, RI, RC and Laborelec curves are given in Chapter "Technical data and curves characteristics" of the present Technical Guide.
P124/EN T07/B44 CHAPTER 7 Page 16/22 Checks : 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 4.3.5
Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD. Alarm LED flashes (version dual-powered only). Trip LED on (version dual-powered only). The magnetic iaTriplc flags state changes. I> threshold LED on (if programmed and for the version dual-powered only). The state of the magnetic flag assigned to that I> threshold changes (if it has been set and only for the dual-powered). I> threshold output closes (if programmed and for the version dual-powered only). The trip contact (RL1) operates on expiry of the time delay. The striker output operates on expiry of the time delay.
I>> threshold Values to be recorded : 1. 2. l>> threshold for each phase tl>> time delay for each phase
I>> threshold check : 1. 2. 3. If tI>> time delay is short, gradually raise the injection current up to the value of I>> threshold. If tI>> time delay is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check there is no trip. Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip output is close. Gradually lower the injected current and note the value of the drop out I>> threshold.
Checks : 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD. Alarm LED flashes (version dual-powered only). Trip LED on (version dual-powered only). The magnetic "Trip" flag's state changes. I>> threshold LED on (if programmed and for the version dual-powered only). The state of the magnetic flag assigned to that I>> threshold changes (if it has been set and only for the dual-powered). I>> threshold output closes (if programmed and for the version dual-powered only). The trip contact (RL1) operates on expiry of the time delay. The striker output operates on expiry of the time delay.
Technical Guide Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P124 tI>> time delay check : 1. 2. 4.4
Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by pre-setting the current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold). Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by pre-setting the current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
Final checks The tests are complete, and before leaving the relay : For both models, make sure that all alarms and magnetic flags have been reset. For MiCOM P124 dual-powered models, verify : that all the counters in the RECORDS menu, CB Monitoring. Sub-menu are reset. that the counters in the MEASUREMENTS menu are reset. .
5.
5.1
MAINTENANCE
Equipment failure MiCOM P124 relays are full digital and permanent self-diagnosing. Any failure of software or hardware elements is instantly detected. As soon as an internal fault is detected, depending on its type (minor or major), an alarm message is displayed as a priority on the front panel LCD before the fault LED is illuminated (fixed or flashing) and the watchdog relay is closed (if the fault is a major one). An equipment failure (major or minor) cannot be acknowledged on the front panel (using the dedicated tactile button keypad). Only the disappearance of the cause will acknowledge the fault and hence reset the fault LED. NOTE : any failure detected by the P124 self-powered relay is always a major failure.
5.1.1
Minor fault (Version Dual-powered only) In case of minor fault the P124 is fully operational. The RL0 watchdog relay is energised (35-36 contact open, 36-37 contact closed). For the MiCOM P124 dual-powered relays a minor fault is : 1. A communication failure. If the communication is in fault, protection and automation modules are not affected :
Message : COMM.ERROR : Communication fault Cause : Hardware or software failure of the communication module Action : Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair. Alternative : If communication is not used, disable communication in the COMMUNICATION menu (Communication ? = No). 2. Failure of the battery-backed memory or of the battery itself :
Message : RAM ERROR (failure of the battery-backed memory) Cause : Hardware or software failure Action : Check that the battery is correctly positioned and restart the protection software by disconnecting the power supply, if the software fault still remain after restart, withdraw the active part and return the module to the factory for repair. Message : BATTERY FAIL (battery in fault)
Technical Guide Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P124 Cause : Hardware failure Action :
Check that the battery is correctly positioned and restart the protection software by disconnecting the power supply. If the message fault still remains after restart, change the battery. If the fault still remains after restart, withdraw the active part and return the module to the factory for repair. NOTE : 3. it is possible to mask the message "Battery fail" in the Configuration/Alarms/Alarm Battery menu
Clock for event stamping in fault
Message : CLOCK ERROR Cause : Hardware or software failure Action : Restart the software by disconnecting the power supply, if the fault still remains after restart, withdraw the active part and return the module to the factory for repair. 5.1.2 Major fault Major fault for MiCOM P124 relays are dedicated software and hardware failures. As soon as this type of failure is detected, the watchdog (WD) is de-energised (35-36 contact closed, 36-37 contact open) and all operations are stopped (protection, automation, communication for Dual-powered model). 1. Hardware and software faults of the memory components
Messages : EEPROM ERROR DATA or EEPROM ERROR CALIBR. (Data zone or Calibration zone in fault) CT ERROR (Analogue channel in fault) Cause : Hardware or software failure Action : Restart the protection software by disconnecting the power supply, if the software fault still remains after restart, withdraw the active part and return the module to the factory for repair. 2. Loss of auxiliary supply (P124 Dual-powered only)
If the trip output relay RL1 is programmed in fail-safe operation and the auxiliary power supply lost, the MiCOM P124 relay is not able to perform the trip of the CB via RL1. In this case only the HMI is operational if the current load is over the minimum required (0.2 In on at least one phase). All the protection and automation functions are inhibited.
P124/EN T07/B44 CHAPTER 7 Page 20/22 Messages : AUX SUPPLY LOST Cause :
RL1 configured with fail-safe operation and the auxiliary power supply is lost. Action : Supply the P124 with an auxiliary power supply or configure the trip output relay RL1 in the Configuration/RL1 output relay/Fail-safe relay menu on NO. 5.2 5.2.1 Method of repair Replacing the active part The case and the rear terminals blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the MiCOM P124 relay should replacement or repair become necessary without disconnect the scheme wiring. NOTE : The MiCOM P124 of relays have integral current transformer shorting switches which will close when the active part is removed from the case.
Remove the upper and lower flap without exerting excessive force. Remove the external screws. Under the upper flap, turn the extractor with a 3 mm screwdriver and extract the active part of the relay by pulling from the upper and lower notches on the front panel of the MiCOM relay. The reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instruction in reverse, ensuring that no modification has been done on the scheme wiring. 5.2.2 Replacing the complete relay Before working at the rear of the relay, isolate all current supplies to the MiCOM relay and ensure that the relay is no more powered. To remove the complete relay (active part and case) the entire wiring must be removed from the rear connector.
NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.
Lift the top and bottom flaps and remove the screws which attach the active part to the casing. Live the top flap of the MiCOM relay, and flip the extractor using a 3mm screwdriver. Pull the active part. Remove the screws linking the casing to its environment. Re-installation of the MiCOM relay and of its case will be done using the reverse procedure.
Technical Guide Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P124 5.2.3 Changing the battery (MiCOM P124 Dual-powered only)
Each MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay has a battery to maintain recording data and the correct time when the auxiliary voltage fails. The data maintained include event, fault and disturbance records and the thermal state at the time failure. The battery is designed for a life of 10 years in standard atmospheric conditions. To replace the battery follow the following instructions : Open the lower flap on the front of the relay Gently extract the battery from its socket. If necessary, use a small screwdriver. Ensure that metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease and dust. The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into the battery holder.
ONLY USE A TYPE 1/2AA LITHIUM BATTERY WITH A NOMINAL VOLTAGE OF 3.6 V.
WARNING :
5.3 5.3.1
Ensure that the polarity markings on the battery agree with those adjacent to the socket.
Problem solving Password lost or not accepted Problem : Password lost or not accepted Cause : MiCOM P124 relays are supplied with the password set to AAAA. This password can be changed by the user ( refer OP PARAMETERS menu). Action : There is an additional unique recovery password associated to the relay which can be supplied by the factory or service agent, if given details of its serial number (under the upper flap of the front panel). With this serial number, contact your AREVA local dealer or AREVA T&D P&C After Sales Dept.
5.3.2
Communication (version Dual-powered only)
5.3.2.1 Values measured locally and remotely Problem : The measurements noted remotely and locally (via RS485 communication) differ. Cause : The values accessible on the front face via the Measurement menu are refreshed every second. Those fed back via the communication and accessible by the AREVA T&D Setting software generally have skeletal refreshing frequencies. If the refreshing frequency of the supervision software differs from that of MiCOM P124 relays (1s), there may be a difference between indicated values.
P124/EN T07/B44 CHAPTER 7 Page 22/22 Action :
Adjust the frequency for refreshing the measurements of the supervision software or of the setting software to 1 second. 5.3.2.2 MiCOM relay no longer responds Problem : No response from MiCOM P124 relays when asked by the supervision software without any communication fault message. Cause : Mainly, this type of problem is linked to an error in the MiCOM P124 communication parameters. Action : Check MiCOM P124 communication parameters (data rate, parity, etc.) are in accordance with the supervision settings. Check MiCOM P124 network address. Check that this address is not used by another device connected on the same LAN. Check that the other devices on the same LAN answer to supervision requests. 5.3.2.3 A remote command is not taken in account Problem : The communication between the relay and the PC is correct, but the relay does not accept any remote command or file downloading. Cause : Generally this is due to the fact that the relay is in programming situation. This means that the password is active. Action : Check that the password is not active in the relay since the last 5 minutes.
P124/EN T08/B44
CHAPTER 8 Communication Database P124 Dual-Powered Relay
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2
INTRODUCTION
Purpose of this document Glossary
5
5 5
2.
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.4.6 2.4.7 2.4.8 2.4.9 2.4.10 2.4.11 2.4.12 2.4.13 2.4.14 2.4.15 2.4.16 2.4.17 2.4.18 2.4.19 2.4.20
MODBUS PROTOCOL
Technical characteristics of the MODBUS connection Parameters of the MODBUS connection Synchronisation of exchanges messages Message validity check Address of the MiCOM relays MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays Presentation of the MODBUS protocol Format of frames sent by the MiCOM relay Messages validity check MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay database organisation Description of the application mapping Page 0h : Product information, remote signalling, measurements Page 1h, MiCOM P124 : general remote parameters Page 2h : setting Group 1 Page 3h : setting Group 2 Page 4h : remote controls Pages 5h/6h Page 7h Page 8h : time synchronisation Mapping access characteristics Pages 9h to 21h : disturbance record data (25 pages). Page 22h : disturbance record index frame Page 35h (addresses 3500h to 354Ah) : event record data (9 words) Page 36h Page 37h : fault record value data Page 3Eh : most older Fault record value data Pages 38h to 3Ch Pages 3Dh : number of disturbance records available Description of the mapping format, MiCOM P124 Dual-powered Disturbance record additional information
6
6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 9 10 10 12 15 19 22 25 25 25 25 26 27 29 30 32 32 34 35 36 38 46
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 2/98 2.4.21 2.4.22 2.4.23 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event Request to retrieve a dedicated event
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 47 48 48
Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records
3.
3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.6 3.4.7 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.6
K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE

K-BUS K-Bus transmission layer K-Bus connection Auxiliary equipment Relay courier database Cell reference List of events created by the relay Setting changes Systems integration data Address of the relay Measured values Status word Unit status word Control status word Measurement control Change of remote measurements Event extraction Automatic event extraction Event types Event format Manual record extraction Disturbance record extraction
49
49 49 49 50 50 51 77 79 79 79 79 80 80 80 80 81 81 81 81 82 82 82
4.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10
IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE
Physical connection and link layer Initialisation Time synchronisation Spontaneous events General interrogation Cyclic measurements Commands Disturbance records Blocking of monitor direction List of events produced by the relay
83
83 83 84 84 84 84 84 84 85 85
5.
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4
DNP 3.0 CONFIGURATION/INTEROPERABILITY GUIDE

Introduction DNP V3.00 device profile Implementation table Point List Binary Input Points Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks Counters Analog Inputs
87
87 87 90 93 93 96 97 98
BLANK PAGE
1.
1.1
INTRODUCTION
Purpose of this document This document describes the characteristics of the different communication protocol of MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay. The available communication protocols of MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay are as follows: MODBUS. K-BUS/Courier. IEC 60870-5-103. DNP3
1.2
Glossary Ir, Is, It IE pf PF : currents measured on the concerned phases (r, s, t) : residual current measured by earth input (= 3.I zero sequence) : soft weight of a word of 16 bits : heavy weight of a word of 16 bits.
2.
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay can communicate by a RS 485 link behind the unit following the MODBUS RTU protocol.
2.1 2.1.1
Technical characteristics of the MODBUS connection Parameters of the MODBUS connection The different parameters of the MODBUS connection are as follows : Isolated two-point RS485 connection (2kV 50Hz), MODBUS line protocol in RTU mode Communication speed can be configured by an operator dialog in the front panel of the relay : Baud rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Transmission mode of the configured characters by operator dialog Mode 1 start / 8 bits / 1 stop : total 10 bits 1 start / 8 bits / even parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits 1 start / 8 bits / odd parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits 1 start / 8 bits / 2 stop : total 11 bits 1 start / 7 bits / 2 stop : total 10 bits 1 start / 7 bits / 1 stop : total 9 bits 1 start / 7 bits / even parity / 1 stop : total 10 bits 1 start / 7 bits / odd parity / 1 stop : total 10 bits 1 start / 7 bits / 2 stop : total 10 bits 1 start / 7 bits / 2 stop : total 10 bits.
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 2.1.2 Synchronisation of exchanges messages
All character received after a silence on the line with more or equal to a transmission time of 3 characters is considered as a firm start. 2.1.3 Message validity check The frame validity is working with a cyclical redundancy code CRC with 16 bits. The generator polynomial is: 1 + x + x15 + x16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 binary = A001h 2.1.4 Address of the MiCOM relays The address of the MiCOM relay on a same MODBUS network is situated between 1 and 255. The address 0 is reserved for the broadcast messages 2.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays The MODBUS functions implemented on the MiCOM relays are : Function 1 or 2 : Function 3 or 4 : Function 5 : Function 6 : Function 7 : Function 8 : Function 11 : Function 15: Function 16 : Reading of n bits Reading of n words Writing of 1 bit Writing of 1 word Fast reading of 8 bits Reading of the diagnostics counter Reading of the Event counter Writing of n bits Writing of n words
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 8/98 2.3 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol
Master slave protocol, all exchange understands a master query and a slave response Frame size received from MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay Frame transmitted by the master ( query) : Slave number 1 byte 0 FFh Slave number: The slave number is situated between 1 and 255. A frame transmitted with a slave number 0 is globally addressed to all pieces of equipment (broadcast frame ) Function code: Requested MODBUS function (1 to 16) Information: Contains the parameters of the selected function. CRC16: Value of the CRC16 calculated by the master. Note: the MiCOM relay does not respond to globally broadcast frames sent out by the master. 2.3.1 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM relay Frame sent by the MiCOM relay ( response) Slave number 1 byte 1 FFh Slave number : The slave number is situated between 1 and 255. Function code : Processed MODBUS function (1 to 16) . Data : Contains reply data to master query . CRC 16: Value of the CRC 16 calculated by the slave. Function code 1 byte 1 10h Data n bytes CRC16 2 bytes Function code 1 byte 1 10h Information n bytes CRC1 6 2 bytes
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 2.3.2 Messages validity check
When MiCOM P124 relay receive a master query, it validates the frame : If the CRC is false, the frame is invalid. MiCOM P124 relay do not reply to the query. The master must retransmit its query. Excepting a broadcast message, this is the only case of non-reply by MiCOM P124 relay to a master query. If the CRC is good but the MiCOM relay can not process the query, it sends an exception response.
Warning frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response) Slave number 1 byte 1 to FFh Slave number : The slave number is situated between 1 and 255. Function code : The function code returned by the MiCOM relay in the warning frame is the code in which the most significant bit (b7) is forced to 1. Warning code : On the 8 warning codes of the MODBUS protocol, the MiCOM relay manages two of them : code 01 : function code unauthorised or unknown. code 03 : a value in the data field is unauthorised ( incorrect data ). Function code 1 byte 81h or 83h or 8Ah or 8Bh Warning code 1 byte CRC16 2 bytes pf ... PF
Control of pages being read Control of pages being written Control of addresses in pages Length of request messages CRC16: Value of the CRC16 calculated by the slave.
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 10/98 2.4 2.4.1
MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay database organisation Description of the application mapping
2.4.1.1 Settings MiCOM P123 application mapping has 9 pages of parameters. Page 0h: Page 1h: Page 2h: Page 3h: Page 4h: Pages 5h/6h: Pages 7h: Pages 8h: 2.4.1.2 Disturbance records Before uploading any disturbance record, a service request must be send to select the record number to be uploaded. The answer following this request contain the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Numbers of samples (pre and post time) Phase CT ratio Earth CT ratio Internal phase and earth ratios Number of the last disturbance mapping page Number of samples in this last disturbance mapping page Product information, remote signalling, measurements General remote parameters Setting group 1 remote parameters Setting group 2 remote parameters Remote controls Reserved pages Quick reading byte Time synchronisation
The mapping pages used for this service request are from 38h to 3Ch. Pages 9h to 21h : Contain the disturbance data (25 pages) A disturbance mapping page contains 250 words: 0900 09FAh : 0A00 0AFAh : 0B00 0BFAh : ...... 2100 21FAh : 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words
The disturbance data pages contain the sample of a single channel from a record. Page 22h : contains the index of the disturbance Page 38h 3Ch : Selection of the disturbance record and channel Page 3Dh : A dedicated request allows to know the number of disturbance records stored in SRAM.
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 2.4.1.3 Event records To upload the event records two requests are allowed:
Page 35h: Request to upload an event record without acknowledge of this event. Used addresses: 3500h : EVENT 1 ..... 354Ah : EVENT 75 Page 36h: Request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored event record. Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or manual acknowledgement The mode depends of the state of bit 12 of telecommand word (address 400 h). If this bit is set, then the acknowledgement is manual else the acknowledgement is automatic. In automatic mode, the reading of the event acknowledges the event. In manual mode, it is necessary to write a specific command to acknowledge the oldest event (set the bit 13 of control word 400 h ) 2.4.1.4 Fault records Page 37h: Page dedicated to upload fault record Used addresses: 3700h : FAULT 1 3701h : FAULT 2 ..... 3704h : FAULT 5 Page 3Eh: Request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored fault record. Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or manual acknowledgement The mode depends of the state of bit 12 of telecommand word (address 400 h). If this bit is set, then the acknowledgement is manual else the acknowledgement is automatic. In automatic mode, the reading of the fault acknowledges automatically the event. In manual mode, it is necessary to write a specific command to acknowledge the oldest fault. (set the bit 14 of control word 400 h ) 2.4.1.5 Characteristics Page 0h can only be read through communication. Pages 1h, 2h, 3h and 4h can be read and write. Page 7h can be access in quick reading only. Page 8h can be write. They are describe more precisely in the following chapters.
Page 0h : Product information, remote signalling, measurements Read access only
Address 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 to 000B 000C 000D 000E 000F 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 001A 001B 001C 001D 001E
Group Product Information
Description Relay description characters 1 and 2 Relay description characters 3 and 4 Relay description characters 5 and 6 Unit reference characters 1 and 2 Unit reference characters 3 and 4 Software version Front communication Internal phase ratio Internal earth ratio Reserved
Values range 32-127 32-127 32-127 32-127 32-127 10-xx 0-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Step -
Unit
Format F10 F10 F10 F10 F10 F21 F41 F1 F1
Fault Value
P1 24 AL ST
Active Group Electromechani- Flag status cal Password active Relay status Remote signalling Logical inputs Logical data Internal Logic Output contacts Output information: I> Output information: I>> Output information: I>>> Output information: IE> Output information: IE>> Output information: IE>>> I> memorisation I>> memorisation I>>> memorisation tI> memorisation tI>> memorisation
1-2 0 to FF
1 2
n
F1 F52 F24 F45 F12 F20 F22 F13 F17 F17 F17 F16 F16 F16 F17 F17 F17 F17 F17
0 to 31 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to 511 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF
1 2n 2n 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Address 001F 0020 0021 0022 0023 Group Description tI>>> memorisation Thermal state information Output information: I< Output information: I2> Output information: broken conductor / CB failure / CB alarm tI< memorisation Memorised flag for non acknowledge alarms Number of disturbance records available 0 to 5 1 1 Values range 0 to FFFF 0 to 3 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 1 1 1 1 1 Step -

Unit Format F17 F37 F17 F16 F38 Fault Value
0024 0025 0026 0027 0028 0029 002A to 002F 0030 0032 0034 0036 0038-0039 003A 003B 003C 003E 0040 0042 0044 0046
0 to FFFF
F17 F36 F31 F1 F43 F44
Tripping output (RL1) status 0 to 1 CB supervision flag Non acknowledge alarm memorised flag 2 Reserved Remote Phase A current RMS value measurements Phase B current RMS value Phase C current RMS value Earth current RMS value Reserved Thermal state Frequency Phase A current peak RMS value Phase B current peak RMS value Phase C current peak RMS value Phase A current rolling RMS value Phase B current rolling RMS value Phase C current rolling RMS value 4500 to 6500 0 to 600 000 0 to 600 000 0 to 600 000 0 to 600 000 0 to 600 000 0 to 600 000 0 to 600 000 0 to 600 000 0 to 600 000 0 to 120 000
1 1 1 1
A/100 A/100 A/100 A/100
F18 F18 F18 F18
% 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1/100 Hz A/100 A/100 A/100 A/100 A/100 A/100
F1 F1 F18 F18 F18 F18 F18. F18

Address 0048 004A 004C Group Description Io harmonique I2 Positive phase sequence current value (fundamental) Ratio I2/I1 Trip number Fourier Module Module IA Module IB Module IC Module IE Fourier Argument Argument IA Argument IB Argument IC Argument IE Module I2 Module I1 Recloser statistics Cycle total number Cycle 1 number Cycle 2 number Cycle 3 number Cycle 4 number Definitive tripping number Closing order number Reserved. Values range 0 to 600 000 1 1 1

Step Unit A/100 A/100 A/100 Format F18 F18 F18 Fault Value
004E 004F 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 005A 005B 005C 005D 005E 005F 0060 0061 to 006F
1 0 to 65535 1
% -
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 2.4.3 Page 1h, MiCOM P124 : general remote parameters Read and write access
Address 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 010A 010B 010C 010D 010E to 010F 0110 0111 0112 0114 0116 0118 0119 to 011E 011F 0120 0121 0122 Ratio Group Remote parameters Description Address Reserved Password characters 1 and 2 Password characters 3 and 4 Frequency Phase A label Phase B label Phase C label Earth label Fault display User reference (characters 1 and 2) User reference (characters 3 and 4) Fault number to display Inputs operation Reserved CB monitoring Operation number measurements CB Operating time Switched square Amps phase A sum Switched square Amps phase B sum Switched square Amps phase C sum CB Closing time Reserved Latch relay Primary phase CT value Reserved Primary earth CT value 1 to 9999 1 0-31 1 to 9999* 1 1 1 32 -127 32 -127 50-60 L1-A-R L2-B-S L3-C-T N-G-E 1-4 32-127 32-127 1-5 0-31 1 1 10 Hz VTA VTA VTA VTA 1 1 1 1 1 F1 Values range 1 to 255 1 Step -
Unit
Format F1 1
Fault Value
F10 AA F10 50 F25 F25 F25 F25 F26 F10 F10 F31 F12 A B C N 1 AL ST 5 0 AA
F1
1/100 s F1 An An An F18 F18 F18
1/100 s F1
F14 F1
0 1000
F1
1000

Address 0123 to 012F Group Description Reserved. Values range

Step Unit Format Fault Value
0130
Communication
Speed
0 to 7
F4
6= 19200 bds 0= without 1 = 8 bits 0=1 stop bit 1=COM available 0=private
0131 0132 0133 0134 0135 0136 to 013F 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 0145 to 014F 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 0155 0156 0157 0158 to 015A 015B 015C 015E 015F 0160 0161 0162 0163 0164 Logic input allocation Logic input allocation Configuration
Parity Data bits Stop bit COM available Format datation Reserved Setting group Alarm self-reset enable Active group change Battery alarm and RAM alarm displayed RL1 fail-safe operation Reserved LEDs allocation Led 5 Led 6 Led 7 Led 8 Led PF 5 Led PF 6 Led PF 7 Led PF 8 Reserved Logic input 1 next Logic input 2 next Logic input 3 next Logic input 4 next Logic input 1 Logic input 2 Logic input 3 Logic input 4 Logic input 5
0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0-1
1 1 1 1 1
F5 F28 F29 F30 F54
1 to 2 0-1 0-1 0-1
1 1 1 1
F1 F55 F1 F1
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
F19 F19 F19 F19 F19' F19' F19' F19'
4 16 32 64 0 0 0 0
VTA VTA VTA VTA VTA VTA VTA VTA VTA
F15' F15' F15' F15' F15 F15 F15 F15 F15 0 0 0 0 0

Address 0165 0166 0167 0168 0169 016A 016B 016C 016D 016E 016F 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 017A 017B 017C 017D 017E 017F 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 0185 0186 0187 0188 0189 Automation Group Output relay allocation Description Broken conductor detection CB failure I< I2> Thermal overload alarm Thermal overload trip CB close tAUX1 tAUX2 CB alarms Trip circuit Active group Trip tI> tI>> tI>>> tIE > tIE >> tIE >>> I> I>> I>>> IE > IE >> IE >>> Recloser running Recloser final trip Trip Relay latching Blocking logic 1 Blocking logic 2 Broken conductor detection tBC Cold load start Cold load start thresholds Cold load start % Cold load start delay Values range 0-31 0 - 31 0 - 31 0 - 31 0 - 31 0-31 0-31 0-31 0-31 0-31 0-31 0-31 0 - 31 0 - 31 0 - 31 0 - 31 0 - 31 0 - 31 0 - 31 0 - 31 0 - 31 0 - 31 0 - 31 0 - 31 0 - 31 0 - 31 0 - 31 0 to 63 0 to 63 0 to 63 0 to 63 0-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Step %

Unit Format F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F6 F8 F8' F8' F24 F1 F24 F33 F1 F1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 50 10 Fault Value
0 to 14400 1 0-1 0 to 255 20 to 500 1 1 1
1 to 36000 1
1/10 s

Address 018A 018B 018C 018D 018E 018F 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 019A 019B 019C 019D 019E 019F 01A0 01A1 01A2 01A3 01A4 01A5 01A6 01A7 to 1AF Disturbance Group Description CB failure tBF Selective scheme logic 1 tSEL1 Selective scheme logic 2 tSEL2 Pre-time Post-time Disturbance starting condition CB monitoring Operating time Operating time threshold Operation number Operation number threshold CB switched Amps sum CB switched Amps sum threshold Amps or square Amps Closing time threshold Auxiliary timer 1 Auxiliary timer 2 Peak value I2/I1 threshold Tripping time Closing time Closing time threshold validation Trip circuit supervision validation t SUP* I<thershold for CB fail function Instantaneous I>blocking if CB fail Instantaneous le>blocking if CB fail Reserved. 1-2 5 to 100 Values range 0-1 0 to 1000 0 to 15 1 1 1

Step Unit Format F24 1/100 s F1 F40 1/100 s F1 F40 0 10 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 5 0 0 0 Fault Value
0 to 15000 1 0 to 15 0 to 15000 1 to 30 1 to 30 0-1 0-1 5 to 100 0-1 0 - 50000 0-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 0 to 4000 1 5
1/100 s F1 F1 F1 F32 F24
1/100 s F1 F24 F1 F24
10 E 6 A n F3 F1' 1/100 s F8' 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 mn % F42 F1 1 0 0 0 5 20 10 10 0 0 10 2 0 0
0 to 20000 1 0 to 20000 1 5 to 60 20 to 100 10 to 500 10 to 500 0-1 0-1 10 to 1000 2 to 100 0-1 0-1 VTA 1 5 5 1 1 5 1 1 1
1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 F24 F24 1/100 s F1 1/100 F1 F24 F24
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 2.4.4 Page 2h : setting Group 1 Access in reading and in writing
Address 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 020A to 020F 0210 0211 0212 0213 to 021F 0220 0221 0222 0223 to 022F 0230 0231 Group Setting group 1 I> I> threshold I> time delay type I> IDMT Curve Type I> TMS value I> K value (RI curve) tI> value I> Reset type I> RTMS value I> tRESET value Reserved I>> I>> value tI>> value Reserved I>>> I>>> value tI>>> value Reserved IE> IE > value sensitive version IE > value normal version IE > value very sensitive version 0232 0233 0234 IE > time delay type IE > IDMT curve type IE > TMS value 0-1 1 0-1 50 to 4000 0 to 18000 1 5 1 0-1 50 to 4000 0 to 18000 1 5 1 Description Values range 0-1 10 to 400 0 to 2 0 to 10 25 to 1500 100 to 10000 0 to 18000 01 1 1 1 1 25 5 1 1 Step -
Unit
Format F24 F1 F27 F3 0
Fault Value
In/100 -
10 0 1 25 100 4 0 25 4 0
1/1000 F1 1/1000 F1 1/100 s F1 F27 1/1000 F1 1/100 s F1
25 to 3200 25 4 to 10000 1
F24 F1
0 50 1 0
In/100
1/100 s F1
F24 F1
0 50 1 0
In/100
1/100 s F1
F24
0 10 10 2 0 1 25
10 to 1000 5 10 to 400 2 to 1000 0 to 3 0 to 10 25 to 1500 1 1 1 1 25
1/1000 I0n F1 1/100 I0n
F1
1/1000 I0n F1
F27 F3
1/1000 F1

Address 0235 0236 0237 0238 0239 023A 023B to 023F 0240 0241 0242 0243 to 024F 0250 0251 0252 0253 0254 0255 0256 0257 0258 0259 025A 025B 025C 025D 025E 025F 0260 Group Description IE > K value (RI curve) TiE > value IE > reset type IE > RTMS value IE > Treset value Laborelec curve Reserved IE >> IE >> value t IE >> value Reserved IE >>> IE >>> value tIE >>>value Ith> Ith> value Ith> k value Ith> trip threshold Ith> alarm Ith> alarm threshold Thermal overload time constant I< I< threshold I2> I2> threshold I2> time delay type I2> IDMT type 2> TMS value 0-1 10 to 8000 0 to 18000 01 10 to 320 100 to 150 50 to 200 01 50 to 200 1 to 200 0-1 0 to 100 0-1 10 to 4000 0 to 2 0 to 9 25 to 1500 1 5 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 0-1 10 to 8000 0 to 18000 1 5 1 Values range 100 to 10000 0 to 18000 01 25 to 3200 4 to 10000 0 to 2 5 1 1 25 1 1

Step Unit Format Fault Value 100 4 0 25 4 0 0 F24 0 10 1 0 F24 0 10 1 0 8 105 100 0 90 1 0 20 0 10 0 1 25
1/1000 F1 1/100 s F1 F27 1/1000 F1 1/100 s F1 F3
1/1000 F1 I0n 1/100 s F1
1/1000 F1 I0n 1/100 s F1 F24 1/100 1/100 % F1 F1 F1 F24 % mn % In In/100 F1 F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 F27 F3
1/1000 F1

Address 0261 0262 0263 0264 0265 0266 to 026E 026F 0270 0271 0272-0273 0274 0275-0276 0277 0278 0279-027A 027B027C 027D-027 027F-0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 0285 0286 0287 0288 0289 028A Group Description I2> K value (RI) tI2> value I2> Reset type I2> RTMS value I2> tRESET value Reserved tI< value Recloser valid CB position active Supervision window External blocking input Reserved Dead time 1 Dead time 2 Dead time 3 Dead time 4 Reclaim time Inhibit time Recloser cycles for phase faults Recloser cycles for earth faults t I> cycles configuration t I>> cycles configuration t Ie> cycles configuration t Ie>>> cycles configuration t Aux1 cycles configuration t Aux2 cycles configuration 0 to 30000 0 to 30000 0 to 60000 0 to 60000 2 to 60000 2 to 60000 0 to 4 0 to 4 0 to 2222 0 to 2222 0 to 2222 0 to 2222 0 to 2222 0 to 2222 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 to 18000 1 0-1 0-1 1 to 60000 0-1 1 1 1 1 Values range 100 to 10000 0 to 15000 0-1 25 to 3200 4 to 10000 5 1 1 25 1 Step

Unit Format Fault Value 100 4 0 25 4
1/1000 F1 1/100 s F1 F27 1/1000 F1 1/100 s F1
1/100 s F1 F24 F1 1/100 s F18 F24 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F18 1/100 s F18 1/100 s F18 1/100 s F18 F1 F1 F49 F49 F49 F49 F49 F49 F49 F49
0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 0 0 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
t I>>> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 t Ie>> cycles configuration 0 to 2222
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 22/98 2.4.5 Page 3h : setting Group 2 Access in reading and in writing
Address 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 030A to 030F 0310 0311 0312 0313 to 031F 0320 0321 0322 0323 to 032F 0330 0331 Group Setting group 2 I> I> threshold I> time delay type I> IDMT Curve Type I> TMS value I> K value (RI curve) Ti> value I> Reset type I> RTMS value I> Treset value Reserved I>> I>> value Ti>> value Reserved I>>> I>>> value Ti>>> value Reserved IE > IE > value sensitive version IE > value normal version IE > value very sensitive version 0332 0333 0334 IE > time delay type IE > IDMT curve type IE > TMS value 0-1 1 0-1 50 to 4000 0 to 15000 1 5 1 0-1 50 to 4000 0 to 15000 1 5 1 Description Values range 0-1 10 to 2500 0 to 2 0 to 10 25 to 1500 100 to 10000 0 to 15000 01 0 to 15000 4 to 10000 1 1 1 1 25 5 1 1 25 1
Step -
Unit
Format F24 F1 F27 F3 0
Fault Value
In/100 -
10 0 1 25 100 4 0 25 4 0
1/1000 F1 1/1000 F1 1/100 s F1 F27 1/1000 F1 1/1000 F1
In/100
F24 F1
0 50 1 0
1/100 s F1
In/100
F24 F1
0 50 1 0
1/100 s F1
F24
0 10 10 2 0 1 25
10 to 1000 5 10 to 400 2 to 1000 0 to 3 0 to 10 25 to 1500 1 1 1 1 25
1/1000 I0n F1 1/100 I0n
F1
1/1000 I0n F1
F27 F3
1/1000 F1

Address 0335 0336 0337 0338 0339 033A 033B to 033F 0340 0341 0342 0343 to 034F 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 035A 035B 035C 035D 035E 035F 0360 Group Description IE> K value (RI) TiE > value IE > reset type IE > RTMS value IE > Treset value Laborelec curve Reserved IE >> IE >> value tIE >> value Reserved IE >>> IE >>> value t E >>>value Ith> Ith> value Ith> k value Ith> trip threshold Ith> alarm Ith> alarm threshold Thermal overload time constant I< I< threshold I2> I2> threshold I2> time delay type I2> IDMT type I2> TMS value 0-1 10 to 8000 0 to 18000 0-1 10 to 320 100 to 150 50 to 200 01 50 to 200 1 to 200 0-1 0 to 100 0-1 10 to 4000 0 to 2 0 to 9 25 to 1500 1 5 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 0-1 10 to 8000 0 to 18000 1 5 1 Values range 100 to 10000 0 to 18000 01 25 to 3200 4 to 10000 0 to 2 5 1 1 25 1 1 Step

Unit Format Fault Value 100 4 0 25 4 0 0 F24 0 10 1 0 F24 0 10 1 0 8 105 100
1/1000 F1 1/100 s F1 F27 1/1000 F1 25 1/100 s F1 F3
1/1000 F1 I0n 1/100 s F1
1/1000 F1 I0n 1/100 s F1 F24 1/100 1/100 % F24 % mn % In In/100 F1 F1 F1 0 F1 F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 F27 F3
90 1 0 20 0 20 0 1 25
1/1000 F1

Address 0361 0362 0363 0364 0365 0366 to 036E 036F 0370 0371 0372-0373 0374 0375-0376 0377 0378 0379-037A 037B037C 037D-037E 037F-0380 0381 0382 0383 0384 0385 0386 0387 0388 0389 038A Group Description I2> K value (RI) tI2> value I2> Reset type I2> RTMS value I2> tRESET value Reserved tI< value Recloser valid CB position active Supervision window External blocking input Reserved Dead time 1 Dead time 2 Dead time 3 Dead time 4 Reclaim time Inhibit time Recloser cycles for phase faults Recloser cycles for earth faults t I> cycles configuration t I>> cycles configuration t Ie> cycles configuration t Ie>>> cycles configuration t Aux2 cycles configuration 0 to 30000 0 to 3000 0 to 60000 0 to 60000 2 to 60000 2 to 60000 0 to 4 0 to 4 0 to 2222 0 to 2222 0 to 2222 0 to 2222 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 to 18000 1 0-1 0-1 1 to 60000 0-1 1 1 1 1 Values range 100 to 10000 0 to 15000 01 25 to 3200 4 to 10000 5 1 1 25 1

Step Unit Format Fault Value 100 4 0 25 4
1/1000 F1 1/100 s F1 F27 1/1000 F1 1/100 s F1
1/100 s F1 F24 F1 1/100 s F18 F24 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F18 1/100 s F18 1/100 s F18 1/100 s F18 F1 F1 F49 F49 F49 F49 F49 F49 F49 F49
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 0 0 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
t I>>> cycles configuration 0 to 2222 t Ie>> cycles configuration 0 to 2222
t Aux1 cycles configuration 0 to 2222 0 to 2222
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 2.4.6 Page 4h : remote controls Access in writing
Address 0400 0401 0402 0403 Group Description Values range 0 to 31 1 Step -
Unit
Format F9 0
Fault Value
Remote control Remote control word 1 Reserved Remote control word 2 (single output command) Remote control word 3
0 to 127 0 to 1
1 1
F39 F46
0 0
2.4.7
Pages 5h/6h These pages are reserved
2.4.8
Page 7h Access in quick reading only (MODBUS 07 function)
Address 0700
Group
Description
Values range 1
Step -
Unit
Format F23 0
Fault Value
Quick reading Relay status description byte
2.4.9
Page 8h : time synchronisation Access in writing for n words (function 16). The time synchronisation format is based on 8 bits (4 words). Timer @page 8 8 8 8 8 8 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 - 12 1 31 0 - 23 0 59 0 59999 Nb bits Values range year month day hour minute ms Unit
Year pF+pf Month Day Hour Minute Millisecond pF+pf
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 26/98 2.4.10 Mapping access characteristics
Description of accessible addresses in reading of words (function 03 and 04). PAGE 00h 0000h to 0060h PAGE 03h 0300h to 037Fh PAGE 01h 0100h to 01AFh PAGE 05h 0500h to 052Ah PAGE 02h 0200h to 027F
Definition of accessible addresses in writing of 1 word (function 06). PAGE 01h 0100h to 01AFh PAGE 04h 0400h to 0402h PAGE 02h 0200h to 027Fh PAGE 05h 0500h to 052Ah PAGE 03h 0300h to 037Fh
Definition of accessible addresses in writing of n words (function 16). PAGE 01h 0100h to 01AFh PAGE 05h 0500h to 052Ah PAGE 02h 0200h to 027Fh PAGE 08h 0800h to 0803h PAGE 03h 0300h to 037Fh
Definition of accessible addresses in reading of bits (function 01 and 02). Warning:
The bits number must not be higher than 16. Addresses are given in bit addresses. PAGE 00h 0100h to 0250h PAGE 01h 1500h to 1830h
Definition of accessible addresses in writing of 1 bit (function 05). Warning: The bits number must not be higher than 16. PAGE 04h 4000h to 400Bh
Definition of accessible addresses in writing of n bits (function 15). Warning : The bits number must not be higher than 16. PAGE 01h 1500h to 1830h PAGE 04h 4000h to 400Bh.
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 2.4.11 Pages 9h to 21h : disturbance record data (25 pages). Access in words writing (function 03) Each disturbance mapping page contain 250 words. Address 0900h to 09FAh 0A00h to 0AFAh 0B00h to 0BFAh 0C00h to 0CFAh 0D00h to 0DFAh 0E00h to 0DFAh 0F00h to 0FFAh 1000h to 10FAh 1100h to 11FAh 1200h to 12FAh 1300h to 13FAh 1400h to 14FAh 1500h to 15FAh 1600h to 16FAh 1700h to 17FAh 1800h to 18FAh 1900h to 19FAh 1A00h to 1AFAh 1B00h to 1BFAh 1C00h to 1CFAh 1D00h to 1DFAh 1E00h to 1EFAh 1F00h to 1FFAh 2000h to 20FAh 2100h to 21FAh NB:
Contents 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words
The disturbance data pages contain values of one channel from one given disturbance record.
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 28/98 2.4.11.1 Meaning of each value channel IA, IB, IC and IE channels:
The value is an signed 16 bits word equivalent to the ADC value Calculation formula for phase current values Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. word 10, 11, 12 or 13) * phase primary CT ratio/phase internal CT ratio (mapping address 0007) *2 Calculation formula for earth current values The formula depends of nominal earth current : 0.1 to 40 Ion range Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) * earth primary CT ratio/ earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008=800) *2 0.01 to 8 Ion range Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) * earth primary CT ratio/ earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008=3277) *2 0.002 to 1 Ion range Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) * earth primary CT ratio/ earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008=32700) *2 Frequency channel: Time between two samples in microseconds Logic channels: Logic channel Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 to bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Contents Trip relay (RL1) Output relay 2 (RL2) Output relay 3 (RL3) Output relay 4 (RL4) Watchdog relay (RL0) Output relay 5 (RL5) Output relay 6 (RL6) Reserved Logic input 1 (EL1) Logic input 2 (EL2) Logic input 3 (EL3) Logic input 4 (EL4) Logic input 5 (EL5) Reserved.
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 2.4.12 Page 22h : disturbance record index frame Access in word reading (function 03) Address 2200h Disturbance record index frame Word n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6
Contents Disturbance data index frame
Contents Disturbance record number Disturbance record finish date (second) Disturbance record finish date (second) Disturbance record finish date (millisecond) Disturbance record finish date (millisecond) Disturbance record starting condition : 1 : tripping (RL1) 2 : instantaneous 3 : remote command 4 : logic input
n 7
Frequency at the post-time beginning
2.4.13 Page 35h (addresses 3500h to 354Ah) : event record data (9 words) Word n 1: Word n 2: Word n 3: Word n 4: Words n 5 & 6: Words n 7 & 8: Word n 9: Event meaning MODBUS associated value MODBUS address Reserved Event date (second) number of seconds since 01/01/94 Event date (millisecond) Acknowledge 0=event non acknowledged 1= event acknowledged)
Meaning of the event No event Remote closing Remote tripping Disturbance recording start Trip output delatch Setting change Remote thermal reset Maintenance Mode Control relay in maintenance mode I> I>> I>>> IE > IE >> IE >>> Thermal overload alarm Thermal overload threshold tI> tI>> tI>>> TIE > TIE >> tIE >>> tI< Broken conductor t Aux 1 t Aux 2 F9 F9 F9 F9 Address F9 F9 F39 F17 F17 F17 F16 F16 F16 F37 F37 F17 F17 F17 F16 F16 F16 F16 F38 F38 F38 0400h 013h 014h 015h 016h 017h 018h 019h 020h 020h 014h 015h 016h 017h 018h 019h 021h 023h 023h 023h 013h 013h 013h Type MODBUS address
Code 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Code 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 CB failure Selective scheme logic 1 Selective scheme logic 2 Blocking logic 1 Blocking logic 2 Setting group change 52a 52b Acknowledgement of the output relay latched, by logic input External CB failure Cold load start Change of input logic state Thermal overload trip tI> trip tI>> trip tI>>> trip tIE > trip tIE >> trip tIE >>> trip tI< trip Broken conductor trip tAUX 1 trip tAUX 2 trip Output relays command Front panel single alarm acknowledge Front panel all alarms acknowledge Remote single alarm acknowledge Remote all alarms acknowledge Major material alarm Minor material alarm I2> tI2> Working time Operation numbers Sum of switched square amps Trip circuit supervision Closing time Meaning of the event Type F20 F20 F20 F20 F20 F20 F20 F20 F20 F20 F20 F12 F37 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F39 F45 F45 F16 F16 F43 F43 F43 F43 F43

MODBUS address 023h 011h 011h 011h 011h 011h 011h 011h 011h 011h 011h 010h 013h 013h 013h 013h 013h 013h 013h 013h 013h 013h 013h 013h
00Fh 00Fh 022h 022h 028h 028h 028h 028h 028h

Code 64 65 66 67 Meaning of the event Reclose successful Recloser locked Recloser settings error I2> trip

Type F43 F43 F43 F13 MODBUS address 028h 028h 028h 013h
NOTA:
The double arrow means the event is generated on event occurrence () and on event disappearance ().
On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to 1 . On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to 0 . 2.4.14 Page 36h Most older event data Access in word reading (function 03) Address 3600h 2.4.15 Page 37h : fault record value data Access in word reading (function 03) Address 3700h 3701h 3702h 3703h 3704h Contents Fault value record n1 Fault value record n2 Fault value record n3 Fault value record n4 Fault value record n5 Contents Most older event data
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 Word n 1 : Words n 2 & 3 : Words n 4 & 5 : Word n 6 : Fault number
Fault date (second) number of seconds since 01/01/94 Fault date (millisecond) Fault date (season) 0= winter 1= summer 2= undefined Active setting group during the fault (1 or 2) Fault origin 0= none 1= phase A 2= phase B 3= phase C 4= phases A-B 5= phases A-C 6= phases B-C 7= phases A-B-C 8= earth Fault recording starting origin
Word n 7 : Word n 8 :
Word n 9:
Fault nature code meaning Code 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 Null event Remote trip Thermal overload trip tI> trip tI>> trip tI>>> trip tlE> trip tlE> trip tlE>> trip tI< trip Broken conductor trip t Aux 1 trip T Aux 2 trip tI2> trip Fault origin
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 34/98 Word n 10: Word n 11: Word n 12: Word n 13: Word n 14: Word n 15: Fault value current (nominal value) Phase A current value (nominal value) Phase B current value (nominal value) Phase C current value (nominal value) Earth current value (nominal value) Acknowledge of fault
0 : fault non-acknowledged 1 : fault acknowledged
2.4.15.1 Calculation formula for phase current values Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. word 10, 11, 12 or 13) * phase primary CT ratio/ phase internal CT ratio (mapping address 0007) 2.4.15.2 Calculation formula for earth current values The formula depends of nominal earth current : 0.1 to 40 Ion range Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) * earth primary CT ratio/ earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008=800) 0.01 to 8 Ion range Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) * earth primary CT ratio/ earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008=3277) 0.002 to 1 Ion range Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) * earth primary CT ratio/ earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008=32700) 2.4.16 Page 3Eh : most older Fault record value data Access in word reading (function 03) Address 3E00h Contents Most older Fault record
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 2.4.17 Pages 38h to 3Ch
Selection of the disturbance record and channel (11 words are uploaded for each address reading) Access in word reading (function 03) Address 3800h 3801h 3802h 3803h 3804h 3805h 3900h 3901h 3902h 3903h 3904h 3905h 3A00h 3A01h 3A02h 3A03h 3A04h 3A05h 3B00h 3B01h 3B02h 3B03h 3B04h 3B05h 3C00h 3C01h 3C02h 3C03h 3C04h 3C05h 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 Disturbance record number IA IB IC IE Frequency Logic input and outputs IA IB IC IE Frequency Logic input and outputs IA IB IC IE Frequency Logic input and outputs IA IB IC IE Frequency Logic input and outputs IA IB IC IE Frequency Logic input and outputs Format
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 36/98 Word n 1 : Word n 2 : Word n 3 : Word n 4 : Word n 5 : Word n 6 : Word n 7 : Word n 8 : Word n 9 : Word n 10 : Word n 11 :
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 Number of samples included in the mapping Sample number in pre-time Sample number in post-time Phase primary CT ratio Phase secondary CT ratio Earth primary CT ratio Earth secondary CT ratio Phase internal CT ratio Earth internal CT ratio Mapping last page number Number of words in the mapping last page
2.4.17.1 Calculation formula for phase current values Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. adress 3800h, 3801h or 3802h) * phase primary CT ratio * (1 / internal phase ratio) * 2 2.4.17.2 Calculation formula for earth current values Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. adress 3803h) * earth primary CT ratio * (1 / internal earth ratio) * 2 2.4.18 Pages 3Dh : number of disturbance records available Access in word reading (function 03) Address 3D00h Word n 1 : Word n 2: Words n 3 & 4 : Words n 5 & 6 : Word n 7 : Contents Number of disturbance records available Number of disturbance records available Oldest disturbance record number (n) Oldest disturbance record date (second) Oldest disturbance record date (millisecond) Disturbance record starting origin 1= trip relay (RL1) 2= instantaneous threshold 3= remote command 4= logic input Acknowledge Disturbance record previous number (n+1) Previous disturbance record date (second) Previous disturbance record date (millisecond)
Word n 8 : Word n 9 : Words n 10 & 11: Words n 12 & 13:
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 Word n 14 : Disturbance record starting origin 1= trip relay (RL1) 2= instantaneous threshold 3= remote command 4= logic input Acknowledge Disturbance record previous number (n+2)
Words n 17 & 18: Previous disturbance record date (second) Words n 19 & 20: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond) Word n 21 : Disturbance record starting origin 1= trip relay (RL1) 2= instantaneous threshold 3= remote command 4= logic input Acknowledge Disturbance record previous number (n+3)
Words n 24 & 25: Previous disturbance record date (second) Words n 26 & 27: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond) Word n 28 : Disturbance record starting origin 1= trip relay (RL1) 2= instantaneous threshold 3= remote command 4= logic input Acknowledge Disturbance record previous number (n+4)
Words n 31 & 32: Previous disturbance record date (second) Words n 33 & 34: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond) Word n 35 : Disturbance record starting origin 1= trip relay (RL1) 2= instantaneous threshold 3= remote command 4= logic input Acknowledge
Word n 36 :
2.4.19 Description of the mapping format, MiCOM P124 Dual-powered CODE F1 F2 F3 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer numerical data : 1 - 65535 Signed integer numerical data : -32768 - 32767 Unsigned integer curves type 0 : STI (IEC) 1 : SI (IEC) 2 : VI (IEC) 3 : EI (IEC) 4 : LTI (IEC) 5: STI (C02) 6: MI (ANSI) 7 : LTI (CO8) 8 : VI (ANSI) 9 : EI (ANSI) 10 : RC Rectifier curve Unsigned integer Laborelec curve type 0 : curve 1 1 : curve 2 2 : curve 3 Unsigned integer : MODBUS speed 0 : 300 1 : 600 2 : 1200 3 : 2400 4 : 4800 5 : 9600 6 : 19200 7 : 38400 Unsigned integer : parity 0 : without 1 : even 2 : odd Unsigned integer : Tripping configuration bit 0 : tI> bit 1 : tI>> bit 2 : tI>>> bit 3 : tlE> bit 4 : tlE >> bit 5 : tlE >>> bit 6 : I< bit 7 : tIth> bit 8 : Broken conductor detection bit 9 : t Aux 1 bit 10 : t Aux 2 bit 11 : tI2> bits 12 to 15 : reserved Reserved
F3'
F4
F5
F6
F7
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 CODE F8 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer : Latching configuration bit 0 : I> latching bit 1 : I>> bit 2 : I>>> bit 3 : lE> bit 4 : lE>> bit 5 : lE>>> bit 6 : I< bit 7 : tIth> bit 8 : Broken conductor detection bit 9 : t Aux 1 bit 10 : t Aux 2 bit 11 : tI2> bits 12 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : Blocking logic configuration bit 0 : I> blocking bit 1 : I>> bit 2 : I>>> bit 3 : lE> bit 4 : lE>> bit 5 : lE>>> bit 6 : reserved bit 7 : tIth> bit 8 : Broken conductor detection bit 9 : t Aux 1 bit 10 : t Aux 2 bit 11 : tI2> bits 12 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : Remote control 1 bit 0 : Tripping contact delatched bit 1 : 1st alarm acknowledge bit 2 : All alarms acknowledge bit 3 : Remote tripping bit 4 : Remote closing bit 5 : Setting group change bit 6 : Thermal state reset bit 7 : Peak and rolling value reset bit 8 : Disturbance record remote start bit 9 : Maintenance mode bit 10 : Recloser counter reset bit 11 : Recloser reset bit 12 : Local maintenance acknowledge bit 13 : Oldest event acknowledge bit 14 : Oldest fault acknowledge bit 15 : Hardware Sram alarm acknowledge 2 characters ASCII 32 127 = ASCII character1 32 127 = ASCII character 2 Unsigned integer : triggered output type 0 : stricker output 1 : trip output relay, RL1 2 : stricker + trip output relay RL1 outputs
F8'
F9
F10
F11
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 40/98 CODE F12
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer : Logic input status it 0 : logic input number 1 bit 1 : logic input number 2 bit 2 : logic input number 3 bit 3 : logic input number 4 bit 4 : logic input number 5 bits 5 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : logic outputs status bit 0 : watchdog RL0 bit 1 : logic output RL1 (tripping) bit 2 : stricker output bit 3 : V1 flag command bit 4 : V1 flag reset bits 5 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : logic outputs configuration bit 0 : selection logic output number RL2 bit 1 : selection logic output number RL3 bit 2 : selection logic output number RL4 bit 3 : selection logic output number RL5 bit 4 : selection logic output number RL6 bits 5 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : logical input allocation bit 0 : delatch allocation bit 1 : allocation 52 a bit 2 : allocation 52 b bit 3 : allocation external CB failure bit 4 : allocation external input 1 bit 5 : allocation external input 2 bit 6 : allocation logic blocking 1 bit 7 : allocation logic blocking 2 bit 8 : allocation disturbance start bit 9 : allocation cold load start bit 10 : allocation selective scheme logic 1 bit 11 allocation selective scheme logic 2 bit 12 : allocation change of setting group bit 13 : allocation recloser locked bit 14 : allocation thermal state reset bit 15 : allocation trip circuit supervision Unsigned integer : logical input allocation (next) bit 0 : start CB fail timer Unsigned integer : threshold earth information status bit 0 : reserved bit 1 : reserved bit 2 : reserved bit 3 : reserved bit 4 : reserved bit 5 : Instantaneous information IE> or IE>> or IE>>> bit 6 : Tripping information tIE> or tIE>> or tIE>>> bits 7 to 15 : reserved
F13
F14
F15
F15' F16
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 CODE F17 DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer : threshold phase information status bit 0 : reserved bit 1 : Instantaneous IA bit 2 : Instantaneous IB bit 3 : Instantaneous IC bit 4 : reserved bit 5 : Instantaneous information I> or I>> or I>>> bit 6 : Tripping information tI> or tI>> or tI>>> bits 7 to 15 : reserved Long integer Unsigned integer : LEDs allocation bit 0 : I> bit 1 : tI> bit 2 : I>> bit 3 : tI>> bit 4 : I>>> bit 5 : tI>>> bit 6 : IE> bit 7 : tIE> bit 8 : IE>> bit 9 : tIE>> bit 10 : IE>>> bit 11 : tIE>>> bit 12 : Thermal overload trip bit 13 : tI2> bit 14 : Broken conductor trip bit 15 : CB failure bit 16 : Logic input 1 bit 17 : Logic input 2 bit 18 : Logic input 3 bit 19 : Logic input 4 bit 20 : Logic input 5 bit 21 : Recloser running bit 22 : Recloser locked bit 23 : t Aux1 bit 24 : t Aux2
F18 F19
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer : logic input data status bit 0 : Selective scheme logic 1 bit 1 : Selective scheme logic 2 bit 2 : Relay delatch bit 3 : CB position (52 a) bit 4 : CB position (52 b) bit 5 : External CB failure bit 6 : External 1 bit 7 : External 2 bit 8 : Blocking logic 1 bit 9 : Blocking logic 2 bit 10 : Disturbance record start bit 11 : Cold load start bit 12 : Setting group change bit 13 : Recloser locked bit 14 : Thermal state reset bit 15 : Trip circuit supervision Unsigned integer : software version 10 : Version 1.A 11 : Version 1.B 20 : Version 2.A Unsigned integer : internal logic data bit 0 : Blocking bit 1 : reserved Unsigned integer : relay status bit 0 : Relay status (major alarm) bit 1 : Minor material alarm bit 2 : Presence of non-acknowledged event bit 3 : Synchronisation state bit 4 : Presence of non-acknowledged disturbance record bit 5 : Presence of non-acknowledged fault record bit 6 : reserved bit 7 : reserved 0 : Out of service 1 : Healthy 2 ASCII characters 1 : IA measurement display (True RMS) 2 : IB measurement display (True RMS) 3 : IC measurement display (True RMS) 4 : IN measurement display (True RMS) 0 : DMT time delay 1 : IDMT time delay 2 : RI time delay 0 : DMT time delay 1 : IDMT time delay 2 : RI time delay 3 : Laborelec curve 0 : 7 data bits 1 : 8 data bits
F21
F22
F23
F24 F25 F26
F27
F27'
F28
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 CODE F29 F30 F31 DESCRIPTION 0 : 1 stop bit 1 : 2 stop bits. 0 : Communication non-available 1 : Communication available
Unsigned integer : Number of available event records 0 : None 1 : 1 event record available 2 : 2 event records available 3 : 3 event records available 4 : 4 event records available 5 : 5 event records available Unsigned integer : 0 : Disturbance record start condition on INSTANTANEOUS 1 : Disturbance record start condition on TRIPPING Cold load start thresholds bit 0 : tI> bit 1 : tI>> bit 2 : tI>>> bit 3 : tIE> bit 4 : tIE>> bit 5 : tIE>>> bit 6 : Thermal overload trip bit 7 : tI2> bit 8 to 15 : reserved Reserved 0 : No disturbance record uploaded 1 : Disturbance record upload running Memorised flags of non acknowledged alarms : bit 0 : IE> bit 1 : tIE> bit 2 : IE>> bit 3 : tIE>> bit 4 : IE>>> bit 5 : tIE>>> bit 6 : Thermal overload alarm bit 7 : Thermal overload trip bit 8 : Broken conductor bit 9 : CB failure bit 10 : reserved bit 11 : I2> bit 12 : tI2> bit 13 : t Aux 1 bit 14 : t Aux 2 bit 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : Thermal overload information bit 0 : Thermal overload alarm bit 1 : Thermal overload trip
F32
F33
F34 F35 F36
F37
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer : bit 0 : reserved bit 1 : CB failure bit 2 : Pole A opening bit 3 : Pole B opening bit 4 : Pole C opening bit 5 : Broken conductor bit 6 : t Aux 1 bit 7 : t Aux 2 bit 8 : Broken conductor time delay bit 9 : CB failure time delay bit 10 : Cold load pick up time delay bit 11 : CB alarms or bits 0,1,2,4 of F43 Unsigned integer : output relay remote word in maintenance mode bit 0 : RL1 (trip) bit 1 : RL2 bit 2 : RL3 bit 3 : RL0 (watchdog) bit 4 : RL4 bit 5 : RL5 bit 6 : RL6 Unsigned integer : selective scheme logic configuration bit 0 : tI>> bit 1 : tI>>> bit 2 : tlE>> bit 3 : tlE>> 0 : Front and rear MODBUS communication 1 : Front MODBUS and rear Courier communication 5, 10, 15, 30 or 60 minutes bit 0 : CB operating time overreach bit 1 : CB operation number overreach bit 2 : Square Amps sum overreach bit 3 : Trip circuit self-test bit 4 : CB closing time overreach bits 5 to 10 : Reserved bit 0 : CB, operating time overreach, memorised alarm bit 1 : CB operation number overreach, memorised alarm bit 2 : Square Amps sum overreach, memorised alarm bit 3 : Trip circuit self-test, memorised alarm bit 4 : CB closing time overreach, memorised alarm bits 5 to 7 : reserved Unsigned integer : relay status bit 0 : Watchdog bit 1 : Communicatio n failure bit 2 : EEPROM data failure bit 3 : Analogue failure bit 4 : Datation failure bit 5 : EEPROM calibration failure bit 6 : SRAM failure bit 7 : reserved
F39
F40
F41 F42 F43
F44
F45
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 CODE F46 F49 DESCRIPTION bit 0 : Io harmonic calculation bit 1 : trip number reset
bit 0 : cycle 1 configuration (trip followed by reclosing cycle) bit 1 : cycle 1 configuration (no trip in cycle 1) bit 2 to bit 3 : reserved bit 4 : cycle 2 configuration (trip followed by reclosing cycle) bit 5 : cycle 2 configuration (no trip in cycle 2) bit 6 to bit 7 : reserved bit 8 : cycle 3 configuration (trip followed by reclosing cycle) bit 9 : cycle 3 configuration (no trip in cycle 3) bit 10 to bit 11 : reserved bit 12 : cycle 4 configuration (trip followed by reclosing cycle) bit 13 : cycle 4 configuration (no trip in cycle 4) Unsigned integer : CTs and model configuration "A" : model standard, CT 1A "B" : model standard, CT 5A "C" : model sensitive, CT 1A "D" : model sensitive, CT 5A Unsigned integer : option configuration 0 : 1 electromagnetic flag 1 : 5 electromagnetic flags 2 : 5 flags + autorecloser Unsigned integer : electromechanical flags status (P124D) bit 0 : V2 flag bit 1 : V2 flag reset bit 2 : V3 flag bit 3 : V3 flag reset bit 4 : V4 flag bit 5 : V4 flag reset bit 6 : V5 flag bit 7 : V5 flag reset
F50
F51
F52
F53 F54
Unsigned integer : internal data 2 bit 0 : CB fail by external input Unsigned integer : datation format 0 : private format 1 : IEC format
F55
0 : setting group change either on edge of digital input, or on remote command, or of the relay front 1 : setting group change on level of digital input
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 46/98 2.4.20 Disturbance record additional information 2.4.20.1 MODBUS request definition used for disturbance record
To upload a disturbance record, the following requests must be done in the exact given order : 1. 2. 3. 4. (optional) : Send a request to know the number of disturbance records available in SRAM. (compulsory) : Send a request with the record number and the channel number. (compulsory) : Send one or several requests to upload the disturbance record data. It depends of the number of samples. (compulsory) : Send a request to upload the index frame.
2.4.20.2 Request to know the number of disturbance records in SRAM Slave number xx Function code 03h Word address 3Dh 00 Word number 00 24h xx CRC xx
This request may be answered an error message with the error code : EVT_NOK(OF) : NOTA : 2.4.20.3 Service requests This request must be send before uploading the disturbance record channel samples. It allows to know the record number and the channel number to upload. It allows also to know the number of samples in the channel. Slave number xx Function code 03h Word address Refer to mapping Word number 00 0Bh xx CRC xx No record available If there is less than 5 records available, the answer will contains zero in the non-used words.
This request may be answered an error message with two different error codes : CODE_DEF_RAM(02) : CODE_EVT_NOK(03) : SRAM failure no disturbance record available in SRAM
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 2.4.20.4 Disturbance record upload request Slave number xx Function code 03h Word address Refer to mapping
Word number 01 to 7Dh xx
CRC xx
This request may be answered an error message with two different error codes : CODE_DEP_DATA(04) : CODE_SERV_NOK(05) : 2.4.20.5 Index frame upload request Slave number xx Function code 03h Word address 22h 00 Word number 00 07h xx CRC xx the required disturbance data number is greater than the memorised number. the service request for disturbance record and channel number has not been send.
This request may be answered an error message with an error code : CODE_SERV_NOK(05) : the service request for disturbance record and channel number has not been send.
Two ways can be followed to retrieve an event record : Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event. Send a request to retrieve a dedicated event. 2.4.21 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event Slave number xx Function code 03h Word address 36h 00 Word number 00 09h xx CRC xx
This event request may be answered an error message with the error code : EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) : NOTA : An event is being written into the saved RAM. On event retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the event record acknowledgement : a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval. b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval.
a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval : The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0. On event retrieval, this event record is acknowledged. b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval : The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. On event retrieval, this event record is not acknowledged. To acknowledge this event, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 13 of this frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 48/98 2.4.22 Request to retrieve a dedicated event Slave number xx Function code 03h Word address Refer to mapping
Word number 00 09h xx
CRC xx
This event request may be answered an error message with the error code : EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) : NOTA : An event is being written into the saved RAM. This event retrieval does not acknowledge this event.
2.4.23 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records Two ways can be followed to retrieve a fault record : Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record. Send a request to retrieve a dedicated fault record. 2.4.23.1 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record Slave number xx NOTA : Function code 03h Word address 3Eh 00 Word number 00 0Fh xx CRC xx
On fault retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the fault record acknowledgement: a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval. b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval.
a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval : The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0. On fault retrieval, this fault record is acknowledged. b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval : The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. On fault retrieval, this fault record is not acknowledged. To acknowledge this fault, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 14 of this frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. 2.4.23.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record Slave number xx NOTA : Function code 03h Word address Refer to mapping Word number 00 0Fh xx CRC xx
This fault value retrieval does not acknowledge this fault record.
3.
K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE

The serial communications are transmitted on K-Bus, a multi-drop network proposin an instantaneous interface with IEC 870 - 5 - FT1.2 standards. The language and th communication protocol used are Courier. This concept permits especially to the generic programmes of the principal units to access to a high number of different relay types without need to change permanently the principal unit program for each relay type. The relays forms a distributed database in which the principal workstation proceeds to a selective call of the slave relays in order to know all necessary information. Courier has a concept for the functions with a selective call system which allows not a slave periphery to communicate directly with the central unit when one shall informs another about a particular event. The slave workstation has to wait that the principal workstation asks for the information. With Courier each information is given into a box with a code of the length and the database type. In knowing the database format the reception periphery can read them.
3.1
K-BUS K-Bus is a communication system developed for connecting the slave peripheries in remoting on the central unit, permitting them to execute all remote monitoring and remote control functions using the appropriated communication language. K-Bus is not able to permit a direct communication between the slave peripheries. Only a communication between the central unit and the slave peripheries can be established. The principal characteristics of the K-Bus are his profitability, his high security level, his installation facility and his user friendliness.
3.1.1
K-Bus transmission layer The communication port is supported on the reception levels and the voltage transmission RS485 with galvanic isolation assured by a transformer. A selective call protocol is used. No relay unit is allowed to transmit before having received a validation message without any error detection. The transmission is synchronous on a pair of isolated waves. The data are coded FM0 with a clock signal for eliminate all CC-component, allows the signal to cross the transformers. With the exception of the central units, each network node is passive. No defective unit from the system can interfere with the communications established with the other units. The message format is HDLC. The data transmission speed is 64 kbits/s.
3.1.2
K-Bus connection The connection on the K-Bus port is realised by screwed terminals of 4 mm of MIDOS standards or by FASTON-connectors. A cabled pair is sufficient to realise the connection, knowing that the polarity is not important. It is recommended to use an external screen earth linked at the end of the principal workstation only. The screen has to be fixed with a M4 screw following the wiring scheme (cf. Appendice 1 of the Technical Guide). The functioning of the K-BUS network is guaranteed for 32 units connected on 1000 meters of cables. Thanks to the data code method, the polarity of the Bus cable connection is not important. NOTE : The K-Bus network has to finish with a 150 ohms resistance on each end of the Bus. The principal workstation can be placed anywhere on the network. This command point has to be unique
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 50/98 3.1.3 Auxiliary equipment
For communication with the relay it is necessary to have at least one converter case K-Bus/IEC870-5 of the type KITZ and a computer suitable software, an interconnection cable RS232 for connecting the KITZ to the computer and a software conform to the specification of the Courier protocol. 3.2 Relay courier database The Courier database is two dimensional structure with each cell in the database being referenced by a row and column address. Both the column and the row can take a range from 0 to 255. Addresses in the database are specified as hexadecimal values, eg 0A02 is column 0A (10 decimal) row 02. Associated settings/data will be part of the same column, row zero of the column contains a text string to identify the contents of the column.
3.2.1
Data Type Ind Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Lang1 (French) Lang2 (English) * Lang3 (German) Lang4 (Spanish) AAAA P124-D * Pref Model Number Firmware Number Serial Number XXXX Hz 1 1* Setting Setting Setting Data Data Data Setting Data Setting 1/255/1 50/60/10 Setting 0/3/1
Cell reference
Min/Max/Step
Col
Row
Menu Text
00 Ver>: Indexed String 0 1 2 3
00
SYSTEM DATA
01
Language
02 ASCII Text (6 bytes) ASCII Text (4 bytes) ASCII Text (16 bytes) ASCII Text (16 bytes) ASCII Text (16 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes)
Password
ASCII Password(4 bytes)
32/127/1 32/127/1 32/127/1
03
Fnlinks: NON IMPLEMENTE
04
Description
05
Plant Reference
06
Model Number
07
Firmware Number
08
Serial Number
09
Frequency
0A
Communication Level
0B
Address
0C Unsigned Integer
A1+, A2: NON IMPLEMENTE
Plant Status Word: NON IMPLEMENTE
0D
Control Status Word: NON IMPLEMENTE
0E
Setting Group
Data
0F ASCII Text (16 characters) Binary flag (5 bits)
Load shed Stage: NON IMPLEMENTE
10
Circuit Breaker Control
11
Software Reference
Data 0: log input 1 1: log input 2 2: log input 3 3: log input 4 4: log input 5 Data
12-1F
Unused, reserved
20
Logic Input Status
Col Binary flag (7 bits) Data 0: relay 1 (trip) 1: watchdog relay 2: relay 2 3: relay 3 4: relay 4 5 : relay 5 6 : relay 6 0: reserved 1: Comm err 2: Eeprom err data 3: Ct error 4: Eeprom err calib 5: Clock error 6: Bbram error 7 to 15: reserved 0: I> 1: I>> 2: I>>> 3: I0> 4: I0>> 5: I0>>> 6: t I> 7: t I>> 8: t I>>> 9: t I0> 10: t I0>> 11: t I0>>> 12: Thermal Alarm 13: Therm. Overload 14: t I< 15: reserved Data
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type
Min/Max/Step
21
Relay Output Status
22
Alarm
Binary flag (16 bits)
23
Pseudo Logic Input Status group 1
Data
Col Binary flag (16 bits) Data 0: Broken Conductor 1: t Aux 1 2: t Aux 2 3: Breaker Fail. 4: Iinv > 5: t Iinv> 6: Open operating time 7: Trip operation Nb 8: SA 2 n 9: SW Trip Circuit 10: Close operating time 11: Successful autoreclose 12: Locked autorecloser 13: Autorecloser conf. fail 14: reserved 15: reserved 0: Unlock trip cont.* 1: Ack first alarm 2 : Ack all alarms 3 : TRIP 4 : CLOSE 5 : Setting Change 6 : Th. State Reset 7 : RMS over&max Reset 8 : Dist. Rec. Trig 9 : Maintenance Start 10 : Recloser timer Reset 11 : Recloser Reset 12 : Manual Ack mode 13 : Ack. older event 14 : Ack. older default 15 : SRAM def . ack. Setting
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step
24
Pseudo Logic Input Status group 2
01 Binary flag (15 bits)
00
USER CONTROL 0/65535/1
01
Remote control 1
Col Binary flag (10 bits) 0 : Reserved 1 : Reserved 2 : Reserved 3 : Relay : Special Tripping 4 : Watchdog Relay 5 : Relay 1 6 : Relay 2 7 : Relay 3 8 : Relay 4 9 : Relay 5 0 : Reset I0 Harmonic 1 : Unlock TRIP Relay 5 Setting 0/3/1 Setting 0/1023/1
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step
02
Remote control 2
03
Remote control 3
02 Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) ASCII Text ASCII Text Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number
00
VIEW RECORDS Setting 1/5/1
01
Record number
02
Occur date
03
Active set group
04
Phase in fault
05
Fault Id
06
Magnitude
07
Ia magnitude
08
Ib magnitude
09
Ic magnitude
0A
In magnitude
Col
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
Min/Max/Step
03 Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) (%) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number
00
MEASUREMENTS
01
IA RMS
02
IB RMS
03
IC RMS
04
I0 RMS
05
Idirect
06
IINV
07
Ratio Idir / Iinv
08
THERMAL STATE (Rst)
09
FREQUENCY
0A
Rst MAX & MOY RMS Data Data Data Data Data Data
0B
MAX RMS IA
0C
MAX RMS IB
0D
MAX RMS IC
0E
IA RMS AVERAGE
0F
IB RMS AVERAGE
10
IC RMS AVERAGE
Col Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step
11
IN fn (I0 Harmonic) (Rst)
12
Trip Number (Rst)
04
00
RECLOSER STATISTICS (Rst)
01
TOTAL CYCLE NUMBER
02
CYCLE 1 NUMBER
03
CYCLE 2 NUMBER
04
CYCLE 3 NUMBER
05
CYCLE 4 NUMBER
06
DEFINITIVE TRIP NUMBER
07
RECLOSE ORDER NUMBER
05
00
PROCESS: dans versions >
06 Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number 0.0 s
00
SW MONITORING Data Data Data Data Data Data
01
Rst SAn Ix
02
SA2 IA
03
SA2 IB
04
SA2 IC
05
SW operation nb
06
SW operation time
07
SW Closing time
Col
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Data 1000 * 1000 * 1* 0 : YES * 1 : NO 0 : YES 1 : NO * Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 1/9999/1 1/9999/1 1/2 0 (YES) / 1 (NO) 0 (YES) / 1 (NO)
Min/Max/Step
08 IEC870 Time & Date Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Indexed String Indexed String
00
TIME:
01
Date/Time
0E
00
CT RATIOS
01
Phase CT Primary
03
Neutral CT Primary
0F
00
SETTING GROUPS
01
Select setting group
02
Group 1 visible
03
Group 2 visible
Protection Group n 1 (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Indexed String 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0.1 In * 0: definite time * 1 : inverse time 2: RI curve STI (CEI) * SI (CEI) VI (CEI) EI (CEI) LTI (CEI) STI (CO2) MI (ANSI) LTI (CO8) VI (ANSI) EI (ANSI) 0.025 * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 2002=1 2002=1 Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.1/4.0/0.1 0/2/1
20
00
PHASE OVERCURRENT
01
Stage 1 Overcurrent
02
Max I>
03
Threshold I>
04
Temporisation Type
05
Curve type
Indexed String
2004=1
Setting
0/9/1
06
TMS
Courier floating point number
2004=1
Setting
0.025/1.5/0.025
Col Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Indexed String 0 : definite time 1 : inverse time 2004=1 and Setting 2005 >= 5 and 2005 <= 9 2009 = 1 2009 = 0 Setting Setting 0.01 s * 2004=0 Setting 0.1 * 2004=2 Setting
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type 0.1/10.0/0.005 0/180.0/0.01 0/1
Min/Max/Step
07
08
Tempo I>
09
Tempo reset type
0A Courier floating point number (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.01 I0n* 2102=1 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.50 In * 0.01 s * 2021=1 2021=1 0.01 s * 0.50 In * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 2011=1 2011=1 0.04 *
RTMS
0.025 *
0.025/1.5/0.025 0.04/100/0.01
0B
T RESET
0C-0F Reserved Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.5/40.0/0.05 0/180.0/0.01
10
Stage 2 Overcurrent
11
Max I>>
12
Threshold I>>
13
Tempo I>>
14-1F Reserved Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.5/40.0/0.05 0/180.0/0.01
20
Stage 3 Overcurrent
21
Max I>>>
22
Threshold I>>>
23
Tempo I>>>
21
00
EARTH FAULT Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.01/1.0/0.005
01
Stage 1 Overcurrent
02
Max I0>
03
Threshold I0>
Col Indexed String 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * 0 : definite time 1 : inverse time 2104=1 2104=2 2104=0 Setting Setting Setting 2104=1 and Setting 2105 >= 5 and 2105 <= 9 0.025 * 0.04 * 2109 = 1 2109 = 0 Setting Setting STI (CEI) * SI (CEI) VI (CEI) EI (CEI) LTI (CEI) STI (CO2) MI (ANSI) LTI (CO8) VI (ANSI) EI (ANSI) 2104=1 Setting 1/10/1 0: definite time * 1: inverse time 2: RI curve 2102=1 Setting 0/2/1
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step
04
Tempo Type
05
Curve Type
Indexed String
06 Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Indexed String
TMS
0.025/1.5/0.025 0.1/10.0/0.005 0/180.0/0.01 0/1
07
08
Tempo I0>
09
Tempo reset Type
0A Courier floating point number (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number 0
RTMS
0.025/3.2/0.025 0.04/100/0.01
0B
T RESET
0C-0F Reserved Disabled * / Enabled 0.01 I0n* 2111=1 Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.01/8.0/0.005
10
Stage 2 Overcurrent
11
Max I0>>
12
Threshold I0>>
Col Courier floating point number (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Binary (1 bit) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Binary (1 bit) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Indexed String 0 1 2 0 0 1* Disabled * / Enabled 20 %In * Disabled * / Enabled 0.1 In * 0: definite time * 1: inverse time 2: RI curve 2401 = 1 2401 = 1 2301=1 0 90 % * 100 % * Disabled * / Enabled 1.05 * 0.20 Ith* 0 Disabled * / Enabled 2201=1 2201=1 2201=1 2201=1 2205 =1 2201=1 0.01 s * 2121=1 0.01 I0n * 2121=1 Setting Setting 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 0.01 s * 2111=1 Setting 0/180.0/0.01
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step
13
Tempo I0>>
14-1F Reserved
20
Stage 3 Overcurrent
21
Max I0>>>
22
Threshold I0>>>
0.01/8.0/0.005 0/180.0/0.01
23
Tempo I0>>>
22
00
THERMAL OVERLOAD Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.01/3.2/0.01 1.0/1.50/0.01 In 50 / 200/ 1 % 0/1/1 50 / 200/ 1 % 1/ 200 / 1 mn 0/1/1 2 / 100 / 1 %In 0/1/1 0.1/40.0/0.01 In 0/2/1
01
Ith>
02
Threshold Ith>
03
K Ith>
04
TRIP
05
ALARM ?
06
ALARM
07
Thermal constant
23
00
MIN I<
01
I<
02
Threshold I<
24
00
NEGATIVE CURRENT
01
Iinv>
02
Threshold Iinv>
03
Temporisation Type
Col Indexed String 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * 0 : definite time 1 : inverse time 2403=1 2403=2 2403=0 Setting Setting Setting 2403=1 and Setting 2404 >= 5 and 2404 <= 9 2408 = 1 0.04 * 2408 = 0 Setting Setting STI (CEI) * SI (CEI) VI (CEI) EI (CEI) LTI (CEI) STI (CO2) MI (ANSI) LTI (CO8) VI (ANSI) EI (ANSI) 2401 = 1 Setting 0/9/1
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step
04
Curve type
TMS
0.025/1.5/0.025 0.1/10.0/0.005 0/180.0/0.01 0/1/1
06
K (RI)
07
Tempo Iinv>
08
Reset tempo type
09 Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number 0
RTMS
0.025 *
0.025/3.2/0.025 0.04/100/0.01
0A
T RESET
25
00
AUTORECLOSER Disabled * / Enabled Disabled * / Enabled 0.01 s * Disabled * / Enabled 0.01 s * 2501 = 1 2502 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0/1/1 0.01 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0/1/1 0.01 / 300.00 / 0.01 s
01
Autorecloser
02
State circuit breaker
03
Control window
04
External blocking
07
Temporisation cycle 1
Col Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0* 0* 0.02 s * 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 0.02 s * 2501 = 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0.01 s * 2501 = 1 Setting 0.01 s * 2501 = 1 Setting 0.01 s * 2501 = 1 Setting
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step 0.01 / 300.00 / 0.01 s 0.01 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0.01 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0.02 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0.02 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0/4/1 0/4/1 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group
08
09
0A
0B
Reclaim TIME
0C
Inhibition time
0D
Number of short circuit cycle
0E
Number of earth fault cycle
0F
Cycles tI> configuration
10
Cycles tI>> configuration
11
Cycles tI>>> configuration
12
Cycles tI0> configuration
13
Cycles tI0>> configuration
14
Cycles tI0>>> configuration
15
Cycles tAux1> configuration
16
Col
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step
Protection Group n 2 (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Indexed String 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * 0 : definite time 1 : inverse time STI (CEI) * SI (CEI) VI (CEI) EI (CEI) LTI (CEI) STI (CO2) MI (ANSI) LTI (CO8) VI (ANSI) EI (ANSI) 4004=1 0: definite time * 1: inverse time 2: RI curve 4002=1 0.1 In * 4002=1 Setting Setting 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 0.1/4.0/0.01 0/2/1
40
00
PHASE OVERCURRENT
01
Stage 1 Overcurrent
02
Max I>
03
Threshold I>
04
Tempo Type
05
Curve Type
Indexed String
Setting
0/9/1
TMS
4004=1 4004=2 4004=0
Setting Setting Setting 4004=1 and Setting 4005 >= 5 and 4005 <= 9
0.025/1.5/0.025 0.1/10.0/0.005 0/180.0/0.01 0/1
07
08
Tempo I>
09
Reset tempo type
0A
RTMS
Courier floating point number Courier floating point number
0.025 * 0.04 *
4009 = 1 4009 = 0
Setting Setting
0.025/1.5/0.025 0.04/100.0/0.01
0B
T RESET
Col
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step
0C-0F Reserved (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Indexed String 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.01 I0n* 0: definite time * 1: inverse time 2: RI curve STI (CEI) * SI (CEI) VI (CEI) EI (CEI) LTI (CEI) STI (CO2) MI (ANSI) LTI (CO8) VI (ANSI) EI (ANSI) Indexed String 4102=1 4102=1 Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.01/1.0/0.005 0/2/1 0.01 s * 0.50 In * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 4021=1 4021=1 Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.5/40.0/0.05 0/180.0/0.01 0.01 s * 4011=1 Setting 0.50 In * 4011=1 Setting 0 Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 0.5/40.0/0.05 0/180.0/0.01
10
Stage 2 Overcurrent
11
Max I>>
12
Threshold I>>
13
Tempo I>>
14-1F Reserved
20
Stage 3 Overcurrent
21
Max I>>>
22
Threshold I>>>
23
Tempo I>>>
41
00
EARTH FAULT
01
Stage 1 Overcurrent
02
Max I0>
03
Threshold I0>
04
Temporisation Type
05
Curve type
4104=1
Setting
0/9/1
Col Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Indexed String 0 : definite time 1 : inverse time 4104=1 and Setting 4105 >= 5 and 4105 <= 9 4109 = 1 4109 = 0 Setting Setting 0.01 s * 4104=0 Setting 0.1 * 4104=2 Setting 0.025 * 4104=1 Setting
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step 0.025/1.5/0.025 0.1/10.0/0.005 0/180.0/0.01 0/1
06
TMS
07
08
Tempo I0>
09
Tempo reset Type
0A Courier floating point number (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) 0 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.01 I0n * 0.01 s * 0.01 I0n* 0.01 s * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.04 *
RTMS
0.025 *
0.025/3.2/0.025 0.04/100.0/0.01
0B
T RESET
0C-0F Reserved Setting 4111=1 4111=1 Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.01/8.0/0.005 0/180.0/0.01
10
Stage 2 Overcurrent
11
Max I0>>
12
Threshold I0>>
13
Tempo I0>>
14-1F Reserved Setting 4121=1 4121=1 Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.01/8.0/0.005 0/180.0/0.01
20
Stage 3 Overcurrent
21
Max I0>>>
22
Threshold I0>>>
23
Tempo I0>>>
42
00
THERMAL OVERLOAD Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1
01
Ith>
Col Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Binary (1 bit) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Binary (1 bit) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Indexed String 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0.1 In * 0: definite time * 1: inverse time 2: RI curve STI (CEI) * SI (CEI) VI (CEI) EI (CEI) LTI (CEI) STI (CO2) MI (ANSI) LTI (CO8) VI (ANSI) EI (ANSI) 0.025 * 0.1 * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 4401 = 1 4401 = 1 20 %In * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 4301=1 1* 4201=1 90 % * 4205 =1 0 Disabled * / Enabled 4201=1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 100 % * 4201=1 Setting 1.05 * 4201=1 Setting 0.20 Ith* 4201=1 Setting 0.01/3.2/0.01
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step
02
Threshold Ith>
03
K Ith>
1.0/1.50/0.01 In 50 / 200/ 1 % 0/1/1 50 / 200/ 1 % 1/ 200 / 1 mn 0/1/1 2 / 100 / 1 %In 0/1/1 0.1/40.0/0.1 In 0/2/1
04
TRIP
05
ALARM ?
06
ALARM
07
Thermal constant
43
00
MIN I<
01
I<
02
Threshold I<
44
00
NEGATIVE CURRENT
01
Iinv>
02
Threshold Iinv>
03
Temporisation type
04
Curve Type
Indexed String
4401=1
Setting
0/9/1
05
TMS
Courier floating point number Courier floating point number
4403=1 4403=2
Setting Setting
0.025/1.5/0.025 0.1/10.0/0.005
06
K (RI)
Col Courier floating point number Courier floating point number 0 : definite time 1 : inverse time 4403=1 and Setting 4404 >= 5 and 4404 <= 9 4408=1 4408=0 Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.01 s * 4403=0 Setting 0/180.0/0.01
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step
07
Tempo Iinv>
08
Temporisation reset type
09 Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0.01 s * 0.01 s * 0.01 s * 0.02 s * 0.02 s * 0* 0* 0.01 s * 0.01 s * Disabled * / Enabled Disabled * / Enabled 0 Disabled * / Enabled 4501 = 1 4502 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 0.04 *
RTMS
0.025 *
0.025/3.2/0.025 0.04/100.0/0.01
0A
T RESET
45
00
AUTORECLOSER Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0/1/1 0.01 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0/1/1 0.01 / 300.00 / 0.01 s 0.01 / 300.00 / 0.01 s 0.01 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0.01 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0.02 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0.02 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0/4/1 0/4/1
01
Autorecloser
02
State circuit breaker
03
Control window
04
External blocking
07
08
09
0A
0B
Reclaim TIME
0C
Inhibition time
0D
Number of short circuit cycle
0E
Number of earth fault cycle
Col Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting 0x1111 * 4501 = 1 Setting
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group
0F
Cycles tI> configuration
10
Cycles tI>> configuration
11
Cycles tI>>> configuration
12
Cycles tI0> configuration
13
Cycles tI0>> configuration
14
Cycles tI0>>> configuration
15
16
60 Binary (16 bits) Binary (16 bits) Binary (16 bits) Binary (16 bits) Binary (1 bit) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Binary (8 bits) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number 0* 0* 0* 1*
00
AUTOMATISM Setting Setting Setting Setting Disabled * / Enabled 0* 20 % * Disabled * / Enabled 0* 50 % * 1.0 s * 6008 = 1 6008 = 1 6008 = 1 6005 = 1 6005 = 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/65535/1 0/65535/1 0/65535/1 0/65535/1 0/1/1 0/144.0/0.01 s 20/100/1 % 0/1/1 0/255/1 20/500/1 0.1/3600.0/0.1 s
01
Trip Configuration
02
Latched Configuration
03
Blocking 1 Configuration
04
Blocking 2 Configuration
05
Broken conductor detection
06
Tempo tBC
07
Threshold mod iinv/idirect in %
08
Cold load start
09
Threshold of cold load start
0A
% of cold load start
0B
Cold load start Tempo
Col Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Binary (1 bit) Binary (1 bit) Binary (4 bits) Courier floating point number Binary (4 bits) Courier floating point number Indexed String 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 1 2 0: nothing * 1: delatch 2: 52 a 0: nothing * 1: delatch 2: 52 a 3: 52 b 4: external CB failure 5: External input 1 6: External input 2 7 : Logic blocking 1 8 : Logic blocking 2 9 : Disturbance start 10 : Cold load start 11 : Log Selectivity 1 12 : Log Selectivity 2 13 : Change of group 14 : Recloser locked 15 : Thermal reset 16 : Trip circuit supervision 6013 = 1 6011 = 1 Disabled * / Enabled 600C = 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Disabled * / Enabled 600C = 1 Setting 0.1 s * 600C = 1 Setting 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/15/1 20 % * 600C = 1 Setting Disabled * / Enabled Setting 0/1/1 2/100/1 % 0/10.0/0.01 s
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step
0C
Breaker failure
0D
I< Threshold for Breaker failure
0E
Tempo tBF
0F
Phase instant blocking
10
Earth instant blocking
11
logic selectivity 1
12
Tempo slectivity1
0/150.0/0.01 s 0/15/1 0/150.0/0.01 s
13
logic selectivity 2
14
Tempo slectivity 2
61
00
AFFECTATION DES TS Setting 0/16/1
01
Logical input allocation 1
02
Indexed String
Setting
0/16/1
Col 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Indexed String 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0: nothing * 1: delatch 2: 52 a 3: 52 b 4: external CB failure 5: External input 1 6: External input 2 7 : Logic blocking 1 8 : Logic blocking 2 9 : Disturbance start 10 : Cold load start 11 : Log Selectivity 1 12 : Log Selectivity 2 13 : Change of group 14 : Recloser locked 15 : Thermal reset 16 : Trip circuit supervision Setting 0/16/1
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Values (* : default) 3: 52 b 4: external CB failure 5: External input 1 6: External input 2 7 : Logic blocking 1 8 : Logic blocking 2 9 : Disturbance start 10 : Cold load start 11 : Log Selectivity 1 12 : Log Selectivity 2 13 : Change of group 14 : Recloser locked 15 : Thermal reset 16 : Trip circuit supervision Depend Cell Type
Min/Max/Step
03
Col Indexed String 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0: nothing * 1: delatch 2: 52 a 3: 52 b 4: external CB failure 5: External input 1 6: External input 2 7 : Logic blocking 1 8 : Logic blocking 2 9 : Disturbance start 10 : Cold load start 11 : Log Selectivity 1 12 : Log Selectivity 2 13 : Change of group 14 : Recloser locked 15 : Thermal reset 16 : Trip circuit supervision Setting 0/16/1 0: nothing * 1: delatch 2: 52 a 3: 52 b 4: external CB failure 5: External input 1 6: External input 2 7 : Logic blocking 1 8 : Logic blocking 2 9 : Disturbance start 10 : Cold load start 11 : Log Selectivity 1 12 : Log Selectivity 2 13 : Change of group 14 : Recloser locked 15 : Thermal reset 16 : Trip circuit supervision Setting 0/16/1
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step
04
05
Indexed String
Col Setting Setting 0/200.0/0.01 0/200.0/0.01
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step
06
Timer aux 1
07
Timer aux 2
62 Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * 00000 * Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
00
CT ALLOCATION 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1 0/31/1
01
GENERAL TRIP
02
I>
03
tI>
04
I>>
05
t I>>
06
I>>>
07
t I>>>
08
I0>
09
t I0>
0A
I0>>
0B
t I0>>
0C
I0>>>
0D
t I0>>>
0E
t I<
0F
t Iinv>
10
Thermal alarm
11
Thermal trip
12
Breaker alarm
13
Trip circuit alarm
14
Broken conductor
15
Breaker failure
16
Reclosing
17
TAux 1
Col Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) Binary (5 bits) 00000 * Setting 00000 * Setting 0/31/1 0/31/1 00000 * Setting 0/31/1
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step
18
TAux 2
19
Autoreclose in progress
1A
Definitive trip
63 Binary (16 bits) Binary (16 bits) Binary (16 bits) Binary (16 bits) Binary (9 bits) Binary (9 bits) Binary (9 bits) Binary (9 bits) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number 0 0 0 0 0.1 s * Disabled * / Enabled 0.05 s* Disabled * / Enabled 0.05 s* Disabled * / Enabled 0* Disabled * / Enabled 0 exp+06 A * 6909 = 1 6907 = 1 6905 = 1 6903 = 1 0 0* Disabled * / Enabled 6901 = 1 0* 0* 0* 64 * 32 * 16 * 4*
00
LEDs CONFIGURATION Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/65535/1 0/65535/1 0/65535/1 0/65535/1 0/511/1 0/511/1 0/511/1 0/511/1 0/1/1 0.1/10.0/0.05 s 0/1/1 0.05/1.0/0.01 s 0/1/1 0.05/1.0/0.01 s 0/1/1 0/50000/1 0/1/1 0/4000/1 (*exp+06)
01
Led 5
02
Led 6
03
Led 7
04
Led 8
05
Led PF5
06
Led PF6
07
Led PF7
08
Led PF8
69
00
SW SUPERVISION
01
Trip circuit supervision ?
02
Trip circuit time ?
03
SW Operating time?
04
SW Operating time
05
SW Operating number?
06
SW Closing time ?
07
SW Closing time
08
SW Operating number
09
SA2n?
0A
Sa2n
Col Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number (VERSION P122 et >) Indexed String 0 1 2 0 0.1 secondes 0.1 secondes Samples * Stopped Trigerred Running * Setting 1/2/1 0.1 s* Setting 0.1 s* Setting 1* Setting 1/2/1 0.1/5.0/0.05 s 0.1/5.0/0.05 s
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step
0B
0C
TRIP t
0D
CLOSE t
70
00
RECORDER CONTROL
01
Start/Trigger recorder
20 Courier floating point number Courier floating point number
Recorder Source
Indexed String
Data Setting Setting 0.1/3.0/0.1 0.1/3.0/0.1
21
Pretemps
22
Postemps
80 Unsigned integer (1 byte) IEC870 Time & Date Binary Flag Indexed String 0 1 2 3 4 0*
00
DISTURBANCE REC Setting Data 11111 Ia Ib Ic I0 Inputs/Outputs 01111 Upload Offsets Upload Scal. Factors Data 0/5/1 (selon contexte) dd/mm/yy hh:mm
01
Record Number
02
Trigger Time
03
Available Channel Bit Mask
04
Channel Types
Binary Flag 0: digital, 1: analogue Repeated group of Courier numbers Repeated group of Courier numbers
Data Data Data
05
Channel Offsets
06
Scaling Factors
Col
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Data Data Data
Min/Max/Step
07-0F Integer (2 bytes) Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Repeated group of Integers Repeated group of Integers Repeated group of Integers Repeated group of Integers Repeated group of Integers Repeated group of Integer/Bin. flags Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Data Data Data Data Data Data
NON IMPLEMENTE - rserv
10
Record Length
11
Trigger position
12
Time Base
13
NON IMPLEMENTED - reserved
14
Upload Timer
15-1F
NON IMPLEMENTED - reserved
20
Upload Channel 0
21
Upload Channel 1
22
Upload Channel 2
23
Upload Channel 3
24
Upload Channel Inputs/Outputs
90
00
AUTOMAT. FLT Setting (automatic ) Data 1 PHASE A I >> 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 A Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
01
Record number
02 Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) ASCII Text (10 bytes) ASCII Text (18 bytes) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point
Occur fault date
Unsigned Integer (2 bytes)
03
Active set group
04
Phase in fault
05
Fault Id
06
Magnitude
07
Ia Magnitude
08
Ib Magnitude
09
Ic Magnitude
Col number Courier floating point number 12.34 A Data
Row
Menu Text
Data Type
Ind
Min/Max/Step
0A
In Magnitude
BF Menu Cell (2) Menu Cell (2)

NON IMPLEMENTED NON IMPLEMENTED
00 0x7000 0x8000 Data Data
COMM SYSTEM DATA
01
Dist Record Cntrl Ref
02
Dist Record Extract Ref
03
Setting Transfert
04
Reset Demand Timers
05
Reset Event Report
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 3.2.2 List of events created by the relay Code 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Cell text UNKNOWN EVENT TC CLOSE TC TRIP DIST TRIG UNLOCK TRIP SET. CHANGE RESET THERM SET MAINT MODE SET RELAY MAINT MODE I> I>> I>>> IE> IE>> IE>>> TH. ALARM TH OVERLOAD tI> tI>> tI>>> tlE> tlE>> tlE>>> tI< BROKEN CONDUCTOR t Aux1 t Aux2 BREAKER FAILURE Logic Sel. 1 Logic Sel. 2 Blocking Logic 1 Blocking Logic 2 Setting group change 52 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0021 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0024 0024 0024 0024 0020 0020 0020 0020 0020 0020
Cell reference
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 78/98 Code 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 52 b ACK RELAY LATCHED ( by Input) External failure from the CB COLD LOAD PICKUP TS Change TRIP : TH OVERLOAD TRIP : tI> TRIP : tI>> TRIP : tI>>> TRIP : tlE> TRIP : tlE>> TRIP : tlE>>> TRIP : tI< TRIP : BROKEN CONDUCTOR TRIP : t Aux 1 TRIP : t Aux 2 Output relays change ACK 1 ALARM (FRONT) ACK ALARMS (FRONT) ACK 1 ALARM (COM) ACK ALARMS (COM) Major material alarm Minor material alarm I2 > t2> OPEN OPERATING TIME TRIP OPERATION Nb SA2N TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION CLOSE OPERATING TIME SUCCESS AUTORECLOSE LOCKED AUTORECLOSER AUTORECLOSER CONF. FAIL TRIP : t I2 > NOTA : Cell text
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 Cell reference 0020 0020 0020 0020 0020 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0021 0 0 0 0 0022 0022 0024 0024 0024 0024 0024 0024 0024 0024 0024 0024 0
When the cell reference is different of zero this means that the event is generated on event occurrence and another is generated on event disappearance.
When the cell reference is equal to zero, only the event on edging edge is generated. Twelve bits are available in the string of characters to describe the contain of the Courier cell: On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to 1 . On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to 0 . 3.3 Setting changes This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change: Enter Setting Mode - checks that the cell is settable and returns the limits Preload Setting - Places a new value to the cell, this value is echoed to ensure that setting corruption has not taken place, the validity of the setting is not checked by this action. Execute Setting - Confirms the setting change, if the change is valid then a positive response will be returned, if the setting change fails then an error response will be returned. Abort Setting - This command can be used to abandon the setting change. This is the most secure method and is ideally suited to on-line editors as the setting limits are taken from the relay before the setting change is made. However this method can be slow if many settings are being changed as three commands are required for each change. 3.4 3.4.1 Systems integration data Address of the relay The relays can have any address between 1 and 254 included. The address 255 corresponds to the global address to which all relays and all the other slave peripheries are responding. The Courier protocol specifies that no response can be resent from a slave periphery to a global message. This permits to avoid that all peripheries respond at the same time creating by this way user conflict on the Bus. Each relay possess an address settled on 255 in order to guarantee that in case of his connection to the operating network, his address cannot create any conflict with the address of another periphery already in exploitation. In order to permit to a new periphery to get entirely operational, his address has to be settled. The address can be modified manually in capturing the password, than in following the method of the setting change through the user interface on the front plate of the relay. The same, if the network functioning on a computer takes in charge the autoaddressing, the relay address can be settled on 0 to active the characteristic of autoaddressing of the computer software. The relay receives then the next valid address on the Bus. If the address is 255 or not known, she can be modified in sending a new address, with a global message, to a periphery possessing a particular serial number. This method is used for those peripheries which are not having any user interface for reading or changing the address in process. 3.4.2 Measured values Each measured value can be periodically extracted by a selective call of MiCOM P124 relay.
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 80/98 3.4.3 Status word
Each response of a slave periphery contains an octet of status. This octet is resent by the relay at the beginning of each message for signalling important data. The principal workstation can be design for responding automatically to these important data. The contained indications are the following : Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 3.4.4 1 = Recording of disturbance available for retrieval 1 = Change of the Unit status word 1 = Change of the control status word 1 = Relay busy, no response possible in time 1 = Relay out of service 1 = Recording of events available for retrieval 1 = Switched alarm indicator 1 = Switched tripping indicator
Unit status word The unit status word is located in the menu 000C. Each bits pair of the Unit status word serves to indicate the status (position) of the unit elements checked through the relay. This functionality is not supported on MiCOM P124 relay.
3.4.5
Control status word The Control status word is located in the cell of the menu 000D. It is used for transmitting the control information of the slave periphery to the central unit. Nevertheless, the relays described in this manual are protection relays, which are not using this control characteristic.
3.4.6
Measurement control The control functions through the MiCOM P124 Dual-powered relay can be executed on a serial link. These functions are supported in particular on the changes of the individual relay settings, on the changes of the setting groups, on the remote control of the circuit breaker, as well as on the functions and the locking of the selected output relays. The remote control is limited in the control functions selected in the table of the relays menu. The CRC and the controls of the message length are used on each received message. No response is given for messages received with an error detection. The principal unit can be re-initialised in order to resent an order as often as wanted if he is not receiving any response or if he receives a response with an error detection. NOTE: The control commands are generally materialised by the change of the cell value. They dispose the same inherent security. No response is allowed for the global orders to avoid any user conflict of the Bus. For this type of order, a double start is used for the verification of the message by the relay. The relay transmits then a confirmation indicating that the control order or the change of setting has been accepted. If this is not the case, the relay is sending an error message.
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 3.4.7 Change of remote measurements
The relay is only responding to the orders of a setting change through the serial port if the SD0 link = 1 is selected. The selection of the SD0 link = 1 is blocking all the changes of remote setting with the exception of the SC logical links and the password capture. When the SD0 link = 0 is selected, the remote setting are protected by the password. For changing the remote links, the password has to be first remote captured and the SD and SD0 function links have to be settled on 1. 3.5 Event extraction Events can be extracted either automatically or manually . For automatic extraction all events are extracted in sequential order using the standard Courier mechanism, this includes fault. The manual approach allows the user to select events, faults at random from the stored records. 3.5.1 Automatic event extraction This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as it is produced via the rear port. When new event information is created the Event bit is set within the Status byte, this indicates to the Master device that event information is available. The oldest, unextracted event can be extracted from the relay using the Send Event command. The relay will respond with the event data, which will be either a Courier Type 0 or Type 3 event. The Type 3 event is used for fault records. Once an event has been extracted from the relay the Accept Event can be used to confirm that the event has been successfully extracted. If all events have been extracted then the event bit will reset, if there are more events still to be extracted the next event can be accessed using the Send Event command as before. 3.5.2 Event types Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances: Change of state of output contact Change of state of opto input Protection element operation Alarm condition Setting Change Fault Record (Type 3 Courier Event)
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 82/98 3.5.3 Event format
The Send Event command results in the following fields being returned by the relay: Cell Reference Timestamp Cell Text Cell Value
The table of the events created by the relay (3.2.2) indicates how the contents of the above fields are interpreted. Fault records will return a Courier Type 3 event which contains the above fields together with two additional fields: Event extraction column Event number
These events contain additional information which is extracted from the relay using the referenced extraction column. Row 01 of the extraction column contains a setting which allows the fault record to be selected. This setting should be set to the event number value returned within the record, the extended data can be extracted from the relay by uploading the text and data from the column. 3.5.4 Manual record extraction Column 02 of the database can be used for manual viewing fault records. The contents of this column will depend of the nature of the record selected. It is possible to select directly a fault record. Fault Record Selection (Row 01) - This cell can be used to directly select a fault record using a value between 0 and 4 to select one of up to five stored fault records (0 will be the most recent fault and 4 will be the oldest). The column will then contain the details of the fault record selected (row 02 to 0A) It should be noted that if this column is used to extract event information from the relay the number associated with a particular record will change when a new fault occurs. 3.6 Disturbance record extraction The stored disturbance records within the relay are accessible via the Courier interface. Select Record Number (Row 01) - This cell can be used to select the record to be extracted. Record 0 will be the oldest unextracted record, older records will be assigned positive values, and negative values will be used for more recent records. To facilitate automatic extraction via the rear port the Disturbance bit of the Status byte is set by the relay whenever there are unextracted disturbance records. Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of the record can be read from cell 02. The disturbance record itself can be extracted using the block transfer mechanism from cell B00B. As has been stated the rear Courier port can be used to automatically extract disturbance records as they occur. This operates using the standard Courier mechanism defined in Chapter 8 of the Courier User Guide.
4.
IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE
The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave device. This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol. The relay conforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not supported. The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface: Initialisation (Reset) Time Synchronisation Event Record Extraction General Interrogation Cyclic Measurements General Commands
4.1
Physical connection and link layer Connection is available for IEC60870-5-103 through the rear RS485 port. It is possible to select both the relay address and baud rate using the front panel interface. Following a change, a reset command is required to re-establish communications. The parameters of the communication are the following : Even Parity 8 Data bits 1 stop bit Data rate 9600 or 19200 bauds
4.2
Initialisation Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have been changed a reset command is required to initialise the communications. The relay will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference being that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relay's transmit buffer. The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5, the Cause Of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB depending on the nature of the reset command. The following information will be contained in the data section of this ASDU: Manufacturer Name: AREVA
The Software Identification Section will contain the first four characters of the relay model number to identify the type of relay, eg P124. In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it will also produce a power up event.
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 84/98 4.3 Time synchronisation
The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronisation message is sent as a send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. Whether the time synchronisation message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronisation message will be returned as Class 1 data. 4.4 Spontaneous events The events created by the relay will be passed using the standard function type/information numbers to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. Private codes are not used, thus any events that cannot be passed using the standardised messages will not be sent. Events are categorised using the following information: Common Address Function Type Information number
Section 4.10 contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay. The common address is used to differentiate in circumstances where the relay produces more events of a certain type than can be passed using the standardised messages. For example if the relay produces starts and trips for three stages of overcurrent only two stages can be passed using the standardised messages. Using the different common address for two of the overcurrent stages allows each stage to be indicated. The table in 4.10 of the present chapter shows the common address as an offset value. The common address offset will be added to the station address in order to pass these events. 4.5 General interrogation The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, information numbers and common address offsets that will be returned during the GI cycle are indicated in 4.10. 4.6 Cyclic measurements The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be read from the relay using a Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 is not used). It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a proportion of either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value. The selection of either 1.2 or 2.4 for a particular value is indicated in 4.10. 4.7 Commands A list of the supported commands is contained in 4.10. The relay will respond to other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement of a command. 4.8 Disturbance records The disturbance records stored by the relay cannot be extracted using the mechanism defined in the IEC60870-5-103 standard. The relay maintains compatibility with the VDEW control system by transmitting an ASDU 23 with no disturbance records at the start of every GI cycle.
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 4.9 Blocking of monitor direction
The relay does not support a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction. 4.10 List of events produced by the relay Two kinds of ASDU can be generated for the events : ASDU 1 (time-tagged message) or ASDU2 (Time-tagged message with relative time) The list of events is the following with the associated values : INFORMATION NUMBER, TYPE OF ASDU ,CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION and COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU Status indication in monitor direction :
Auto-recloser active : INF <16>; TYP <1>;COT<1>, <ADDRESS> LED reset : INF <19>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Characteristic 1 : INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Characteristic 2 : INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Logic input 1 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Logic input 2 : INF <28>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Logic input 3 : INF <29>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Logic input 4 : INF <30>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Logic input 5 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS+1>
Supervision indications in monitor direction :
Trip circuit supervision : INF <36>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>
Fault indications in monitor direction :
Start/pick-up N : INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> General TRIP : INF <68>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> TRIP L1 : INF <69>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> TRIP L2 : INF <70>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> TRIP L3 : INF <71>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> General start : INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Breaker failure : INF <85>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> TRIP I> : INF <90>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> TRIP I>> : INF <91>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> TRIP I>>> : INF <90>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS+1> TRIP IN> : INF <92>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> TRIP IN>>: INF <93>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> TRIP IN>>> : INF <92>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS+1> Auto-reclosure indications in monitor direction CB 'on' by AR : INF <128>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> CB 'on' by long time AR : INF <129>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> AR blocked : INF <130>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> NOTA : The italics events are only valid for the MiCOM P124. The double arrow means the event is generated on event occurrence and another is generated on event disappearance.
List of data contained in General Interrogation
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 86/98 Status indication in monitor direction :
Auto-recloser active : INF <16>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS> Characteristic 1 : INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS> Characteristic 2 : INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS> Auxiliary input 1 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS> Auxiliary input 2 : INF <28>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS> Auxiliary input 3 : INF <29>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS> Auxiliary input 4 : INF <30>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS> Auxiliary input 5 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS+1>
Supervision indications in monitor direction : Trip circuit supervision : INF <36>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>
Fault indications in monitor direction : Start/pick-up N : INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT <9>,<ADDRESS> General start : INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS>
Auto-reclosure indications in monitor direction AR blocked : INF <130>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS> Cyclic measurements
The selection of either 1.2 or 2.4 for a particular value is the following : For the current value Ia, Ib and Ic the rate is equal to 2.4 For the frequency the rate is equal to 1.2 The other fields of ASDU 9 are not updated. List of the supported commands Autorecloser ON/OFF only on MiCOM P123 : INF<16>, TYP<20>, COT <20> LED reset . This command corresponds to the acknowledgment of all alarms by the front plate on MiCOM P12x products : INF<19>, TYP<20>, COT <20> Charcateristic 1 : INF<23>, TYP<20>, COT <20> Characteristic 2 : INF<23>, TYP<20>, COT <20>
5.
5.1
DNP 3.0 CONFIGURATION/INTEROPERABILITY GUIDE

Introduction
The purpose of this document is to describe the specific implementation of the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) 3.0 within P12x. P12x uses the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library Version 2.18. This document, in conjunction with the DNP 3.0 Basic 4 Document Set, and the DNP Subset Definitions Document, provides complete information on how to communicate with P12x via the DNP 3.0 protocol. This implementation of DNP 3.0 is fully compliant with DNP 3.0 Subset Definition Level 2, contains many Subset Level 3 features, and contains some functionality even beyond Subset Level 3.
5.2
DNP V3.00 device profile The following table provides a irDevice Profile DocumentlK in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. While it is referred to in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions as a isDocument,l. it is only a component of a total interoperability guide. This table, in combination with the following should provide a complete interoperability/configuration guide for P12x :
the Implementation Table provided in Section 0 (beginning on page 66), the Point List Tables provided in Section 5.4 (beginning on page 69),
DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (Also see the Implementation Table in Section 0, beginning on page 66.) Vendor Name: AREVA T&D P&C Device Name: SERIAL 20 Platform using the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library, Version 2.18. Highest DNP Level Supported: For Requests: For Responses: Level 2 Level 2 Device Function: ! " Master Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table): For static (non-change-event) object requests, request qualifier codes 00 and 01 (start-stop), 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index) are supported in addition to request qualifier code 06 (no range or all points). Static object requests received with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests received with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event object requests, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded. 16-bit and 32-bit Analog Change Events with Time may be requested. The read function code for Object 50 (Time and Date), variation 1, is supported. Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Transmitted: Received 292 292 Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets): Transmitted: Received: 2048 2048

DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (Also see the Implementation Table in Section 0, beginning on page 66.) Maximum Data Link Re-tries: ! None " Fixed at 2 ! Configurable Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation: " Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Maximum Application Layer Re-tries: " ! None Configurable
Requires Application Layer Confirmation: Never Always " When reporting Event Data " When sending multi-fragment responses Sometimes Configurable Timeouts while waiting for: Data Link Confirm: None Complete Appl. Fragment: " None Application Confirm: None Complete Appl. Response: " None " Fixed at 100 ms Fixed at ____ " Fixed at 1s Fixed at ____ Variable Variable Variable Variable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable
Others: Binary input change scanning period: 5ms Analog input change scanning period: 1s Sends/Executes Control Operations: WRITE Binary Outputs " Never SELECT/OPERATE Never DIRECT OPERATE Never DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Never Count > 1 Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off " Never Never " Never " Never " Never Always " Always " Always " Always Always " Always Always Always Always Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable
Queue " Never Clear Queue " Never Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested: Never " Only time-tagged Configurable
Always Sometimes Configurable Always Sometimes Configurable Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested: Never " Binary Input Change With Time Binary Input Change With Relative Time Configurable (attach explanation)

DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (Also see the Implementation Table in Section 0, beginning on page 66.) Sends Unsolicited Responses: " Never Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes (attach explanation) ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED Function codes supported
Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses: " Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change
No other options are permitted.
Default Counter Object/Variation: No Counters Reported Configurable Default Object: 20 Default Variation: 5 Point-by-point list attached
Counters Roll Over at: No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) 16 Bits 32 Bits Other Value: _____ Point-by-point list attached
"
" " "
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses: " Yes No
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 90/98 5.3 Implementation table
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the P12x in both request messages and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded. In the table below text shaded as Subset Level 3 indicates Subset Level 3 functionality (beyond Subset Level 2), and text shaded as beyond Subset Level 3 indicates functionality beyond Subset Level 3.
OBJECT Object Variation Number Number 1 0 Description Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) Binary Input REQUEST (Library will parse) Function Codes (dec) 1 (read) Qualifier Codes (hex) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index see note 2) RESPONSE (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) Qualifier Codes (hex)
1 (default see note 1) 0
(read) 22
Binary Input Change (Variation 1 0 is used to request default variation) Binary Input Change without Time 1
(read)
1 (default see note 1 for P120 P121) 2 (default see note 1) 0
(read)
Binary Input Change with Time 1
(read)
06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 7, 08 17, 28 (start-stop) 0 (limited qty) (index)
129 (response)
17, 28
(index)
10
Binary Output Status (Variation 1 0 is used to request default variation) Binary Output Status 1
(read)
10
2 (default see note 1) 1
(read)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index see note 2) echo of request
12
Control Relay Output Block
3 4 5 6 1 7 8 9 10
(select) (operate) (direct op) (dir. op, noack) (read) (freeze) (freeze noack) (freeze clear) (frz. cl. noack)
129 (response)
20
Binary Counter (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)
00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 129 (response) 00, 01 (startstop) 17, 28 (index see note 2) 00, 01 (startstop) 17, 28 (index see note 2)
20
32-Bit Binary Counter
1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. noack)
20
16-Bit Binary Counter
129 (response)

OBJECT Object Variation Number Number 20 5 Description 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag REQUEST (Library will parse) Function Codes (dec) 1 7 8 9 10 1 7 8 9 10 1
(read) (freeze) (freeze noack) (freeze clear) (frz. cl. noack) (read) (freeze) (freeze noack) (freeze clear) (frz. cl. noack) (read)

RESPONSE (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 129 (response) Qualifier Codes (hex) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (indexsee
note 2)
Qualifier Codes (hex) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty)
20
16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (indexsee

note 2)
21
Frozen Counter (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) 32-Bit Frozen Counter
21
(read)
129 (response)

note 2)
21
16-Bit Frozen Counter
(read)
129 (response)

note 2)
21
32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag
(read)
129 (response)

note 2)
21
10
16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag
(read)
129 (response)

note 2)
30
Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) 32-Bit Analog Input
(read)
30
(read)
129 (response)

note 2)
30
2 16-Bit Analog Input (default see note 1) 3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag
(read)
129 (response)

note 2)
30
(read)
129 (response)

note 2)
30
16-Bit Analog Input without Flag
(read)
129 (response)

note 2)
32
Analog Change Event (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time
(read)
32 32
1 1
(read) (read)
129 (response) 129 (response)
17, 28 17, 28
(index) (index)
2 16-Bit Analog Change Event (default see without Time note 1) 3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
32
(read)
129
(response)
17, 28
(index)

OBJECT Object Variation Number Number 32 50 4 0 Description 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time Time and Date REQUEST (Library will parse) Function Codes (dec) 1 1
(read) (read)

RESPONSE (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 129 129
(response) (response)
Qualifier Codes (hex) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index)
Qualifier Codes (hex) 17, 28

(index)
00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index see

note 2)
50
1 Time and Date default see note 1) 2 0 1 2 3 4 1 Time Delay Fine Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data Class 0 Data Class 1 Data Class 2 Data Class 3 Data Internal Indications
1 2
(read) (write)
129
(response)
00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index see

note 2)
52 60 60 60 60 60 80
129 1 1 1 1 1 2 13 14 23
(read) (read) (read) (read) (read) (write) (cold restart) (warm restart) (delay meas.)
(response)
07
(limited qty) (qty = 1)
06 06
(no range, or all) (no range, or all)
129 129 129 129
17,28 17,28 17,28 17,28
(no range, or all) 06 07, 08 (limited qty) (no range, or all) 06 07, 08 (limited qty) (no range, or all) 06 07, 08 (limited qty)
00
(start-stop) (index must =7)
No Object (function code only) See Note 3 No Object (function code only) No Object (function code only)
NOTE 1: NOTE 2:
A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.) For P12x, a cold restart is implemented as a warm restart the executable is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
NOTE 3:
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 5.4 Point List
The tables in the following sections identify all the individual data points provided by this implementation of DNP 3.0. P12x uses the database protection. 5.4.1 Binary Input Points Every Binary Input Status points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in one of classes 1, 2 or 3. Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Point Index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Output relay 1 (trip) Output r elay 2 Output r elay 3 Output r elay 4 Output relay 0 ( watch dog) Output r elay 5 Output r elay 6 Opto isolator 1 Opto isolator 2 Opto isolator 3 Opto isolator 4 Opto isolator 5 Phase overcurrent stage 1 start Phase overcurrent stage 1 trip Phase overcurrent stage 2 start Phase overcurrent stage 2 trip Phase overcurrent stage 3 start Phase overcurrent stage 3 trip Earth overcurrent stage 1 start Earth overcurrent stage 1 trip Earth overcurrent stage 2 start Earth overcurrent stage 2 trip Earth overcurrent stage 3 start Earth overcurrent stage 3 trip tI< thermal start thermal trip taux1 Name/Description init val. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 94/98 Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Point Index 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 taux2 broken conductor cb failure I2> start tI2> trip number of cb operation Cb operation time alarm sa2n trip circuit alarm cb close time alarm Recloser locked Recloser success Recloser running Logic selectivity 1 Logic selectivity 2 Blocking logic 1 Blocking logic 2 52a 52b CB external failure Cold load pick up Unlatch by logic input Unlatch RL1 by remote command Close remote command Trip remote command Reset thermal state by communication Maintenance mode Major hardware alarm Minor hardware alarm Phase overcurrent stage 1 trip alarm (latched) Phase overcurrent stage 2 trip alarm (latched) Phase overcurrent stage 3 trip alarm (latched) Earth overcurrent stage 1 trip alarm (latched) Earth overcurrent stage 2 trip alarm (latched) Name/Description init val. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Point Index 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 Name/Description Earth overcurrent stage 3 trip alarm (latched) tI< alarm (latched) thermal start alarm (latched) thermal trip alarm (latched) taux1 alarm (latched) taux2 alarm (latched) broken conductor alarm (latched) cb failure alarm (latched) tI2> alarm (latched) Cb operation time alarm(latched) number of cb operation (latched) sa2n alarm (latched) trip circuit alarm(latched) cb close time alarm ( latched) Conflict recloser init val. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the Control Relay Output Blocks (Object 12). Binary Output Status points are not included in class 0 polls.
Binary Output Status Points Object Number: 10 Request Function Codes supported: Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 Request Function Codes supported:
Point Index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Unlatch of the relays First alarm acknowledge All alarm acknowledge Trip c ommand Close command Change of setting group Thermal state reset Peak and average value reset RAM hardware alarm acknowledge Reclose counter reset
1 (read)
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)

Initial Status Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Supported Control Relay Output Block Fields Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse O n Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On Pulse On
Name/Description
Technical Guide Communication Database MiCOM P124 5.4.3 Counters
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point. Binary Counters and Frozen Counters are not included in class 0 polls. P120 and P121 do not support binary Counters and Frozen Counters.
Binary Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: Change Event Object Number: Request Function Codes supported: 20 not supported 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze and clear), 10 (freeze and clear, noack) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported Frozen Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21 Change Event Object Number: not supported Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 9 (32-Bit Frozen Binary without Flag) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported
Point Index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Max I a R ms Max I b R ms Max I c R ms Average I a R ms Average I b R ms Average I c R ms CB operations Amps (n) Ia Amps (n) Ib Amps (n) Ic total number of reclosing shots cycle 1 number cycle 2 number cycle 3 number cycle 4 number definitive trip number close command number Name/Description D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D2 D3 D3 D3 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 Data type
P124/EN T08/B44 CHAPTER 8 Page 98/98 5.4.4 Analog Inputs
The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of Analog Inputs, Analog Output Control Blocks, and Analog Output Statuses are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767. For each point, the ihScaling and Unitsli column indicates the value of a transmitted 32767. This also implies the value of a transmitted 32767. The entry in the column does not imply a valid value for the point. Always indicating the representation of 32767 in the tables below is a consistent method for representing scale, applicable to all scaling possibilities. The ihDefault Deadband,ln and the ihDefault Change Event Assigned Classl columns are used to represent the absolute amount by which the point must change before an analog change event will be generated, and once generated in which class poll (1, 2, 3) will the change event be reported. Only the default values for these columns are documented here because the values may change in operation due to either local (user-interface) or remote (through DNP) control. Every Analog Inputs points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in one of classes 1, 2 or 3.
Analog Inputs Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Analog Change Event w/o Time) Change Event Scan Rate: The scan rate for analog input change events is fixed at 1s
Point Index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Name/Description active group module IA module IB module IC module IN rms IA rms IB rms IC rms IN thermal state frequency Initial Value 1 0 0 0 0 0A 0A 0A 0A 0% 0 Scaling and Units (representation of 32767 see above) 32767 40 In 40 In 40 In 40 I0n 327.67A 327.67A 327.67A 327.67A 32767% 327,67 Hz Valid Range 12 0 to 40 In 0 to 40 In 0 to 40 In 0 to 40 I0n 0 to 40000000 A/100 0 to 40000000 A/100 0 to 40000000 A/100 0 to 40000000 A/100 0 to 65535 45Hz to 65 Hz and 99.99Hz == ERROR 0 to 40 In 0 to 40 In 0 to 10.00s 0 to 10.00s Change Event Dead-band 1 0.1 In 0.1 In 0.1 In 0.02 In 10% 10% 10% 10% 10 1Hz Initial Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
11 12 13 14
module I2 module I1 trip time close time
0 0 0 0
40 In 40 In 327.67s 327.67s
0.1 In 0.1 In 10 ms 10 ms
2 2 2 2
P124/EN TA1/B44
APPENDIX 1 Connection diagrams
A
P2 S2 S1 P1
Alternative : 3 phase CTs + core balanced CT connection

C
Phase rotation
3 phase CTs connection

49 1 A ou 5A 50 RL0
P2
P1
A B C
A B C
S2
S1
S2
S1
49
1 A ou 5A
37 35 36
Watchdog
50
51
51 RL1 39 41 53 1 A ou 5A 54 1 A ou 5A 52
1 A ou 5A
44 42 40
Trip output for CB coil + Trip output for striker
Technical Guide Connection Diagrams MICOM P124
52
53
1 A ou 5A
54
56
1 A ou 5 A
56 55 48 1 A ou 5 A 47
55 48
1 A ou 5 A
47
Alternative : 2 phase CTs + core balanced CT connection

Case earth connection
P2
P1
A B C
S2
S1
Module terminal block viewed from rear

29 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 (2) Notes (1) 31 33 35 37 39
S2
S1
49
1 A ou 5A
50
P124 Selt-powered model
51
MiCOM P124 Self-powered model Typical application diagram
SCHEME REPRESENTING MiCOM RELAY OFF

:
(a) (b) (c) (d) Short terminals break before (c) Long terminals Pins terminals (p c b type) CT connections are typical only
1 A ou 5A
52
53
1 A ou 5A
54
56
CT shorting links mode before (b) and (c) disconnect
1 A ou 5 A
55 48
P124/EN TA1/B44 APPENDIX 1 Page 1/6
47
Technical Guide Connection Diagrams MiCOM P124
MiCOM P124 self-powered model Rear connections

In case of Self-powered model, only one 28 connection points Midos connector is used following the diagram below :
NC NC NC RL0 (WD) normally closed contact RL0 (WD) normally open contact Striker output + Striker output Reserved, do not use Reserve, do not use Earth current input (1) for 3CTs connection Phase A (1) Phase B (1) Phase C (1) Earth current input (1) (2)
29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55
30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
NC NC NC Common RL0 (Watchdog) NC Common RL1 (trip) RL1 (trip) normally closed contact RL1 (trip) normally open contact Reserve, do not use Common earth current input for 3CTs connectionCommun Phase A Common Phase B Common Phase C Common earth current input (2)
Rear view, connector 1 : NC : no connected (1) (2) the current inputs are 1 or 5A and defined on ordering code inputs used when it is necessary to power the MiCOM P124 relay via the earth current input.
A
P2 S2 S1 P1
Alternative : 3 phase CTs + core balanced CT connection.

C B
49 1A or 5A 50 RL0 Watchdog Phase rotation A B C
3 phase CTs connection
P2
P1
A B C
S2
S1
S2
S1
49
1A or 5A
50
37 35 36
51 1A or 5A 52 RL2 53 RL3 1A or 5A 54 RL4 RL1
51
Trip output contact for CB coil Programmeble output Programmeble output Programmeble output
1A or 5A
52
53
1A or 5A
54
56
1A or 5A
56
55
RL5
Programmeble output
55 48 1A or 5A 47
48
1A or 5A
RL6
47
44 42 40 6 4 2 12 10 8 22 20 18 28 26 24 5 3 1
Programmeble output
39 41
9+ Programmable input L1 1113+ 1517+ 1921+ 2325+ 2733 Programmable input L2 Programmable input L3 Programmable input L4 Programmable input L5
+ -
P124 Dual-powered model
Trip output for striker
29 * 30 31 32 34 + -
Case earth connection
Alternative : 3 phase CTs + core balanced CT connection.
P2
P1
RS 485 communication port
A B C
S2
S1
S2
S1
49
+
Module terminal block viewed from rear 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
Auxiliary supply
1A or 5A
50
(*) terminating resistor for the last relay to be connected between 30-32
51
MiCOM P124 Dual-powered model Typical application diagram
SHEME REPRESENTING MiCOM RELAY OFF

Notes : (1) (a) (b) (c) (d) (2)
1A or 5A
52
53
1A or 5A
54
56
1A or 5A
55
48
1A or 5A
47
CTs shorting links mode before (b) and (c) disconnect Short terminals break before (c) Long terminals Pins terminals (p c b type)
CT connections are typical only
MiCOM Dual-powered model Rear connections

In case of dual-powered model, two 28 connection points Midos connectors (total 56 connection points) are used following the diagram below : Rear view, connector 1 :
0V (to be linked to the earth case) RS485+ Auxiliary supply + RL0 (WD) normally closed contact RL0 (WD) normally open contact Striker output + Striker output Reserved, do not use Reseved, do not use Earth current input (1) for 3CTs connection Phase A (1) Phase B (1) Phase C (1) Earth current input(1) (2)
29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55
30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
RS485 terminating resistor for the last relay RS485 Auxiliary suppl Common RL0 (Watchdog) NC Common RL1 (trip) RL1 (trip) normally closed contact RL1 (trip) normally open contact Reseved, do not use Common earth current input For 3CTs connection Common Phase A Common Phase B Common Phase C Common earth current input (2)
NC : no connected (1) (2) the current inputs are 1 or 5A and defined on ordering code inputs used when it is necessary to power the MiCOM P124 relay via the earth current input.
MiCOM P124 Dual-powered model Real connections (continued)
Common RL6 RL6 normally closed contact RL6 normally open contact NC Logic input EL1+ Logic input EL1 Logic input EL2+ Logic input EL2 Logic input EL3+ Logic input EL3 Logic input EL4+ Logic input EL4 Logic input EL5+ Logic input EL5 -
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
Common RL2 RL2 normally closed contact RL6 normally open contact Common RL3 RL3 normally closedcontact RL3 normally open contact NCR NC Common RL4 RL4 normally closedcontact RL4 normally open contact Common RL5 RL5 normally closedcontact RL5 normally open contact
Rear view, connector 2 : NC : no connected
BLANK PAGE
P124/EN TA2/B44
APPENDIX 2 Commissioning Test and Record Sheets
Technical Guide Commissioning test and record sheets MiCOM P124
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2
COMMISSIONING TEST SHEETS

Relay identification Commissioning test record
3
3 3
2.
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7
COMMISSIONING SETTING RECORD SHEETS

MiCOM P124 Self-powered model OP PARAMETERS Menu CONFIGURATION / CT Ratio Menu PROTECTION Menu AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu RECORDS Menu MiCOM P124 Dual-powered model OP PARAMETERS Menu CONFIGURATION Menu COMMUNICATION Menu PROTECTION G1 Menu PROTECTION G2 Menu AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu RECORDS Menu
7
7 7 7 8 10 10 11 11 11 13 14 19 23 31
BLANK PAGE
1.
1.1
COMMISSIONING TEST SHEETS

Relay identification ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________
Commissioning date : Engineer : Substation : Circuit : Rated frequency :
Model
P124 Self-powered model
Dual-powered ! P124 model
Serial number : __________________________________________________ Rated current In : __________________________________________________ Auxiliary voltage Uaux (Dual-powered model only): __________________________________________________ Communication protocol (Dual-powered model only): __________________________________________________ Language : __________________________________________________ 1.2 Commissioning test record (put a cross after each checked stage) Serial number check ? All current transformer shorting switches closed ? Wiring checked against diagram (if available) ? Case earth installed ? Test block connections checked (if installed) ? Insulation tested ?
! ! ! ! ! !
P124/EN TA2/B44 APPENDIX 2 Page 4/32 Auxiliary supply control (Dual-powered model only) Auxiliary voltage to relay Auxiliary voltage value
!
___________ Vdc/Vac
Watchdog contacts With auxiliary supply off With auxiliary supply on Terminals 35 36 37 Terminals 35 36 37
! !
NOTE :
for the Self-powered model the watchdog test is done with the battery box MiCOM E1.
Technical Guide Commissioning test and record sheets MiCOM P124 Measurements Applied value Phase CT input Phase A current Phase B current Phase C current Earth CT input Earth current _____________A _____________A _____________A _____________A
P124/EN TA2/B44 APPENDIX 2 Page 5/32 Relay value
______________A ______________A ______________A
______________A
Phase protection test
Theoretical value
I> threshold I> threshold I> drop threshold Time delay Time delay at 2 x I> Time delay at 10 x I> I>> threshold I>> threshold I>> drop threshold Time delay Time delay at 2 x I>> Time delay at 10 x I>> _____________A _____________A _____________ms _____________ms _____________A _____________A
Relay value
______________A ______________A
______________ms ______________ms
______________A ______________A
______________A ______________A
P124/EN TA2/B44 APPENDIX 2 Page 6/32 Earth protection test
Theoretical value
Ie> threshold Ie> threshold Ie> drop threshold Time delay Time delay at 2 x Ie> Time delay at 10 x Ie> Ie>> threshold Ie>> threshold Ie>> drop threshold Time delay Time delay at 2 x Ie>> Time delay at 10 x Ie>> ______________ms ______________ms ______________ms ______________ms ______________A ______________A ______________A _______________A
Relay value
______________A ______________A
______________ms ______________ms
______________ms ______________ms
Commissioning Engineer ____________________________________________
Date ______________
2.
2.1 2.1.1
COMMISSIONING SETTING RECORD SHEETS

MiCOM P124 Self-powered model OP PARAMETERS Menu Password : Reference : Software version : Frequency: ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________
50 Hz
60 Hz
2.1.2
CONFIGURATION / CT Ratio Menu Line CT primary E/Gnd CT primary Primary phase CT ratio Primary earth CT ratio
P124/EN TA2/B44 APPENDIX 2 Page 8/32 2.1.3 PROTECTION Menu 2.1.3.1

2.1.3.1.A
Phase Overcurrent [50/51] [50/51] I>
I> ? I> Delay Type

2.1.3.1.A.A
! !
YES In IDMT
! !
ms DMT
NO
RI
[51] I> DMT
tI>
2.1.3.1.A.B
[51] I> IDMT
Idmt
! ! ! ! !
[51] I> DMT reset time
IEC SI IEC VI IEC LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI
! ! ! ! !
IEC STI IEC EI CO2 CO8 IEEE EI
Tms
2.1.3.1.A.C
t Reset
2.1.3.1.A.D
ms
[51] I> IDMT reset time
Rtms
2.1.3.1.A.E
[51] I> RI
K t Reset
2.1.3.1.B
ms
[51] I>>
I>> ? I>> tI>>

2.1.3.1.C
YES In ms
NO
[51] I>>>
I>>> ? I>>> tI>>>
YES In ms
NO
Technical Guide Commissioning test and record sheets MiCOM P124 2.1.3.2
2.1.3.2.A
Earth Overcurrent [50N/51N] [50N/51N] E/Gnd
le> ? le> Delay Type

2.1.3.2.A.A
! !
YES
!
len
NO
IDMT
!
ms
DMT
RI
[51N] Ie > DMT
tle>
2.1.3.2.A.B
[51N] Ie > IDMT
Idmt
! ! ! ! !
[51N] Ie> DMT reset time
! ! ! ! !
Tms
2.1.3.2.A.C
t Reset
2.1.3.2.A.D
ms
[51N] Ie> IDMT reset time
Rtms
2.1.3.2.A.E
ms
[51N] Ie> RI
K t Reset
2.1.3.2.B
ms
[51N] Ie>>
le>> ? Ie>> tIe>>

2.1.3.2.C
YES Ien ms
NO
[51N] Ie>>>
Ie>>> ? Ie>>> tIe>>>
YES Ien ms
NO
P124/EN TA2/B44 APPENDIX 2 Page 10/32 2.1.3.3 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD
Therm OL ? I > Te k Trip Alarm ? Alarm 2.1.4 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu
YES In ms %
NO
YES %
NO
2.1.4.1 TRIP Command allocation Trip tI> Trip tI>> Trip tI>>> Trip tIe> Trip tIe>> Trip tIe>>> Trip Thermal 2.1.5 RECORDS Menu
! ! ! ! ! ! !
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
! ! ! ! ! ! !
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
2.1.5.1 TIME PEAK VALUE Time Window mn
Technical Guide Commissioning test and record sheets MiCOM P124 2.2 MiCOM P124 Dual-powered model 2.2.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu Password : Reference : Software version : Frequency: 2.2.2 2.2.2.1 CONFIGURATION Menu Display Phase A Text Phase B Text Phase C Text E/Gnd Text 2.2.2.2 CT Ratio Line CT primary E/Gnd CT primary 2.2.2.3 Primary phase CT ratio Primary earth CT ratio
________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________
50 Hz
60 Hz
! ! ! !
A B C N
! ! ! !
L1 L2 L3 E
! ! ! !
R S T G
Configuration of the trip output relay RL1 operation Fail-safe operation
YES
NO
P124/EN TA2/B44 APPENDIX 2 Page 12/32 2.2.2.4 Functions I> tI> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> Therm Trip Brkn. Cond CB Fail tI2> Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 T Aux 1 T Aux 2 Recloser Run Recloser Blocked LEDs 5 to 8 configuration LED 5 LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES
! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO
Technical Guide Commissioning test and record sheets MiCOM P124 2.2.2.5 Group selection configuration Setting group Change group input configuration 2.2.2.6 Alarm operation Instantaneous alarm : self-reset operation Display of alarm battery message in case of battery or backed RAM memory failure 2.2.2.7
! ! ! !
EL
Group 1 on edge
! ! ! !
4 3
Group 2 on level
YES
NO
YES
NO
Configuration of the input mode operation Inputs 5 2 1
! !
IEC
! !
2.2.2.8
Format of the Modbus date Format of the date PRIVATE
2.2.3
COMMUNICATION Menu
2.2.3.1 COMMUNICATION Menu (MODBUS) Communication ? Baud Rate
Parity Data bits Stop bits Relay Address
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
YES 300 bds 1 200 bds 4 800 bds 19 200 bds Odd 7 1
! ! ! ! ! !
Even
NO 600 bds 2 400 bds 9 600 bds 38 400 bds
!
8 2
None
! ! !
2.2.3.2 COMMUNICATION Menu (Courier) Communication ? Relay Address YES NO
P124/EN TA2/B44 APPENDIX 2 Page 14/32 2.2.3.3 COMMUNICATION Menu (IEC 60870-5-103) Communication ?
Baud Rate
! ! ! ! !
YES 300 bds 1 200 bds 4 800 bds 19 200 bds
! ! ! ! !
NO 600 bds 2 400 bds 9 600 bds 38 400 bds
Relay Address 2.2.3.4 COMMUNICATION Menu (DNP3) Communication ?
Baud Rate
! ! ! ! !
YES 300 bds 1 200 bds 4 800 bds 19 200 bds
! ! ! ! !
NO 600 bds 2 400 bds 9 600 bds 38 400 bds
Relay Address 2.2.4 PROTECTION G1 Menu
2.2.4.1 Phase Overcurrent [50/51]

2.2.4.1.A
[50/51] I>
l> ? l> Delay Type

2.2.4.1.A.A
! !
YES ln IDMT
! !
ms DMT
NO
RI
[51] I> DMT
tl>
2.2.4.1.A.B
[51] I> IDMT
Idmt
! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! !
IEC RC
Tms

2.2.4.1.A.C
t Reset
2.2.4.1.A.D
ms
Rtms
2.2.4.1.A.E
[51] I> RI
K t Reset
2.2.4.1.B
ms
[51] I>>
I>> ? I>> tI>>

2.2.4.1.C
YES In ms
NO
[51] I>>>
I>>> ? I>>> tI>>> 2.2.4.2

2.2.4.2.A
YES In ms
NO
Earth Overcurrent [50N/51N] [50N/51N] E/Gnd
le> ? le> Delay Type

2.2.4.2.A.A
! !
YES
!
len
NO
IDMT
DMT
!
ms
RI
! LABOR.
[51N] Ie > DMT
tle>
2.2.4.2.A.B
[51N] Ie > IDMT
Idmt
! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! !
IEC RC
Tms

2.2.4.2.A.C
[51N] Ie> LABOR.
Delay type LABOR. Idmt

2.2.4.2.A.D
!
!
ms
t Reset
2.2.4.2.A.E
Rtms
2.2.4.2.A.F
[51N] Ie> RI
K t Reset
2.2.4.2.B
ms
[51N] Ie>>
Ie>> ? Ie>> tIe>>

2.2.4.2.C
YES Ien ms
NO
[51N] Ie >>>
Ie>>> ? Ie>>> tIe>>> 2.2.4.3 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD
YES Ien ms
NO
[49] Therm OL ? I > Te k Trip [49] Alarm ? Alarm 2.2.4.4 I< ? I< tI< [37] UNDERCURRENT I<
YES In ms %
NO
YES %
NO
YES % ms
NO
Technical Guide Commissioning test and record sheets MiCOM P124 2.2.4.5 I2> ? I2> Delay Type
2.2.4.5.A
[46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>
! !
YES In IDMT
! !
DMT
NO
RI
[46] I2> DMT ms [46] I2> IDMT
tI2>
2.2.4.5.B
Idmt
! ! ! ! !
[46] I2> DMT reset time
! ! ! ! !
Tms
2.2.4.5.C
t Reset
2.2.4.5.D
ms
[46] I2> IDMT reset time
Rtms
2.2.4.5.E
[46] I2> RI
K t Reset ms
P124/EN TA2/B44 APPENDIX 2 Page 18/32 2.2.4.6 [79] AUTORECLOSER (OPTION)
[79] Autoreclose ? Ext CB Fail ? Ext CB Fail Time Ext Block ? Dead Time tD1 Dead Time tD2 Dead Time tD3 Dead Time tD4 Reclaim Time tR Inhib Time tI Phase Cycles E/Gnd Cycles Cycles tI> Cycles tI>> Cycles tI>>> Cycles tIe> Cycles tIe>> Cycles tIe>>> Cycles tAux1 Cycles tAux2
! ! !
YES YES
! !
ms
NO NO
YES
!
ms ms ms ms ms ms
NO
Technical Guide Commissioning test and record sheets MiCOM P124 2.2.5 PROTECTION G2 Menu 2.2.5.1
2.2.5.1.A
Phase Overcurrent [50/51] [50/51] I> I> ? I> Delay Type
! !
YES In IDMT
! !
ms DMT
NO
RI
2.2.5.1.A.A
[51] I> DMT
tI>
2.2.5.1.A.B
[51] I> IDMT
Idmt
! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! !
IEC RC
Tms
2.2.5.1.A.C
t Reset
2.2.5.1.A.D
ms
Rtms
2.2.5.1.A.E
[51] I> RI
K t Reset
2.2.5.1.B
ms
[51] I>> I>> ? I>> tI>> [51] I>>> I>>> ? I>>> tI>>>
YES In
!
ms
NO
2.2.5.1.C
YES In
!
ms
NO
P124/EN TA2/B44 APPENDIX 2 Page 20/32 2.2.5.2

2.2.5.2.A
Earth Overcurrent [50N/51N] [50N/51N] E/Gnd Ie> ? Ie> Delay Type
! !
YES
!
Ien
NO
IDMT
DMT
!
ms
RI
LABOR.
2.2.5.2.A.A
[51N] Ie > DMT
tIe>
2.2.5.2.A.B
[51N] Ie > IDMT
Idmt
! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! !
IEC RC
Tms
2.2.5.2.A.C
[51N] Ie> LABOR.
Delay type LABOR. Idmt

2.2.5.2.A.D
!
!
ms
t Reset
2.2.5.2.A.E
Rtms
2.2.5.2.A.F
[51N] Ie> RI
K t Reset
2.2.5.2.B
ms
[51N] Ie>> Ie>> ? Ie>> tIe>>
YES
!
len ms
NO

2.2.5.2.C
[51N] Ie >>> Ie>>> ? Ie>>> tIe>>>
YES
!
len ms
NO
2.2.5.3
[49] THERMAL OVERLOAD [49] Therm OL ? I > Te k Trip [49] Alarm ? Alarm %
YES In mn
NO
YES %
NO
2.2.5.4
[37] UNDERCURRENT I< I< ? I< tI<
YES % ms
NO
2.2.5.5
[46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2> I2> ? I2> Delay Type
! !
YES In IDMT
! !
DMT
NO
RI
2.2.5.5.A
[46] I2> DMT tI2> ms
2.2.5.5.B
[46] I2> IDMT Idmt
! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! !
Tms

2.2.5.5.C
[46] I2> DMT reset time ms
t Reset
2.2.5.5.D
[46] I2> IDMT reset time
Rtms
2.2.5.5.E
[46] I2> RI
K t Reset 2.2.5.6 [79] AUTORECLOSER (OPTION) ms
[79] Autoreclose ? Ext CB Fail ? Ext CB Fail Time Ext Block ? Dead Time tD1 Dead Time tD2 Dead Time tD3 Dead Time tD4 Reclaim Time tR Inhib Time tI Phase Cycles E/Gnd Cycles Cycles tI> Cycles tI>> Cycles tI>>> Cycles tIe> Cycles tIe>> Cycles tIe>>> Cycles tAux1 Cycles tAux2
! ! !
YES YES
! !
ms
NO NO
YES
!
ms ms ms ms ms ms
NO
Technical Guide Commissioning test and record sheets MiCOM P124 2.2.6 AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu 2.2.6.1 TRIP Command allocation (RL1)
Trip tI> Trip tI>> Trip tI>>> Trip tIe> Trip tIe>> Trip tIe>>> Trip tI< Trip t I2> Trip Thermal Trip Brkn Cond Trip tAux1 Trip tAux2 2.2.6.2 Latch function allocation to RL1
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
Latch tI> Latch tI>> Latch tI>>> Latch tIe> Latch tIe>> Latch tIe>>> Latch tI< Latch tI2> Latch Thermal Latch Brkn . Cond Latch tAux1 Latch tAux2
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
P124/EN TA2/B44 APPENDIX 2 Page 24/32 2.2.6.3 Blocking Logic 1 function allocation
Block 1 tI> Block 1 tI>> Block 1 tI>>> Block 1 tIe> Block 1 tIe>> Block 1 tIe>>> Block 1 tI2> Block 1 Thermal Block 1 Brkn. Cond Block 1 tAux1 Block 1 tAux2 2.2.6.4
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
ms
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
Blocking Logic 2 function allocation YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
Block 2 tI> Block 2 tI>> Block 2 tI>>> Block 2 tIe> Block 2 tIe>> Block 2 tIe>>> Block 2 tI2> Block 2 Thermal Block 2 Brkn. Cond Block 2 tAux1 Block 2 tAux2 2.2.6.5
Selective Scheme Logic1 function allocation YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO
Logic Select 1 Sel1 tI>> Sel1 tI>>> Sel1 tIe>> Sel1 tIe>>> t Sel1
Technical Guide Commissioning test and record sheets MiCOM P124 2.2.6.6 Selective Scheme Logic2 function allocation
Logic Select 2 Sel2 tI>> Sel2 tI>>> Sel2 tIe>> Sel2 tIe>>> t Sel2
! ! ! ! !
YES YES YES YES YES ms
! ! ! ! !
NO NO NO NO NO
P124/EN TA2/B44 APPENDIX 2 Page 26/32 2.2.6.7

2.2.6.7.A
OUTPUT RELAYS allocation OUTPUT RELAYS allocation (RL2 to RL4) Functions RL 2 RL 3 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO RL 4 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
Trip I> tI> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> tI< tI2> Therm Alarm Therm Trip CB Alarm 52 Fail Brkn Cond CB Fail CB Close tAux1 tAux2 79 Run 79 Trip Active Group
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

2.2.6.7.B
OUTPUT RELAYS allocation (RL5 and RL6) Functions RL 5 RL 6
Trip I> tI> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> tI< tI2> Therm Alarm Therm Trip CB Alarm 52 Fail Brkn Cond CB Fail CB Close tAux1 tAux2 79 Run 79 Trip Active Group
! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES
! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO
! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES
! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO
P124/EN TA2/B44 APPENDIX 2 Page 28/32 2.2.6.8 Configuration of the latch of the output relays RL2 to RL6
Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6
! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES ! YES
! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO ! NO
Technical Guide Commissioning test and record sheets MiCOM P124 2.2.6.9
2.2.6.9.A
LOGIC INPUT allocation Inputs
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
None 52b Aux 2 Strt Dist Log Sel 2 Block - 79 None 52b Aux 2 Strt Dist Log Sel 2 Block - 79 None 52b Aux 2 Strt Dist Log Sel 2 Block - 79 None 52b Aux 2 Strt Dist Log Sel 2 Block - 79 None 52b Aux 2 Strt Dist Log Sel 2 Block - 79
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Unlatch CB FLT Blk Log (1) Cold L PU Change Set Trip Circ Unlatch CB FLT Blk Log (1) Cold L PU Change Set Trip Circ Unlatch CB FLT Blk Log (1) Cold L PU Change Set Trip Circ Unlatch CB FLT Blk Log (1) Cold L PU Change Set Trip Circ Unlatch CB FLT Blk Log (1) Cold L PU Change Set Trip Circ
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
52a Aux 1 Blk Log (2) Log Sel 1

Reset Start tBf

Reset Start tBf

Reset Start tBf

Reset Start tBf

Reset Start tBf

2.2.6.9.B
t AUX Aux 1 : Time tAux 1 Aux 2 : Time tAux 2 ms ms
2.2.6.10
BROKEN CONDUCTOR Brkn Cond tBC RATIO I2/I1
YES ms %
NO
2.2.6.11
Cold Load Pick up Cold Load PU ? tI> ? tI>> ? tI>>> ? tIe> ? tIe>> ? tIe>>> ? t2> ? T Therm ? Level tCL
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES % ms
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
2.2.6.12
CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE CB Fail ? I< tBF Block I> ? Block Ie> ?
! ! !
YES % In ms YES YES
! ! !
NO
NO NO
Technical Guide Commissioning test and record sheets MiCOM P124 2.2.6.13 CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION CT Supervision t SUP CB Open S'vision CB Open Time CB Close S'vision CB Close Time CB Open Alarm? CB Open NB Amps(n)? n t Open Pulse t Close Pulse 2.2.7 2.2.7.1 RECORDS Menu DISTURBANCE RECORD Pre-time Post-time Disturb Rec Trig 2.2.7.2 TIME PEAK VALUE Time Window mn ms ms ms ms
! ! ! ! !
YES s YES ms YES ms YES
! ! ! ! !
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
SUR INST.
ON TRIP
BLANK PAGE
Publication: P124/EN T/D44

AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/

Micom P124: Self & Dual Powered Overcurrent Relays

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micom P124: Self & Dual Powered Overcurrent Relays

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P124

Self & Dual Powered Overcurrent Relays

Technical Guide MiCOM P124

P124/EN T/B44 Page 1/2

SELF & DUAL POWERED OVERCURRENT RELAYS MiCOM P124 CONTENT

Handling, installation and case dimensions

User Guide P124 Self-powered Relay

Menu Content MiCOM P124 Self-powered

User Guide P124 Dual-powered Relay

Menu Content MiCOM P124 Dual-powered

Technical data & curves characteristics

Commissioning and Maintenance Guide

Commissioning test and record sheets

P124/EN T/B44 Page 2/2

Technical Guide MiCOM P124

Technical Guide MiCOM P124

Technical Guide MiCOM P124

P124/EN T00/B44 Safety Section Page 1/6

INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS

DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

P124/EN T00/B44 Safety Section Page 2/6

Technical Guide MiCOM P124

Technical Guide MiCOM P124

P124/EN T00/B44 Safety Section Page 3/6

Protective/safety *earth terminal

P124/EN T00/B44 Safety Section Page 4/6

Technical Guide MiCOM P124

INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS

Technical Guide MiCOM P124

P124/EN T00/B44 Safety Section Page 5/6

DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Installation Category (Overvoltage):

IEC 601010-1: 1990/A2: Category III EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: Category III

P124/EN T00/B44 Safety Section Page 6/6

Technical Guide MiCOM P124

Technical Guide MiCOM P124

Technical Guide Introduction MiCOM P124

P124/EN T01/B44 CHAPTER 1 Page 1/6

P124/EN T01/B44 CHAPTER 1 Page 2/6

Technical Guide Introduction MiCOM P124

Technical Guide Introduction MiCOM P124

P124/EN T01/B44 CHAPTER 1 Page 3/6

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

P124/EN T01/B44 CHAPTER 1 Page 4/6

Technical Guide Introduction MiCOM P124

INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P124 RELAYS

Technical Guide Introduction MiCOM P124

P124/EN T01/B44 CHAPTER 1 Page 5/6

Protection functions Non-directional three-phase overcurrent (50/51)

Current maximum and average values X

P124/EN T01/B44 CHAPTER 1 Page 6/6 NOTES :

Technical Guide MiCOM P124

CHAPTER 2 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions

Technical Guide Handling, installation and case dimensions MiCOM P124

P124/EN T02/C44 CHAPTER 2 Page 1/8

HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RELAY MOUNTING UNPACKING STORAGE CASE DIMENSIONS

P124/EN T02/C44 CHAPTER 2 Page 2/8

Technical Guide Handling, installation and case dimensions MiCOM P124

Technical Guide Handling, installation and case dimensions MiCOM P124

P124/EN T02/C44 CHAPTER 2 Page 3/8

P124/EN T02/C44 CHAPTER 2 Page 4/8

Technical Guide Handling, installation and case dimensions MiCOM P124